LIBRARY 

OF  THE 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 


©I  FT    OF 


Class1 


WAR  DEPARTMENT 
OFFICE  OF  THE  QUARTERMASTER -GENERAL 


MANUAL  OF         : 
PACK  TRANSPORTATION 


U.S>.    QUARTERMASTER'S  DEPARTMENT 


BY 

MR.  H.  W.  DALY 

Chief  Packer 

UNDER  DIRECTION  OF- THE  QUARTERMASTER-GENERAL 
U.  S.  ARMY 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1910 


WAR   DEPARTMENT, 
Document  No.  360. 

OFFICE   OF  THE  QUARTERMASTER-GENERAL. 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
OFFICE  OF  THE  CHIEF  OF  STAFF, 

Washington,  January  11,  1910. 

The  following  Manual  of  Pack  Transportation,  revised  1910,  is 
published  for  the  information  and  guidance  of  the  Regular  Army  and 
for  observance  by  the  Organized  Militia  of  the  United  States. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

TASKER  H.  BLISS, 
Brigadier-General,  General  Staff, 

Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 


r^  f\  r\  r\ 


fit   ':'  ; 


COJ^TETsTTS. 


Section.  Page. 

Preface 11 

General  history 15 

Evolution  of  the  aparejo 18 

Evolution  of  the  diamond  hitch 25 

CHAPTER  I. 

Pack  saddles,  description  and  uses: 

The  aparejo 1  26 

Accessories  of  the  aparejo 1  28 

Crosstree  or  sawbuck 2  29 

Moore  pack  saddle 3  29 

CHAPTER  II. 

Assembling  and  care  of  the  aparejo: 

Selection  of  sticks  suitable  for  ribbing  aparejos 4  33 

Selection  of  hay  suitable  as  padding  for  aparejos 5  33 

Setting  up  the  aparejo 6  33 

Setting  up  the  Daly  aparejo  for  use -7  37 

Care  of  the  aparejo 8  40 

Causes  of  body  and  belly  "bunches"  and  sore  tails,  sore  withers  and 
loins  or  kidney  sores  on  pack  mules  and  directions  for  their  preven- 
tion and  cure 9  40 

CHAPTER  III. 

Instruction  of  the  individual  packer  in  preparation  for  his  duties  in  the 
pack  train: 

1.  Securing  and  coiling  ropes — 

How  to  prepare  lash,  sling,  and  lair  ropes 10  44 

How  to  do  up  a  lash  rope 11  45 

How  to  do  up  a  sling  rope 12  45 

How  to  do  up  a  lair  rope 13  45 

2.  Lairing  up  the  packs — 

How  to  square  ends  of  packs  and  tie  before  lairing  up 14  45 

How  to  lair  up  side  packs , 15  46 

How  to  lair  up  side  pack  of  ropes  without  the  aid  of  pack  cover 

or  manta 16  47 

How  to  lair  up  an  aparejo  and  riding  saddle  for  storage  or 

shipment 17        47 

3.  Putting  the  aparejo  on  the  mule — 

How  to  fold  an  aparejo  blanket 18  48 

How  to  place  blanket  on  aparejo  preparatory  to  putting  on  the 

aparejo 19  48 

How  to  blind  a  pack  mule 20  48 

How  to  place  corona,  blanket,  and  aparejo  on  the  mule 21  48 

How  to  turn  the  crupper 22  51 

How  to  cinch  an  aparejo 23  51 

Forming  the  load  preparatory  to  loading  the  mule 24  54 

5 


6  CONTENTS. 

Instruction  of  the  individual  packer  in  preparation  for  his  duties  in  the 
pack  train — Continued. 

4.  Slinging  the  load—                                                                                 Section.  Page. 

How  to  place  the  sling  rope  on  the  aparejo 25  54 

How  to  lift  side  packs  and  place  them  on  the  aparejo 26  55 

How  to  sling  the  load  and  tie  the  square  knot 27  55 

How  to  brake  a  side  pack 28  58 

How  to  double  sling  the  side  packs  when  length  of  packs 

requires  it 29  60 

How  to  cross  sling  side  packs  when  top  packs  are  necessary 30  60 

How  to  double  cross  sling  side  packs  when  length  of  packs 

requires  it 31  61 

5.  Lashing  the  load — 

How  to  form  the  diamond  hitch 32  61 

How  to  form  the  double  diamond 33  90 

How  to  form  the  double  hitch 34  91 

How  to  form  the  diamond  hitch  when  the  cinch  hook  is  lost  or 

broken 35  96 

How  one  packer  can  sling  the  load  and  form  the  diamond 

hitch 36  96 

How  to  form  the  pole  hitch 37  97 

How  to  form  the  Oregon  diamond  hitch 38  100 

6.  How  to  sling  the  load  and  form  the  crosstree  hitch  on  crosstree  or 

sawbuck — 

How  to  sling  the  load  on  crosstree 39  100 

How  to  form  the  crosstree  hitch 40  105 

How  to  form  the  stirrup  hitch 41  110 

7.  Taking  off  the  load  and  aparejo — 

How  to  take  off  the  lash  rope  and  the  load 42  110 

How  to  uncinch  an  aparejo  and  turn  the  crupper 43  117 

How  to  take  off  an  aparejo 44  117 

8.  Miscellaneous — 

Hbw  to  form  two  half  hitches,  the  pole  (clove)  hitch 45  117 

How  to  form  a  bowline  knot 46  118 

How  to  form  a  bowline  and  bight 47  118 

How  to  form  a  short  splice  on  rope 48  118 

How  to  form  a  long  splice  on  rope 49  119 

How  to  construct  a  travois 50  125 

How  to  improvise  a  stretcher 51  125 


CHAITER  IV. 

Instruction  in  the  service  of  a  pack  train : 

1.  Summary  of  duties  in  loading  and  unloading  a  train 52  130 

2.  Loading  a  pack  train — 

How  to  form  cargo  preparatory  to  loading  the  mules 53  130 

How  to  place  the  rigging 54  131 

How  to  teach  animals  to  come  properly  to  rigging 55  131 

How  to  tie  animals  at  rigging 56  132 

How  to  dp  up  halter  shank  before  tying  animal  to  his  load 57  135 

How  to  tie  an  animal  to  his  load 58  135 

How  to  load  a  pack  train  for  the  day's  march  in  the  most  ex- 
peditious manner 59  135 

Putting  on  the  aparejos 60  136 

Putting  on  the  cargo 61  136 

Leaving  the  park  or  camp  ground 62  137 

3.  Duties  of  packers  on  the  march — 

In  open  country 63  137 

On  bad  and  narrow  trails 64  137 

Up  and  down  a  mountain 65  138 

In  crossing  streams,  either  fording  or  swimming 66  138 

How  to  catch  a  pack  animal  when  his  load  needs  attention 67  138 

How  to  tighten  a  load  and  indicate  it  has  been  tightened 68  138 

How  to  teach  saddle  mules  to  stand 69  139 

Signal  code 70  139 


CONTENTS.  7 

Instruction  in  the  service  of  a  pack  train — Continued. 

4.  How  to  park  (unload)  a  pack  train—                                                   Section.  Page. 

Outline  of  duties 71  140 

How  pack  animals  should  be  led  to  cargador  for  convenience 

in  taking  off  the  rigging 72  140 

How  to  cover  cargo  and  tie  down 73  140 

How  to  cover  rigging  and  tie  down 74  141 

How  to  stretch  a  picket  line 75  141 

How  to  clean  coronas 76  142 

How  to  fold  pack  covers 77  143 

How  to  fold  rigging  covers 78  143 

How  to  fold  cargo  covers 79  143 

How  to  fold  feed  covers 80  143 

CHAPTER  V. 
Marches  and  loads: 

1.  What  may  be  required  of  the  pack  mule  under  ordinary  conditions.     81  144 

Mountainous  country 82  144 

Forced  marches 83  144 

2.  Gaits 84  145 

3.  Table  showing  loads  and  rates  of  travel  considered  practicable  for  a 

well-organized  and  seasoned  pack  train 85  145 

4.  Endurance  of  the  pack  mule  under  proper  conditions 86  146 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Organization: 

1.  Usual  organization  and  equipment  of  a  pack  train 87  148 

2.  Table  showing  size  and  quantity  of  rope  and  canvas  required  for  one 

pack  train 88  148 

3.  Articles  of  equipment  in  use  in  pack  trains — 

Mess  or  kitchen  boxes 89  149 

Packer's  field  stove,  with  kit 90  149 

Cooking  outfit,  without  stove 91  149 

Pack-train  mess  kit 92  149 

Clothes  or  war  bags 93  149 

Packer's  wardrobe 94  150 

Packer's  wall  tent 95  150 

Tool  sacks 96  150 

Grass  or  hay  pads 97  150 

Pack  covers 98  150 

Rigging  covers 99  150 

Cargo  covers 100  151 

Feed  covers 101  151 

Cargador's  box 102  151 

Cargador's  kit 103  151 

Blacksmith's  boxes 104  152 

Blacksmith's  kit 105  152 

4.  How  to  organize  a  pack  train 106  152 

5.  The  essential  conditions  in  the  selection  of  the  packer 107  154 

The  skilled  packer 108  154 

The  novice  or  unskilled  packer 109  155 

Instructions  to  pack  masters 110  156 

6.  Duties  of  individuals: 

The  chief  packer Ill  156 

The  assistant  chief  packer 112  157 

The  pack  master 113  157 

The  cargador  or  assistant  pack  master 114  158 

The  blacksmith 115  159 

The  packer 116  159 

The  cook 117  159 

What  packers  are  not  permitted  to  do -. 118  160 

Feeding 119  161 

Watering 120  161 

Grooming 121  161 

Traveling 122  162 

Camping 123  162 

Use  of  blinds 124  163 

Kindness  to  animals 125  163 

Precautions 126  163 

Glossary 127  164 


8  .  CONTENTS. 

Organization— Continued.                                                                                  Section.  Page. 

7.  Specifications  for  pack  and  riding  mules 128  165 

What  to  avoid  in  the  selection  of  pack  mules 129  166 

CHAPTER  VII. 

The  Daly  aparejo,  specifications  for  construction: 

1.  The  body  of  the  aparejo 130  167 

2.  The  crupper 130  170 

3.  The  aparejo  cover  or  sobre  jalma 130  171 

4.  The  aparejo  cincha 130  171 

5.  The  corona 130  172 

6.  The  pack  blanket 130  173 

7.  Halters 130  174 

8.  Packers'  blinds 130  174 

9.  Riding  saddles  (packers'),  Quartermaster's  Department 130  174 

10.  Bridles 130  176 

11.  Pack  covers 130  176 

12.  Rigging  covers 130  176 

13.  Cargo  covers 130  176 

14.  Feed  covers.. 130  180 

15.  Lash  rope  with  cincha  and  hook 130  180 

16.  Sling  ropes 130  180 

17.  Lair  ropes 130  180 

18.  Stamping ' 130  180 

Ribbing  for  Daly  aparejos 131  181 

19.  Saddle  bars 131  181 

20.  Boot  bars 131  181 

21.  Hickory  ribs 131  182 

22.  Hay 131  182 

Table  showing  weights  of  pack  saddles  and  equipments 132  183 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Special  devices: 

Packing  device  (Quartermaster's  Department 133  184 

Specifications  for  packing  device 133  189 

Table  showing  weights  of  packing  device 133  194 

Tool  pouches  (Engineer  Corps) 134  195 

Pack  chests  (Engineer  Corps) 135  195 

Pack  reel  (Signal  Corps) 136  199 

Pack  chests  (Signal  Corps) 137  201 

Litter  carrier  (Hospital  Corps) 138  201 

Specifications  for  the  Daly  litter  carrier 138  206 

Ammunition  boxes  (Ordnance  Department) 139  219 

Pack  outfit.    American  model  for  Maxim  automatic  machine  gun,  .30 

caliber 140  222 

Pack  outfit.     American  model  for  2.95-inch  Vickers-Maxim  mountain 

gun 141  229 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
OFFICE  OF  THE  QUARTERMASTER-GENERAL, 

Washington,  July  17,  1908. 

SIR:  I  have  the  honor  to  forward  herewith  manuscript  copy  of  a 
manual  entitled  'Tack  Transportation,  Q.  M.  D.,"  with  93  illustra- 
tions. 

Under  direction  of  this  office,  Mr.  H.  W.  Daly,  chief  packer  of  the 
army,  has  prepared  this  work,  which  was  later  sent  to  Col.  H.  L. 
Scott,  Superintendent  of  the  Military  Academy,  who  has  had  a  wide 
experience  with  pack  trains,  and  who,  at  the  request  of  the  Quarter- 
master-General, undertook  the  work  of  revision  of  this  manuscript. 
It  is  recommended  that  this  work  be  published  in  an  edition  of 
1,000  copies,  250  in  cloth  and  750  in  paper  binding.  So  far  as  this 
office  has  been  able  to  ascertain,  this  manual  contains  the  most  com- 
plete history  and  detailed  explanation  of  the  art  of  packing  that  has 
yet  been  published  and  is,  or  its  kind,  it  is  believed,  unique.  It  is 
considered  that  it  will  be  of  great  value  to  the  army  at  large  and  a 
valuable  addition  to  the  literature  heretofore  published  upon  this 
subject. 

In  transmitting  this  manuscript  for  publication  this  office  desires 
to  record  its  appreciative  thanks  to  Colonel  Scott  and  Mr.  Daly  for 
their  efforts,  which,  it  is  confidently  believed,  in  the  form  of  this 
publication,  will  be  valued  by  the  army  at  large. 
Very  respectfully, 

J.  B.  ALESHIRE, 

Quartermaster-General,  U.  S.  Army. 
To  the  SECRETARY  OF  WAR. 


PREFACE. 


The  writer  of  this  manual,  Mr.  Henry  W.  Daly,  chief  packmaster, 
Quartermaster's  Department,  U.  S.  Army,  is  the  last  of  the  old-time 
packers,  the  last  of  those  who  grew  up  with  the  pack  service  under 
Gen.  George  Crook,  some  of  whom  have  followed  "the  bell'7  from  the 
British  line  far  down  into  old  Mexico,  and  later  in  Alaska,  Cuba, 
China,  and  the  Philippines.  Of  them  all  he  stands  foremost  as  the 
most  observant,  the  one  who  has  added  most  to  the  efficiency  of  the 
pack  service,  and  one  who  has  placed  the  mounted  service  under  last- 
ing obligations  to  him — 

First.  By  discovering  the  causes  of  the  various  "bunches"  that 
arise  on  the  mule's  body. 

Second.  In  discovering  a  simple  remedy  which  reduces  these 
"bunches"  before  they  break  down  and  suppurate. 

Third.  By  his  various  inventions  described  in  these  pages. 

Fourth.  Finally,  by  placing  the  results  of  his  experience  in  written 
form,  so  as  to  be  preserved  for  the  use  of  others. 

From  time  to  time,  on  account  of  the  expense  and  difficulty  of  ap- 
plication, efforts  have  been  made  without  success  to  substitute  some 
other  system  of  packing  for  the  aparejo  and  the  diamond  hitch.  In 
testing  these  systems  there  is  always  one  fundamental  and  vital  ques- 
tion to  be  asked,  viz,  does  the  substitute  permit  the  rapid  and  easy 
alteration  of  the  bearing  surface  promptly  to  reduce  the  "bunches" 
which  arise  from  many  causes  and  which,  if  not  promptly  reduced, 
speedily  render  the  animal  unserviceable.  If  the  substitute  does  not 
adequately  meet  this  test  (which  so  far  has  only  been  met  by  the 
aparejo)  it  must  be  rejected.  There  are  many  other  important  ad- 
vantages possessed  by  the  aparejo  over  other  systems,  as  will  appear 
in  the  study  of  this  book. 

The  value  of  the  pack  train  has  not  lessened  since  the  days  of  the 
Indian  campaigns.  Rapid  and  prolonged  marches  (impossible  for 
wagons)  are  not  yet  out  of  date.  It  is  just  as  necessary  now  to  arrive 
on  the  field  with  food,  ammunition,  and  medical  supplies  as  it  ever 
was.  The  usefulness  of  the  pack  train  in  carrying  ammunition  to 
supply  the  firing  line  where  wagons  can  not  go  is  not  disputed  by 
anyone.  It  behooves,  therefore,  all  officers  of  the  mobile  force  to 
understand  the  management  of  the  pack  train  in  all  its  branches, 
remembering  that  the  "  thro  wing  of  the  diamond"  is  but  a  small  part 
of  the  art,  and  one  that  is  easily  and  quickly  learned ;  that  in  the  ad- 
justment of  the  interior  of  the  aparejo  lies  success  or  failure  in  the 
conservation  of  the  back  of  the  animal;  that  the  train  must  be  kept 
hard,  lean,  muscular,  and  docile  by  constant  exercise  carrying  loads, 
and  that  by  so  doing  mounted  officers  will  be  able  to  keep  the  accom- 

11 


12  PREFACE. 

plishment  of  their  plans  and  the  success  of  their  undertakings  in  their 
own  hands.  I  urge  upon  all  persons  in  authority  that  they  cherish 
the  pack  train  and  the  packer,  and  see  to  it  that  proper  trains  are 
always  ready  in  time  of  need,  which  time  will  come  at  the  very  begin- 
ning of  any  war  on  land. 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
Colonel,  U.  S.  Army, 
Superintendent  U.  8.  Military  Academy. 

WEST  POINT,  N.  Y.,  December  10,  1907. 

In  the  present  book  it  is  designed  to  give  a  general  history  of  pack 
transportation,  its  employment  in  European  and  Asiatic  countries, 
and  its  introduction  into  and  development  in  the  army  of  the  United 
States,  including  a  description  of  the  various  pack  saddles,  their  com- 
parative usefulness,  and  the  latest  improvements. 

In  the  school  system  of  packing  the  detailed  instruction  of  an  in- 
dividual packer  is  first  considered;  then  the  more  general  instruc- 
tions applicable  to  the  service  of  a  pack  train  is  provided  for.  A  brief 
discussion  of  marches  and  loads  is  included,  with  carefully  prepared 
tables,  showing  practicable  marches,  loads,  and  rates  of  travel,  etc., 
for  a  well-organized  pack  train. 

A  few  notes  on  feeding,  watering,  traveling,  etc.,  are  included,  as 
also  a  glossary  of  terms. 

H.  W.  D. 

FORT  LEAVENWORTH,  KANS.,  June,  1907. 


14 


PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


GENERAL  HISTORY. 

Primitive  man  in  seeking  a  mode  of  transportation  other  than  that 
of  the  personal  burthen  naturally  utilized  the  most  docile  and  tracta- 
ble of  the  available  animal  kingdom.  The  elephant,  camel,  llama.,  ox, 
horse,  mule,  burro,  reindeer,  and  dog,  all  by  natural  selection,  have 
paid  tribute  to  assist  him  in  his  travels. 

There  resulted  necessarily  pack  saddles  of  various  designs  adapted 
to  the  conformation  of  the  animal  employed. 

When  man  in  an  inventive  mood  introduced  the  "wheel"  and  de- 
veloped this  wheel  transportation  progressively  by  animal  draft, 
steam,  and  electrical  power,  the  employment  of  pack  animals  as  the 
only  means  of  rapid  transportation  had  been  relieved  to  a  considerable 
extent;  yet  the  occasion  has  and  will  oftentimes  be  necessary  to  cut 
loose  from  railroad  and  animal  draft,  when  time,  celerity,  and  free- 
dom of  movement  becomes  a  prime  factor  in  the  success  of  an  under- 
taking, especially  in  the  zone  of  active  operations. 

The  "crosstree"  or  sawbuck  and  the  "aparejo"  are  used  by  civilized 
man,  and  it  is  a  question  which  antedates  the  other. 

The  crosstree  may  be  said  to  be  universal,  as  it  has  been  in  use  in 
European  and  Asiatic  countries  for  centuries.  It  is  believed  that  the 
Romans  carried  it  into  Gaul  (France)  and  Britain  in  the  conquest  of 
these  countries  under  Julius  Csesar.  The  French  and  the  British  car- 
ried it  into  Canada  and  the  United  States  in  the  settlement  of  those 
territories. 

In  the  mountainous  portions  of  the  British  Isles  and  Switzerland 
there  may  be  still  seen  the  original  method  of  carrying  marketable 
supplies  in  "wicker"  baskets  fitted  over  the  forks  of  the  saddle  and 
strapped  to  the  donkey  by  the  cincha  and  tightening  strap.  It  is  not 
unusual  for  the  baskets  to  be  unequally  loaded,  and  often  the  loads  are 
balanced  by  the  addition  of  a  billet  of  wood  or  a  few  stones.  I  have 
seen  a  sack  of  wheat  en  route  to  the  mill  balanced  by  a  large  stone  in 
the  opposite  basket;  also,  en  route  to  market,  all  hobbled  and  alive,  a 
pig  balancing  a  goat  and  a  bunch  of  chickens. 

In  Canada,  United  States,  Mexico,  and  South  America  they  use 
"panniers"  (French for  basket)  or  pouches,  made  of  canvas  or  leather 
which  fit  over  the  forks  of  the  saddle  and  are  strapped  to  the  animal 
with  cincha  and  tightening  strap.  In  the  above-named  countries 
organized  "burro"  pack  trains  equipped  with  these  panniers  are  em- 
ployed to  pack  the  ore  from  the  mines  to  the  stamp  mills. 

The  system  of  "slinging  and  lashing"  the  load  by  means  of  ropes 
was  seldom  employed  in  the  government  service  because  of  a  lack  of 
pad  protection  for  the  animal's  body.  However,  the  system  was  used 

15 


16  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

by  Gen.  R.  S.  Mackenzie  after  the  civil  war  in  his  Indian  campaigns 
against  the  Kiowas  and  Comanches  in  the  Southwest.  The  individual 
trapper,  miner,  and  prospector  packed  with  this  system  his  few  wants, 
consisting  of  his  grub  stake  and  mining  tools. 

The  aparejo  (pronounced  "  ap-pa-ray-ho " ) ,  a  pack  saddle,  is  be- 
lieved to  be  of  Arabian  origin,  the  Arabs  being  a  nomadic  and  pas- 
toral people,  employing  the  camel,  horse,  burro  and  its  cross  descend- 
ant, the  mule,  indigenous  to  Asiatic  countries.  The  origin  of  the 
aparejo  dates  back  to  the  employment  of  these  animals  as  beasts  of 
burden  from  remotest  ages. 

The  aparejo  was  introduced  into  Spain  by  the  Moors  (see  footnote) 
on  the  conquest  of  that  country  in  the  eighth  century,  and  on  the 
discovery  of  the  western  continent  (America)  the  Spaniards  carried 
it  into  South  America  and  Mexico.  Irving  in  his  Conquest  of  Gran- 
ada0 records  that  Isabella  of  Spain,  in  1486,  organized,  equipped,  and 
maintained  pack  trains  for  the  conquest  of  Granada,  aggregating 
14,000  mules  and  burros,  which  carried  supplies  and  munitions  of 
war  for  her  army  of  13,000  cavalry  and  40,000  infantry.  In  the 
retinue  of  many  nobles  of  note  (Don  Inigo  Lopez  de  Mendoza,  Duke 
of  Infantado) b  the  sumpter  (pack)  mules  had  housings  similar  to 
those  of  the  cavalry,  of  rich  cloth  embroidered  with  gold,  and  others 
of  brocade  with  halters  of  silk,  while  the  bridles,  headpieces,  and  all 
the  harnessings  glittered  with  silver.  An  imitation  of  this  feudal 
custom  was  made  in  the  United  States  Government  service  prior  to  the 
Spanish- American  war,  1898,  when  the  "arrieros"  (packers)  would 
spend  odd  hours  of  loving  toil  upon  the  "grupera"  and  " corona" 
(crupper  and  saddle  cloth),  working  the  representation  of  some  ani- 
mal, bird,  insignia,  or  legend  with  silken  thread  of  various  colors;  the 
saddle,  stock  or  cowboy,  costing,  when  "full  rigged,"  from  $75  to 
$100,  with  its  full  skirting,  sweaters,  toe  fenders  fitting  over  the  stir- 
rups, from  12  to  18  inches  long,  and  cantinas  (saddle  pockets)  over 
cantle  and  pommel,  the  pommel  being  provided  with  the  customary 
horn  or  cap  (cabeza  de  silla),  a  necessary  holdfast  when  throwing 
the  lasso  and  various  other  uses  known  to  western  men.  The  whole 
beautifully  stamped  or  engraved  by  hand,  was  trimmed  with  beaten 
silver  dollars  (Mexican),  cut,  and  chased  in  various  designs  to  suit 
the  "arriero;"  the  bridle  in  similar  manner  with  bit  and  spurs  (Span- 
ish) chased  and  inlaid  with  silver  and  gold,  the  spurs  having  a  bunch 
of  tiny  spangles  which  were  made  to  tinkle  in  the  strut  of  the  packer, 
who  would  thus  affect  the  garb  of  his  Spanish  brother,  wearing  high- 
heeled  top  boots,  with  silken  banda  (sash)  wrapped  two  or  three  times 
around  the  waist,  embroidered  shirt  front,  and  conical  sombrero 
(Mexican  hat)  with  silver  snake  around  the  crown,  the  under  side  of 
brim  being  trimmed  with  silver  braid. 

NOTE. — Prior  to  the  expulsion  of  the  Moors  the  Moriscos  of  Spain  practically  con- 
trolled all  the  inland  (pack)  transportation.  Many  of  their  merchants  became  very 
wealthy  and  contributed  very  largely  to  the  revenues  of  the  Spanish  Crown.  Over- 
taxation, the  improvidence  of  the  Spanish  princes,  and  the  expulsion  of  these  frugal 
and  industrious  people  may  be  said  to  have  led  to  the  decline  of  Spain  as  a  world 
power. 

Such  was  the  holiday  costume  of  the  packer  of  thirty-five  or  forty 
years  ago,  when,  mounted  on  his  favorite  mule,  he  would  sing  some 

a  Irving,  Conquest  of  Granada,  chap.  LXX,  p.  383. 
6  Conquest  of  Granada,  p.  225. 


OF   THE  \ 

UNIVERSITY    ft 

^3#ANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  17 


Spanish  ditty  when  visiting  friends  in  some  near-by  hamlet;  a  man 
who  never  turned  his  back  on  a  foe  or  forsook  a  friend  in  moments 
of  peril,  honest  and  honorable  in  all  his  dealings  with  his  fellow- 
men,  kind  to  animals  in  his  care,  with  a  love  for  his  calling,  and 
thoroughly  imbued  with  an  "  esprit  de  corps"  for  the  pack  service. 

On  the  discovery  of  gold  in  California  the  adaptability  of  the  pack 
mule  for  carrying  supplies  into  the  mining  camps,  not  accessible  by 
wagons,  was  readily  recognized  by  the  Americans.  The  mule  and 
aparejo  were  in  constant  demand,  and  the  employment  of  pack  trains 
became  a  source  of  profit  to  many  individuals. 

In  Mexico,  on  the  road  from  Vera  Cruz  to  the  City  of  Mexico,  a 
stone-paved  road  (Calzada),  laid  out  by  Cortez,  and  nearly  300  miles 
long,  I  have  seen  before  the  advent  of  the  railroad,  in  1873,  pack 
trains  loaded  with  coffee,  sugar,  and  spices.  These  packs  were  made 
up  to  weigh  from  100  to  125  pounds  each,  and  were  wrapped  in  coarse 
matting  made  from  the  fiber  of  the  agave  and  other  indigenous  plants. 

Rates  for  freighting,  ranging  from  30  to  75  cents  per  ton  per  mile, 
or  for  the  service  of  the  animal  for  the  trip  from  $18  to  $25,  com- 
pared favorably  with  the  rates  charged  after  the  discovery  of  gold 
in  California,  when  pack  trains,  controlled  by  Americans,  dotted 
the  hills,  carrying  provisions,  furniture,  mining  supplies,  etc.,  to 
the  mining  towns  in  Oregon,  Washington,  Idaho,  Montana,  Nevada, 
and  California. 

In  the  early  fifties  and  sixties  on  the  trail  from  The  Dalles  to 
Umatilla  Landing,  Walla  Walla,  Lewiston,  Kootenay,  Salmon  River, 
Frazer  River,  etc.,  could  be  heard  from  hill  to  hill  the  tinkle  of  the 
pack-train  "bell  horse."  The  "bell"  was  ordinarily  a  sheep  bell 
attached  by  a  strap  to  the  neck  of  the  horse.  The  latter  is  termed 
the  "bellhorse,  "  and  is  alluded  to  as  the  "bell,"  in  such  expressions 
as  "lead  the  bell,"  "stop  the  bell,"  etc. 

The  service  rendered  by  civilian  aparejo  pack  trains  employed  by 
Gen.  George  Crook,  after  the  close  of  the  civil  war,  in  operations 
against  the  hostile  Paiutes,  Shoshones,  and  Bannocks  in  Nevada, 
Oregon,  and  Idaho  was  so  satisfactory  that  he  caused  the  purchase 
of  three  of  these  trains  by  our  Government,  so  that  General  Crook 
may  well  be  called  the  "father"  of  modern  pack  service  in  the  United 
States  Army. 

On  the  assignment  of  General  Crook  to  the  Department  of  Arizona, 
these  trains  were  transferred  with  him  and  others  organized  for  the 
campaign  against  the  hostile  Apaches,  known  as  the  "Tonto  Basin 
war,"  1871-1875.  These  trains  were  under  the  supervision  of  Thomas 
Moore  as  chief  packer  and  Dave  Mears,  assistant  chief  packer,  and 
the  names  of  Hank  and  Yank,  Jim  O'Neil,  Harry  Haws,  Chileno 
John,  Frank  Monack,  Sam  Bowman,  the  two  Crooks  ("Long"  and 
"Short"  Jim),  Bill  Knight,  Nat  Noble,  Charley  Hopkins,  Bill  Duklin, 
Manuel  Lopez,  and  Lem  Pyatt  are  inseparably  connected  with  those 
campaigns. 

In  1875  a  number  of  these  trains  were  transferred  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  the  Platte,  taking  station  at  Camp  Carlin,  Cheyenne,  Wyo., 
under  Maj.  J.  V.  Furey,  depot  quartermaster,  and  still  others  organ- 
ized for  the  expedition  of  1876,  known  as  the  "Sioux  campaign." 
These  trains  were  likewise  under  the  supervision  of  Thomas  Moore,  as 
chief  packer,  and  Dave  Mears,  assistant  chief  packer;  and  the  names  of 
24758—10  -  2 


18  MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 

Dick  Closter  (better  known  as  " Uncle  Dick").  Johnny  Patrick,  Ed. 
Delaney,  John  Jaycox,  Frank  Houston,  Pat  Nolan,  Tom  McCaulif, 
Tom  Mason,  and  George  Dalton,  packmasters,  were  inseparably  con- 
nected with  the  "Sioux  campaigns." 

The  success  of  General  Crook  in  being  able  to  cut  loose  from  his 
wagon  transportation,  rendering  his  command  thoroughly  mobile 
by  the  aid  of  pack  trains,  led  to  their  further  employment  by  other 
officers  of  the  Army,  viz,  Generals  Mackenzie,  Howard,  Terry,  Ouster, 
and  Miles,  in  the  subjugation  of  the  hostile  tribes,  notably  the  war- 
like Sioux,  Cheyennes,  Nez  Perces,  and  Arapahoes  in  the  Northwest, 
the  fleet  and  vindictive  Kiowas  and  Comanches  through  the  Middle 
West,  and  last,  but  not  least,  the  wily,  slippery,  and  bloodthirsty 
Apache  tribes  who  overran  Arizona,  New  Mexico,  and  Texas. 

Through  all  the  arduous  field  service  necessitated  by  campaigns 
against  these  various  tribes,  the  pack  mule  has  borne  its  part,  and 
now  may  be  regarded  as  thoroughly  identified  with  our  Army  as  an 
essential  means  of  transportation. 

As  instancing  a  case  in  which  pack  animals  have  been  employed  for 
continuous  work,  the  Geronimo  campaign,  lasting  from  May,  1885, 
to  September,  1886,  may  be  mentioned.  Several  pack  trains  followed 
the  troops,  taking  part  in  the  various  operations.  These  trains  were 
continuously  on  the  move,  traveling  through  the  Territories  of  New 
Mexico  and  Arizona,  and  through  the  States  of  Sonora  and  Chi- 
huahua in  old  Mexico,  crossing  the  Sierra  Madre  Mountains  at  their 
highest  and  most  precipitous  part,  from  Opata  in  Sonora  to  Casas 
Grandes  in  Chihuahua.  Through  such  a  country  any  other  form  of 
transportation  would  have  been  utterly  impracticable. 

The  mules  carried  loads  averaging  250  pounds;  the  average  day's 
march  was  30  miles,  except  when  climbing  mountains,  when  about 
15  miles  per  day  was  the  rule.  The  mules  subsisted  entirely  on  the 
grasses  found  in  the  country,  and  when  the  campaign  was  over  were 
returned  to  their  posts  in  good  condition. 

As  embodying  some  of  the  results  of  this  experience  with  these 
trains  for  years,  the  present  book  aims  to  provide  a  system  of  instruc- 
tion in  the  duties  of  a  packer  and  in  the  service  of  a  pack  train. 

H.  W.  DALY, 
Chief  Packer,  Quartermaster's  Department, 

United  States  Army. 

EVOLUTION  OF  THE  APABEJO. 

The  aparejos  used  by  the  Mexicans  a  may  be  divided  into  two  classes, 
having  special  uses — the  first  made  of  matting,  from  the  fiber  of  the 
agave  or  similar  fibrous  plants  growing  in  abundance  in  Mexico;  the 
second  of  leather,  of  Mexican  tan  and  finish.  The  first  is  used  exten- 
sively by  what  we  term  in  the  United  States  "truck"  farmers,  who 
may  be  seen  in  the  small  hours  of  the  morning  approaching  the  ham- 
let, town,  or  city,  driving  before  them  a  few  donkeys  laden  with  grass, 
wood,  live  or  dressed  pigs,  goats,  chickens,  and  various  commodities 
under  charge  of  a  single  native;  the  second  in  packing  merchandise, 
mining  material,  and  product  of  the  mines;  for  this  latter  purpose  the 

a  See  Mexican  prototype  of  the  American  aparejo,  without  sticks.  The  writer  is 
indebted  to  Col.  H.  L.  Scott,  U.  S.  Army,  Superintendent  United  States  Military 
Academy,  West  Point,  N.  Y.,  for  this  view. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  .         19 

mule  takes  the  place  of  the  donkey.  The  aparejo  in  both  cases,  to 
protect  the  animal's  body,  is  filled  with  dried  grass.  The  aparejo 
cincha  was  provided  with  wooden  stiff eners  at  each  end ;  at  one  end  the 
latigo  is  secured  by  means  of  leather  thongs  over  the  stiff ener;  at  op- 
posite end  the  wood  is  shaped  to  have  a  depression  at  center  to  receive 
the  folds  of  the  latigo  in  cinching  the  aparejo.  All  ropes  were  made 
of  rawhide  carefully  prepared  and  plaited,  and  a  wooden  hook  was 
provided  on  end  of  lash-rope  cincha.  In  the  spring  of  1878  I  saw 
both  of  these  forms  of  aparejos  in  use  in  the  State  of  Coahuila, 
Mexico,  and  wooden  hooks  were  used  in  our  service  to  some  extent 
until  the  fall  of  1886. 

In  1868  Pack  Master  Richard  Closter,  better  known  as  "  Uncle 
Dick/'  stated  his  first  attempt  in  ribbing  the  aparejo  was  for  the  pur- 
pose only  of  causing  the  aparejo  to  stand  on  its  boots,  the  better  to 
protect  the  rigging  while  in  camp  from  the  inclemencies  of  the 
weather,  the  usual  method  being  to  make  as  many  rows  of  the  rigging 
as  a  wagon  sheet  would  cover,  the  series  of  rows  helping  as  a  brace  to 
hold  them  on  their  boots;  and  to  distinguish  each  aparejo,  a  design 
usually  of  the  cactus  was  provided  on  the  corona. 

In  the  early  morning  the  animals  were  brought  in  from  the  herd 
ground,  rounded  up,  and  either  caught  singly  or  tied  to  a  picket  line, 
in  preparation  for  the  day's  travel. 

The  arrangement  of  the  aparejos  in  an  orderly  manner  (see  fig.  108)  by 
this  provision  gave  opportunity  to  feed  the  animals  on  the  rigging  by 
spreading  sections  of  canvas  thereon,  the  night  herders  keeping  watch  on 
the  animals  while  feeding  to  prevent  their  wasting  the  grain,  which  was 
an  item  of  considerable  expense  in  those  days  (1850-1870)  and  not 
always  available.  The  method  of  feeding  on  the  rigging  taught  the 
animals  to  come  up  to  the  rigging  in  patient  expectation  of  the  evening 
meal.  This  led  to  teaching  the  animals  to  come  up  to  the  rigging 
for  grooming  and  in  preparation  for  the  day's  travel. 

At  first  but  two  sticks  on  each  side  were  employed  to  stiffen  the 
aparejo,  one  at  front  and  one  at  rear;  these  reached  but  midway  be- 
tween the  boots  and  center  stitch  line  of  the  aparejo.  Later  sticks  of 
full  length  were  used  for  the  same  purpose,  but  not  with  any  expecta- 
tion of  assisting  the  aparejo  to  hold  a  weighty  load  away  from  the 
withers  and  backbone  of  the  animal. 

After  each  day's  travel  it  was  noted  on  taking  off  the  aparejo  that 
the  animal's  backbone  and  withers  were  free  of  moisture,  especially 
at  front  and  rear,  showing  that  the  aparejo  did  not  bear  on  that  part 
of  the  body.  This  led  to  inserting  an  additional  stick  in  rear  of  the 
" collar"  known  in  those  days  by  the  term  "crux,"  or  cross,  from  the 
fact  that  that  portion  of  the  aparejo  fitted  over  the  cross  on  the  withers 
of  the  mule  and  burro;  later  on  from  two  to  four  additional  sticks  were 
inserted  on  each  side  between  the  collar  and  carrier  pieces  or  rear  of 
the  aparejo,  with  the  view  only  of  saving  the  backbone  and  withers, 
which  for  twenty  years  following  the  discovery  of  gold  in  California 
were  usually  a  mass  of  sores;  the  fact  that  the  sticks  supported  the 
weight  of  the  load  was  considered  an  absurd  proposition,  and  at  the 
present  writing  is  not  clearly  understood  by  all  pack  masters.  The 
fact  is  that  the  boots  of  the  aparejo  standing  clear  from  contact  with 
the  animal's  body  the  cincha,  in  compressing  the  aparejo  on  the  body 
of  the  mule,  gives  to  the  aparejo  the  form  of  an  arch,  the  cincha  form- 
ing the  base  on  which  the  boots  of  the  aparejo  rest.  If  the  aparejo 


20  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

is  of  sufficient  length,  it  will  be  noticed  that  in  cinching,  the  aparejo 
is  lifted  by  the  cincha  until  the  proper  base  line  is  formed  from  the 
center  of  the  animal's  belly  each  way.  If  the  aparejo  is  too  short  or 
too  long,  its  lifting  power  is  lost,  as  is  also  the  case  when  there  is  not 
sufficient  padding  in  the  boots,  which  should  not  be  permitted  to  hug 
the  body  of  the  mule  (a  serious  defect  in  the  English  pack  saddle). 
The  weight  of  the  load  being  practically  what  is  termed  a  dead  weight, 
the  lift  or  spring  of  the  sticks  is  lost  in  the  travel  of  the  animal. 

As  pack  trains  were  numerous  in  the  early  days  (1850-1870)  on  the 
Pacific  coast  and  in  the  Territories  of  the  Northwest,  the  information 
spread  rapidly  from  train  to  train  and  a  system  of  ribbing  the 
aparejo  from  front  to  rear  became  general.  Each  owner  of  a  pack 
outfit,  known  as  the  "padrone,"  adopted  a  method  of  his  own  as  his 
understanding  of  conditions  prompted. 

The  eagerness  to  save  the  animal's  backbone  caused  many  pack 
masters  to  rib  the  aparejo  too  stiff — that  is,  by  using  sticks  or  too 
large  diameter,  giving  rise  to  many  body  bunches  and  belly  sores; 
and  to  save  the  loins  from  what  are  termed  " kidney  sores"  sticks 
of  too  small  diameter  were  employed,  without  regard  to  proportion 
from  front  to  rear,  causing  the  aparejo  to  flare  out  at  front,  giving 
opportunity  for  the  aparejo  to  work  forward  and  causing  sore  tails. 
To  relieve  this  condition  the  reverse  method  of  ribbing  was  used,  with 
no  better  results. 

The  conformation  of  the  mule  was  not  considered  in  those  days  in 
ribbing  the  aparejo.  The  California  mule  being  a  cross  between  the 
burro  and  cayuse  (pony),  with  large  and  deep  belly,  short  in  stature, 
was  a  great  climber  and  hardy  packer. 

This  conformation  of  mule  afforded  ample  cause  for  sore  tails,  the 
difference  in  girth  back  of  the  elbow  and  at  point  of  greatest  swell 
of  the  barrel  or  belly  varying  from  8  to  16  inches.  As  ribbing  by 
the  mule's  conformation  as  a  guide  was  neither  understood  or  at- 
tempted, mules  of  the  above  description  always  had  sore  tails,  devel- 
oping a  double  lip  or  growth  above  and  below  the  sore.  The  mule 
having  the  reverse  of  this  conformation — that  is,  of  greater  or  equal 
girth  back  of  the  elbow  as  at  center  of  barrel — will  never  have  a  sore 
tail,  but  mules  of  this  description  are  not  suited  for  pack  service. 

The  success  attending  the  introduction  of  sticks  of  full  length  in 
protecting  the  backbone  led  to  a  general  application  of  their  uses; 
the  " round"  collar  gave  way  to  the  " square"  collar  to  give  oppor- 
tunity to  supply  more  ribs  to  protect  the  withers. 

In  trial  of  the  square  collar  (6  by  6  inches)  it  was  found  that  the 
aparejo  often  pinched  the  withers,  and  an  offset  of  2  by  2  inches  was 
provided;  this  provision  opened  the  collar  with  satisfactory  results. 
(See  i,  fig.  1.) 

In  1886  Mr.  Moore  supervised  the  construction  of  100  or  more 
aparejos  at  the  military  prison,  Fort  Leavenworth,  Kans.,  in  which 
a  second  offset  was  provided,  and  resulted  in  contracting  the  collar 
in  a  manner  similar  to  the  action  of  the  square  collar.  This  led  to 
the  return  of  the  first  offset,  which  has  been  used  ever  since. 

The  saddlery  company  of  Messrs.  Main  &  Winchester,  216  Battery 
street,  San  Francisco,  Cal.,  furnished  the  Government  the  first  regu- 
lar stitched  (wax  end)  aparejo  some  time  during  the  early  seventies. 

The  old  aparejo  of  Mexican  manufacture  was  of  whitish  tan  or 
rawhide  color  of  long  life,  a  few  of  these  being  still  in  use  during 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION, 


21 


22  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

the  Spanish- American  war  (1898).  The  leather  was  very  heavy,  a 
requisite  to  hold  the  hay  or  padding  in  position,  and  there  were  no 
facings  on  back  or  belly  piece;  a  strip  12  inches  long  and  from  3  to 
6  inches  wide  was  attached  to  the  outside  along  the  front  edge,  the 
inner  edge  provided  with  holes  to  lace  the  crupper;  at  rear  a  strip  of 
leather  about  3  by  6  inches  was  attached  as  a  carrier  piece  and  pro- 
vided with  holes  to  support  the  crupper  by  means  of  a  short  lace 
string,  all  sewing  being  done  by  whang  and  needle. 

The  crupper  was  made  in  sections  termed  " panels" — hence  the 
name  " panel  crupper" — the  center  panel  being  usually  provided  with 
a  surface  covering  of  morocco  or  other  fancy  colored  leather  on 
which  various  designs  or  legends  were  stitched  with  silken  threads 
of  various  colors,  corresponding  figures  being  provided  on  the  corona 
or  saddle  pad. 

The  aparejos  made  by  Main  &  Winchester  were  of  light  stock  and 
in  time  became  baggy.  To  overcome  this  defect  facings  (reenfor- 
cings)  of  leather  were  employed  on  the  "boots,"  back,  and  belly 
pieces  of  the  aparejo,  the  backpiece  having  an  additional  reenforcing 
at  its  center,  termed  the  "  center  facing."  With  all  this  reenforcing 
the  belly  or  body  piece  was  too  light  and  in  short  time  became  baggy, 
i.  e.,  the  belly  piece  stood  away  from  the  hay  or  padding,  permitting 
the  hay  to  fall  from  its  proper  position,  a  very  serious  defect. 

The  establishment  of  J.  C.  Johnson  &  Co.,  of  San  Francisco,  turned 
out  the  best  aparejos  ever  made  for  the  United  States  Government. 
In  the  eighties  some  very  good  aparejos  were  supplied  by  a  firm  in 
Chicago.  The  initials  stamped  on  the  aparejos  were,  if  I  am  not 
mistaken,  "O.  H.  &  Co."  The  Collins  Saddlery  Company,  of 
Omaha,  Nebr.,  also  furnished  some  good  aparejos  in  the  eighties. 
Since  that  time  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  controls  the  trade  in  pack  equipment. 

During  the  Geronimo  campaign  (1885)  the  Cheyenne  pack  trains, 
under  charge  of  Mr.  Thomas  Moore,  chief  packer,  were  ordered  to 
Fort  Bowie,  Ariz.,  and  additional  pack  trains  organized.  Mr.  Moore, 
in  order  to  hasten  the  ribbing  or  setting  up"  of  the  aparejos  had  a 
quantity  of  hickory  slats  or  ribs  made,  about  1  inch  wide  and  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  thick  throughout  their  entire  length.  No  taper 
being  provided  on  any  of  the  sticks,  necessarily  the -sticks  bearing 
over  the  swell  of  the  body  received  practically  all  of  the  pressure, 
causing  terrible  misery  to  the  animal,  and  when  loaded  and  turned 
loose  the  animal  would  immediately  throw  itself  on  the  ground,  when 
the  snapping  of  the  ribs  (breaking)  could  be  plainly  heard,  with  a 
wail  from  the  pack  master  of  "There  goes  another  one." 

After  the  Geronimo  campaign  I  was  ordered  to  Cheyenne  Depot 
(Camp  Carlin),  Cheyenne,  Wyo.,  for  station,  under  Capt.  C.  F. 
Humphrey,  quartermaster,  afterwards  Quartermaster-General  of  the 
Army.  Two  pack  trains  were  there  organized,  one  under  Pack 
Master  Edward  Delaney  and  one  under  myself,  with  Mr.  Moore, 
chief  packer. 

In  January,  1887,  while  setting  up  the  aparejos,  Mr.  Moore  had 
provided  a  quantity  of  those  hickory  slats  for  ribbing  purposes;  on 
my  urging  the  necessity  of  their  being  tapered  and  tested  before 
insertion,  Mr.  Moore  stated  why  not  use  two  or  three  slats  and  then 
two  or  three  willow  sticks,  and  alternate  that  way,  with  a  view  to 
weakening  the  ribbing,  forgetting  the  fact  that  the  slats  would  be 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  23 

hard  to  compress,  while  the  fresh  willows  would  readily  yield  to 
compression. 

I  had  set  up  one  aparejo  with  hickory  slats,  providing  a  suitable 
taper  on  each  slat  from  front  to  rear,  and  testing  each  slat  before 
inserting  it  in  the  aparejo.  The  results  obtained  were  satisfactory. 
Mr.  Moore,  however,  abandoned  the  hickory  slats  without  sufficient 
reason.  * 

It  was  the  custom  until  1880  to  insert  the  "boot"  sticks  after 
ribbing  the  aparejo.  This  method  on  cinching  the  aparejo  caused  the 
sticks  at  center  of  boot  to  spread  apart  and  override  the  sticks  adjoin- 
ing, and  also  forced  the  boot  sticks  upwardly  by  the  action  or  the 
lash-rope  cincha. 

The  insertion  of  the  boot  stick  before  ribbing  held  the  boot  from 
gathering  or  crumpling  and  gave  a  guide  to  measure  the  length  of 
sticks  between  the  center  line  and  lower  edge  of  boot  stick,  and  pre- 
vented the  displacing  of  the  sticks  at  center  of  boot,  as  the  boot  stick 
offered  resistance  to  action  of  the  aparejo  and  lash-rope  cincha. 

The  method  of  ribbing  the  aparejo  by  providing  a  gradual  lessening 
of  diameter  to  each  stick  from  front  to  rear  and  from  bottom  toward 
top  with  as  many  sticks  as  the  boot  would  contain,  laid  side  by  side, 
the  butt  ends  resting  on  the  flat  surface  of  the  boot  stick,  was  not 
practiced  until  the  spring  of  1880.  At  first  the  custom  was  to  alter- 
nate the  butt  end  of  stick  between  boot  and  center  line  (bottom  and 
top). 

I  have  also  seen  packers  place  a  stick  across  the  ribs  close  to  the 
center  stitch  line,  sometimes  called  the  "eve/7  or  comb,  of  the  aparejo, 
and  one  or  two  midway,  for  the  purpose,  it  was  said,  of  keeping  the 
sticks  in  position;  in  fixing  for  a  bunch  the  cargador  would  locate 
the  position  of  the  bunch  by  observation,  take  out  the  hay,  teaze  it 
up,  and  replace  it.  This  flattened  or  spread  the  bunch,  which,  if  of 
medium  size,  always  resulted  in  a  steadfast;  instead  of  cutting  out 
the  callous  flesh  and  saving  the  mule  further  misery,  it  was  permitted 
to  spread,  from  a  desire  to  hide  the  condition  of  the  animal  and  as 
was  usually  the  case,  in  not  properly  understanding  how  to  arrange 
the  hay  or  padding,  and  so  prevent  the  bunch  resulting  into  a 
steadfast. 

It  was  about  this  time  also  (1880)  that  the  practice  of  wetting  the 
surface  of  the  bunch  (only)  so  as  to  locate  its  position  on  the  aparejo 
was  first  introduced,  by  placing  the  aparejo  on  the  mule,  without 
corona  or  blanket  or  turning  the  crupper;  and  exactly  over  the  posi- 
tion on  the  animal's  body,  where  it  rests,  when  cinched  to  the  animal, 
and  by  rocking  the  aparejo  with  each  hand  the  wet  imprint  was 
shown  on  the  belly  or  body  piece  of  the  aparejo;  then  all  the  hay 
down  to  the  sticks  beneath  the  wet  surface  marked  by  the  bunch  was 
taken  out  without,  in  any  manner,  disturbing  the  rest  of  the  bed  of 
hay;  on  the  next  day's  travel  the  bunch  disappeared. 

It  was  in  the  fall  of  1883,  while  pack  master  of  Lieutenant  Gate- 
wood's  train  at  Fort  Apache,  that  I  discovered  the  cause  of  belly 
bunches  and  sore  tails. 

In  1884,  General  Crook  stated  that  Mr.  Moore,  then  chief  packer, 
had  said,  "Pack  animals  were  bound  to  become  sore  and  there  was 
no  known  way  to  avoid  it." 

The  Geronimo  campaign,  lasting  from  May,  1885,  to  September, 
1886,  proved  this  statement  to  be  a  fallacy. 


24  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

In  the  days  of  the  " panel"  crupper,  the  division  of  the  crupper 
below  the  dock  was  a  straight  cut,  provided  with  holes  on  either  side 
for  lacing.  When  the  animal's  tail  became  sore  the  lacing  was 
tightened,  with  the  object  of  drawing  the  dock  of  crupper  downward 
from  the  animal's  tail  or  dock,  in  each  case  affording  no  relief,  but 
instead,  causing  soreness  across  the  buttocks. 

The  latter  trouble  caused  many  pack  masters  to  be  constantly  at 
work  on  the  dock,  adding  more  filling,  some  going  so  far  as  to  pro- 
vide a,  wooden  stick  to  give  it  stiffness,  without  relief.  (See  sec.  9.) 

When  the  withers  and  loins  became  sore,  the  aparejo  was  said  to 
be  ' 'broken  down;"  hence  the  packer's  objection  to  the  use  of  the 
aparejo  as  a  seat,  an  objection  well  taken,  but  not  the  direct  cause. 
(See  footnote.) 

It  was  considered  that  tight  cinching  caused  "  belly  bunches,"  and 
that  unevenness  in  the  filling  or  padding  was  alone  responsible  for 
body  bunches. 

For  "body  bunches"  (a  puffing  up  of  the  skin),  the  hay  or  padding 
was  loosened  up  in  the  aparejo,  with  the  expectation  of  giving  relief, 
when  perhaps  a  fault  in  one  or  more  of  the  "ribs"  may  have  been  the 
direct  cause  of  the  "bunch."  In  the  first  instance,  a  loosening  of  the 
hay  will  not  reduce  a  bunch;  in  the  second  instance,  an  improper 
rib  or  stick  in  the  aparejo  will  always  cause  trouble.  Both  or  these 
conditions  must  be  removed  to  relieve  the  animal  of  its  misery. 

For  "belly  bunches"  a  gunny  sack  or  other  similar  material  was 
provided  and  folded  in  several  thicknesses,  so  as  to  have  a  surface 
about  10  inches  square,  and  held  together  by  a  few  stitches;  a  hole 
was  then  cut  at  center,  corresponding  to  the  size  of  the  bunch;  the 

Ead  was  then  held  over  the  affected  part,  the  cincha  of  the  aparejo 
olding  pad  to  place  and  expecting  to  afford  relief  or  reduce  the 
bunch.  The  cause  of  the  trouble  not  being  removed,  the  use  of  the 
pad  did  not  relieve  it. 

When  the  aparejo  was  improperly  ribbed,  by  being  too  weak  in 
front,  the  cinch  of  the  aparejo  worked  forward,  causing  what  are 
termed  "cinch  sores,"  retarding  the  travel  of  the  animal,  as  well  as 
throwing  the  load  forward  and  eventually  on  the  animal's  neck  if 
not  attended  to,  and,  if  ribbed  too  weak,  at  rear,  throwing  the  load 
over  the  animal's  kidneys,  preventing  the  animal  from  retaining  its 
aparejo  in  proper  position  and  carrying  its  load  with  comfort. 

When  the  pack  mule  would  leave  the  trail  and  lie  down,  endeavor- 
ing to  relieve  itself  of  its  burden,  it  was  said  the  animal  could  not 
stand  tight  cinching,  and  was  not  a  suitable  animal  for  pack  service. 

The  misery  shown  by  the  dumb  animal  never  appealed  to  the  sense 
of  the  animal  man. 

For  all  these  evils  the  proper  "setting  up"  of  the  aparejo  must  be 
intelligently  understood,  and  sore  mules  will  be  a  thing  of  the  past; 
or,  in  other  words,  there  must  be  smooth  bearing  on  the  body  of  the 
animal  covered  by  the  aparejo  and  its  cincha.  (See  sees.  4  to  7.) 

NOTE. — The  objection  taken  by  packers  to  using  the  aparejo  as  a 
seat  when  in  bivouac  is  because  the  weight  of  the  body  when  seated 
on  the  aparejo  compresses  the  ribs  more  than  happens  when  the 
aparejo  is  on  the  animal. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  25 

EVOLUTION  OF  THE  DIAMOND  HITCH. 

This  form  of  hitch  has  its  origin  in  the  crosstree  hitch.  The  early 
trappers  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  introduced  the  crosstree  hitch 
among  the  Indians  of  the  Northwest,  and  later  the  Americans  gave 
to  this  hitch  the  name  of  the  "squaw"  hitch;  along  the  Pacific  coast, 
in  sections  where  sheep  raising  has  become  an  industry,  it  is  known 
as  the  "sheepherder's"  hitch,  and  by  miners  and  prospectors  as  the 
"prospector's"  hitch. 

In  the  use  of  the  aparejo,  in  forming  the  crosstree  hitch  (sec.  40) 
in  bringing  the  loop  of  the  running  rope  under  the  boot  of  the 
aparejo  instead  of  around  the  "side"  pack  on  each  side,  evolved 
the  "double"  hitch,  and  in  not  bringing  a  loop  of  the  running  rope 
under  and  forward  of  the  standing  rope — that  is,  forming  the  loop 
in  rear  of  the  standing  rope — led  to  the  formation  of  the  "Oregon" 
diamond  hitch  (sec.  38),  so  named  in  being  first  practiced  in  that 
Territory  before  it  became  a  State. 

The  practice  of  first  throwing  the  lash  rope  cincha  under  the  ani- 
mal's belly  to  the  off  packer,  in  forming  the  regular  diamond,  in 
contrast  to  the  crosstree  and  Oregon  hitches,  in  which  the  lash  rope 
is  first  thrown  over  the  load  and  under  the  animal's  belly  by  the 
near  packer,  may  be  said  to  date  with  the  advent  of  the  Americans 
after  the  discovery  of  gold  in  California,  1848-49.  This  I  have  heard 
disputed  by  some  of  the  old-time  packers  of  the  early  fifties,  who 
stated  the  regular  diamond  was  practiced  by  the  Mexicans  of  Cali- 
fornia. However  this  may  be,  it  may  be  stated  the  regular  diamond 
hitch  is  used  in  the  States  bordering  on  the  Kio  Grande.  In  the 
Santa  Rosa  mines,  State  of  Coahuila  (Mexico),  I  have  seen  the  dia- 
mond in  use  in  1878.  In  Mexico  it  has  been  the  custom  to  use  the 
crosstree  and  stirrup  hitches,  with  the  employment  of  the  donkey,  and 
aparejo  made  of  matting;  in  the  case  of  the  stirrup  hitch  (sec.  41)  a 
cincha  2  feet  long,  having  a  ring  at  each  end,  is  employed;  in  forming 
the  hitch  the  cincha  is  held  under  the  animal's  belly,  using  the  ring 
on  each  end  instead  of  forming  the  stirrup. 

The  double  diamond  hitch  (sec.  33)  was  used  in  the  days  of  freight- 
ing by  civilian  pack  trains  from  The  Dalles  to  the  mining  camps  in 
the  interior  when  barrels  of  flour,  vinegar,  pork,  etc.,  had  to  be  trans- 
ported. This  hitch  had  become  a  lost  art  in  government  service,  due 
to  a  lack  of  necessity  for  its  use,  and  is  known  to  very  few  packers 
of  the  present  dav,  the  double  hitch  being  erroneously  called  the 
"double  diamond."  (Sec.  34.) 

The  pole  hitch  has  been  erroneously  called  the  "squaw"  hitch;  the 
fact  that  the  Indians  have  never  used  the  aparejo  confirms  this  state- 
ment. It  can  not  be  used  with  the  crosstree  or  riding  saddle,  as  no 
portion  of  the  rope  in  the  formation  of  the  hitch  encircles  the  body 
of  the  animal.  (Sec.  37.) 


CHAPTER  1. 

PACK  SADDLES— DESCRIPTION  AND  USES. 
THE    APAREJO. 

SECTION  1.  The  aparejo  and  its  various  accessories  are  called,  col- 
lectively, "The  aparejo  complete"  (fig.  1). 

The  aparejo  complete  includes  the  following: 
Aparejo  complete: 
Aparejo  proper — 

1.  Body  of  the  aparejo. 

2.  Aparejo  cover,  or  sobre  jalma. 

3.  Aparejo  cincha. 

4.  Crupper,  or  grupera. 

5.  Corona,  or  saddle  pad. 
Accessories — 

6.  Lash  rope  with  cincha  and  hook. 

7.  Sling  rope. 

8.  Lair  ropes  (two). 

9.  Pack  covers,  or  mantas  (two). 
10.  Pack  blanket. 

NOTE. — For  convenience  the  packer  divides  the  aparejo  complete 
into  two  sections — the  aparejo  proper  and  the  aparejo  complete. 

The  first  five  items  of  the  above  form  what  is  termed  the  "aparejo 
proper,"  and  in  the  vernacular  of  the  packer  are  referred  to  as  the 
"rigging." 

To  explain:  When  in  bivouac  the  aparejo  (proper)  is  held  apart 
from  its  accessories,  i.  e.,  the  aparejos  are  arranged  in  an  orderly 
manner,  and  the  animals  are  taught  to  approach  them  and  stand 
quietly,  as  if  at  attention.  The  accessories  are  employed  in  the  make- 
up of  commercial  packages  into  what  is  termed  "side"  packs,  and 
and  are  likewise  arranged  in  an  orderly  manner  adjacent  to  the  rigging, 
and  termed  the  "cargo." 

The  last  item,  the  pack  blanket,  must  be  considered  a  part  of  its 
complete  equipment,  as  its  use  supplies  additional  padding  for  the 
aparejo,  the  blanket  being  carried  between  the  corona  and  aparejo, 
folded  in  such  manner  as  to  cover  the  corona,  and  is  used  as  bed- 
ding by  the  packer,  who,  it  should  be  remembered,  is  not  permitted 
to  supply  personal  bedding  which  impairs  the  carrying  capacity  of 
the  train. 

Three  sizes  of  aparejos  are  provided,  respectively  58,  60,  and  62 
inches  -in  length,  and  uniformly  24  inches  throughout  their  entire 
width. 

A  brief  description  follows  of  the  parts  included  in  the  aparejo 
complete : 

26 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  27 

1.  The  ~body  of  the  aparejo  (I,  fig.  1). — The  principal  leather  parts 
are: 

(a)  Backpiece. 

(6)  Belly,  or  body  piece. 

(c)  Boots,  or  end  pieces. 

(d)  Boot  facings. 

(e)  Front  facing. 

(f)  Center  facing. 

(g)  Carrier  pieces. 
(Ji)  The  welts. 

NOTE. — See  " Specifications  for  aparejos,"  section  130. 

2.  The  aparejo  cover  (or  sobre-jalma)  (II,  fig.  1)  is  made  of  No.  4 
cotton  duck.     It  is  faced  at  sides  and  ends  with  leather,  so  as  to  give 
sufficient  width  to  enable  it  to  cover  the  aparejo.     The  ends  are  pro- 
tected by  wooden  sticks  or  shoes,  held  in  place  by  caps  of  leather, 
sewn  over  either  end  (L,  II,  fig.  1).     These  shoes  serve  to  stiffen  the 
ends  of  the  aparejo  cover  and  keep  it  from  wrinkling  and  gathering. 
The  cover  is  secured  by  thongs  to  the  aparejo  at  the  extremities  of  its 
middle  or  center  line  (o,  L,  fig.  1). 

NOTE. — Sobre-Jalma,  erroneously  called  sovereign  hammer,  soldier 
hammer,  is  a  compound  word  of  Arabic  and  Spanish  used  by  the 
Morriscos  of  Spain,  meaning  "over  cover;"  sobre-jalma  is  a  contrac- 
tion of  sobre-en-j  almas,  meaning  a  covering  for  the  harnessing,  and 
applied  to  the  aparejo  or  pack  saddle,  now  called  aparejo  cover,  or 
sobre-jalma,  sobre-halma  (or  so-bre-haj-ma) . 

3.  The  aparejo  cincha  (III,  fig.  1),  is  made  of  No.  4  cotton  duck, 
doubled  so  as  to  have  a  width  of  10  inches,  and  sewn  along  its  center 
with  two  seams  spaced  1  inch  apart.     At  one  end  it  is  faced  with 
leather  (m,  III,  fig.  1) ;  a  ^-inch  iron  rod  being  held  in  the  fold  of  the 
facing,  so  as  to  be  on  the  edge  of  the  cincha.     (Sec.  130.) 

After  this  facing  is  in  place  three  holes  are  punched  through  it  to 
receive  the  lacing  of  the  latigo,  or  cincha  strap.  The  latigo  (n,  III, 
fig.  1),  is  from  6  to  7  feet  long.  In  its  attachment  to  the  cincha  it 
carries  a  ring,  called  the  "rendering"  ring,  through  which  the  latigo 
passes  in  tightening  (p,  III,  fig.  1).  Fifteen  inches  from  this  end  of 
cincha  a  round  piece  of  leather  3  inches  in  diameter  is  sewed  on,  and 
two  holes  punched  through  it;  a  leather  thong  is  attached  thereto,  so 
as  to  leave  a  loop  of  3  inches.  This  is  called  the  "finger"  loop,  and 
is  used  to  secure  the  end  of  the  latigo  strap  after  cinching  (g,  III, 

%  D. 

The  other  end  of  the  cincha  carries  a  curved  piece  of  gas  pipe 
(r,  III,  fig.  1),  flattened  at  each  end,  and  provided  with  holes  to 
receive  rivets.  It  is  secured  to  the  canvas  by  a  leather  facing.  This 
curved  piece  of  pipe  takes  the  place  of  an  ordinary  ring  in  the  end  of 
cincha. 

When  finished  the  cincha  should  be  8  inches  longer  than  the  aparejo 
with  which  it  is  to  be  used  and  ten  inches  longer  for  mountain  bat- 
tery service. 

4.  The  crupper  (IV,  fig.  1)  is  made  of  heavy,  fair  leather,  about 
78  inches  long  and  12  inches  wide.     At  its  middle  part  it  is  shaped 
down  to  fit  under  the  animal's  dock.     The  portion  which  fits  under 
the  dock  is  provided  with  a  cover,  called  the  "dock"  piece.     The 
dock  piece  is  filled  with  padding,  antelope  hair  being  considered  best 


28  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

for  the  purpose,  and  is  rounded  (IV,  fig.  1).  The  ends  and  upper 
edges  are  provided  with  holes  for  lacing  the  crupper  to  the  front 
facings  of  back  piece  and  to  the  carrier  pieces,  respectively.  Leather 
thongs  are  employed  for  these  lacings,  and  by  means  of  these  the 
crupper  may  be  adjusted  to  the  length  of  the  animal. 

5.  The  corona,  or  saddle  pad  (V,  fig.  1),  is  made  of  three  thick- 
nesses of  good  blanket,  with  a  center  facing  of  similar  material; 
at  one  edge  at  center  of  its  length  a  semicircular  stitch  line  is  pro- 
vided to  indicate  the  front,  or  that  portion  fitting  over  the  animal's 
withers,  and  a  center  stitch  line  to  indicate  the  middle  of  the  corona. 
In  the  center  of  one-half  of  its  length  a  numeral  to  designate  the 
number  of  the  aparejo  is  placed  on  the  upper  or  outward  side  of  the 
corona,  the  under  side  being  lined  with  light  canvas,  and  the  whole 
bound  all  around  with  suitable  material. 

In  use  the  '  'canvas  "  side  rests  on  the  animal's  back,  and  the  corona 
is  cleaned  from  day  to  day,  a  table  knife  being  carried  by  cutting  a 
horizontal  slit  between  the  two  lines  of  stitching  on  the  front  facing 
of  the  aparejo  for  this  purpose. 

ACCESSORIES  OF  THE  APAREJO. 

6.  The  lash  rope  with  cincha  and  Tiodk  (VI,  fig.  1). — The  lash  rope  is 
about  50  feet  long,  size  nine-sixteenths  or  one-half  inch,  best  hand-laid 
manila.     At  one  end  it  has  a  loop  or  eye  to  receive  the  lacing  of  its 
cincha;  the  other  end  is  well  seized  or  wrapped  to  prevent  unraveling. 
The  cincha  (VI,  s,  fig.  1)  is  made  of  light  canvas,  folded  so  as  to 
have  a  width  of  6  inches;  at  one  end  it  has  a  facing  of  leather  on 
both  sides  and  is  provided  with  five  holes  to  carry  lacing,  by  means  of 
which  it  is  attached  to  the  loop  or  eye  of  the  lash  rope;  the  other 
end  is  faced  with  leather  in  similar  manner,  and  a  strong  hook  (VI,  t, 
fig.  1)  of  metal  or  wood  is  supplied.     When  made,  the  cincha  must 
not  be  more  than  30  inches  long. 

7.  The  sling  rope  (VII,  fig.  1)  is  about  30  feet  long,  size  three- 
eighths  inch,  best  hand-laid  manila,  well  seized  at  each  end.     It  is 
used  for  slinging  the  load  preparatory  to  lashing. 

8.  The  lair  rope  (VIII,  fig.  1)  is  about  30  feet  long,  size  three- 
eighths  inch,  best  hand-laid  manila;  at  one  end  a  loop  or  eye  is  pre- 
pared; the  other  is  securely  seized.     The  free  end  is  passed  through 
the  loop  or  eye,  preparatory  to  "lairing  up"  the  side  packs — i.  e., 
for  securing  the  pack  covers  or  mantas  around  the  packs. 

9.  The  pack  cover  or  manta  (IX,  fig.  1)  is  made  of  72-inch  No.  4 
cotton  duck.     When  made,  it  is  6  feet  square. 

Each  pack  is  ordinarily  wrapped  in  a  manta.  Such  as  are  liable 
to  suffer  damage  or  deterioration  during  transportation  are  always  so 
protected. 

10.  The  pack  blanket   (X,  fig.   1)  is  similar  to  the  issue   (bed) 
blanket  in  use  in  the  service ;  in  the  center  of  the  blanket  the  initial 
letters,  "U.  S.,  Q.  M.  D.,  P.  T./'  are  provided.     The  two  last  letters 
are  to  distinguish  pack  transportation  blankets  from  others,  so  that 
they  may  be  traced  if  lost  or  stolen.     Each  particular  train  has  the 
serial  number  stamped  on  each  blanket,  as  an  additional  guide  to 
keep  them  together. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  29 

CROSS-TREE    OR    SAWBUCK. 

SEC.  2.  The  cross- tree,  as  the  term  implies,  consists  of  two  saddle 
boards,  shaped  somewhat  similar  to  the  McClellan  saddletree,  con- 
nected at  front  and  rear  (pommel  and  can  tie),  by  crosspieces  shaped 
like  the  letter  "X,"  termed  the  "cruz"  (cross),  or  forks  of  the  saddle, 
supplied  with  a  breast  strap,  breeching,  and  quarter  straps,  holding 
cincha  and  latigo,  or  tightening  strap,  accompanied  by  a  saddle  pad 
or  blanket. 

For  the  carrying  of  supplies  two  methods  are  in  use : 

First  (or  original  method).  By  the  employment  of  wicker  baskets, 
and  panniers  made  of  canvas  or  leather,  constructed  so  as  to  fit  over 
the  forks  of  the  saddle,  and  strapped  to  the  animal  by  the  aid  of 
cincha  and  latigo. 

Second.  By  the  employment  of  " sling  and  lash"  rope.  (See  sees. 
39-40.)  This  latter  method  has  a  more  general  application,  due  to 
its  relative  lightness  and  cheapness,  and  is  used  by  trappers,  miners, 
prospectors,  small  hunting  parties,  and  members  of  the  Bureau  of 
Forestry,  etc.  (See  sees.  39  and  40  and  figs.  54  to  57.) 

THE    "  MOORE"    PACK    SADDLE. 

SEC.  3.  Description  of  this  saddle  is  copied  from  pamphlet  pub- 
lished by  authority  of  the  War  Department,  Washington,  Govern- 
ment Printing  Office,  1881.  (Figs.  3,  4,  5.) 

The  pack  saddle  consists  of  the  "  saddle  proper,"  two  pads,  corre- 
sponding with  the  pads  of  the  aparejo,  laced  on  either  side  of  the 
saddle  to  the  skirts  and  at  the  upper  edges  over  the  top;  a  crupper 
similar  to  the  aparejo  crupper,  but  lighter,  laced  to  the  rear  edges  of 
the  saddle  skirts;  a  corona,  or  pad,  used  under  the  saddle  and  next 
to  the  animal's  back;  a  manta,  or  pack  cover,  two  pieces  of  canvas  7 
feet  long  and  22  inches  wide,  stitched  together  along  their  long 
edges;  halter  and  strap;  cincha  of  canvas  10  inches  wide,  and  in 
length  according  to  the  size  of  the  animal;  "sling  rope;"  best  hand- 
laid  manila  whale  line,  one-half  inch,  20  to  30  feet  long;  "lash  rope," 
with  leather  cincha,  same  as  above,  five-eighths  inch,  42  feet  long,  and 
one  blind  to  each  five  packs.  (6,  fig.  3.) 

When  the  saddle  is  "full-rigged,"  as  it  is  called,  that  is,  supplied 
with  sling  straps  and  cargo  cinch,  the  sling  and  lash  ropes  are  dis- 
pensed with.  (Fig.  4.) 

After  years  of  its  use,  under  personal  observation,  the  following 
defects  have  developed : 

The  crupper,  being  too  short  in  length,  when  laced  to  the  rear  edges 
of  the  saddle  skirts,  leaves  a  space  of  from  4  to  12  inches,  as  deter- 
mined by  the  conformation  of  the  animal.  Necessarily  the  action  of 
the  saddle  and  crupper  are  independent  of  each  other,  causing  sore- 
ness by  friction  of  the  lacing,  due  to  travel  action  of  the  animal. 

When  a  "bunch"  arises  (a  puffing  up  of  the  skin),  caused  by  un- 
evenness  in  the  filling  of  the  pads,  or  shape  of  the  saddle  boards 
lacking  conformation  to  fit  the  varying  flesh  conditions  of  the  ani- 
mal's back,  there  is  no  provision  in  the  make-up  of  the  saddle  to 
relieve  the  animal  of  its  misery,  and,  necessarily,  its  constant  use 
destroys  the  usefulness  of  the  animal. 


30 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


The  "arch"  irons  at  front  and  rear,  connecting  the  saddle  boards, 
occasionally  spread  apart,  allowing  the  irons  to  rest  on  the  animal's 
withers  and  backbone  by  compression  of  weight  of  load.  The  arch 
iron  at  front,  being  higher,  prevents  the  employment  of  "top"  loads 
and,  I  may  add,  all  "box"  loads,  as  the  weight  of  load  is  thrown 


to  the  rear  over  the  animal's  kidneys,  causing  soreness  and  kidney 
trouble.  All  packages  of  greater  length  than  the  width  of  the  saddle 
rest  on  the  animal's  hips,  causing  soreness,  due  to  the  low  and  close 
fit  of  the  saddle  on  the  animal's  body. 

In  the  application  of  the  "diamond"  hitch  the  rope  slips  off  the 
corners  at  ends  of  pads,  due  to  lack  of  sufficient  stiffness,  as  well  as 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


31 


allowing  the  cincha  to  work  forward,  interfering  with  the  travel  of 
the  animal,  and  causing  a  soreness  at  elbow  or  forearm,  termed  cinch 
sore. 


The  employment  of  "sling  straps"  and  cargo  cinch  with  the  saddle, 
termed  "full-rigged,"  was  early  dispensed  with  as  unsuited  to  secur- 
ing commercial  packages.  (Fig.  4.) 


32 


MANUAL    OF    PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


In  the  annual  report  of  Maj.  Gen.  Leonard  Wood,  commanding  the 
Department  of  Cuba,  Habana,  Cuba,  June  30,  1901,  "report  of  the 
chief  quartermaster  of  the  department,"  page  13,  says: 

Under  date  of  June  4,  1901,  the  department  commander  ordered  a  competitive 
trial  at  Camp  U.S.  MacKenzie,  Cuba,  to  determine  the  relative  merits  of  the  aparejo 


and  Moore  pack  saddles.  The  conditions  of  this  trial  required  a  daily  march  of  25 
miles  to  be  made,  each  pack  mule  carrying  a  load  of  250  pounds.  In  this  contest,  con- 
ducted under  the  supervision  of  Capt.  R.  J.  Duff,  Eighth  Cavalry,  as  referee,  it  was 
developed  that  the  Moore  pack  saddle  is  entirely  unsuited  for  severe  field  service. 

It  is  recommended  that  all  pack  equipment  hereafter  furnished  for  use  in  this 
department  consist  of  the  aparejo. 


CHAPTER  II. 

ASSEMBLING  AND  CARE  OF  THE  APABEJO. 
SELECTION    OF    STICKS    SUITABLE    FOB   RIBBING   APAREJOS. 

SEC.  4.  The  selection  of  suitable  sticks  or  withes  to  rib  the  aparejo 
is  usually  governed  by  locality,  and  as  the  willow  is  found  in  all  the 
States  and  Territories,  it  has  been  generally  employed.  While  there 
are  five  species  of  the  willow  family  that  may  be  considered  suitable — 
the  gray,  the  black,  the  red,  the  button,  and  desert  willows — the  first 
named  is  preferred,  having  less  pith,  being  tougher  and  more  springy, 
straight  as  an  arrow,  and  with  few  blemishes.  Arrowwood  and  dog- 
wood are  found  in  Texas  and  Arizona,  but  are  of  scrubby  growth. 
When  found  suitable,  however,  they  make  a  most  excellent  stick  for 
ribbing  aparejos;  it  has  less  pith  than  the  willow  and  holds  life  or 
spring  longer,  resembling  the  guayaba  found  in  Cuba  and  the  Philip- 
pines— the  best  stick  for  ribbing  aparejos  that  has  been  tested.  Ash, 
hickory,  and  pecan  " sprouts"  are  a  superior  stick  to  any  of  the 
former,  due  to  longer  lif e  in  spring ;  these  three  last  woods  in  sprout 
form  are  not  numerous,  so  that  they  may  not  be  classed  in  the  list  of 
available  sticks  for  ribbing  aparejos. 

The  essential  requisites  in  determining  suitable  sticks  for  ribbing 
aparejos  are  toughness,  spring,  and  taper,  together  with  straightness 
and  freedom  from  knots  and  other  blemishes. 

SELECTION    OF   HAY    SUITABLE   AS   PADDING   FOR   APAREJOS. 

SEC.  5.  For  padding  or  filling  aparejos,  nothing  can  compare  with 
suitable  hay.  For  this  purpose  fine,  soft,  elastic  hay  that  will  admit 
of  mixing  similar  to  curled  hair  is  best  suited  as  padding  for  aparejos. 

Such  hay  as  furnished  by  breweries  for  packing  bottles  in  barrels 
answers  this  description,  and  no  doubt  can  be  procured  in  bale  form. 

This  class  of  hay  has  the  elasticity  of  curled  hair,  and  admits  of 
separation,  straw  by  straw,  a  condition  impossible  in  curled  hair, 
black  moss  or  lichen,  sea  grass,  and  excelsior,  an  essential  quality 
when  fixing  for  a  "  bunch." 

To  sum  up,  any  padding  that  has  the  life  and  spring  of  curled 
hair,  that  will  admit  of  separation  when  fixing  for  a  bunch,  without 
disturbing  the  rest  of  the  bed  of  hay  in  the  aparejo  can  be  classed 
as  suitable  padding  for  aparejos.  This  class  of  hay  is  termed  by 
packers  "  aparejo  hay." 

SETTING   UP   THE    APAREJO. 

SEC.  6.  First,  soak  the  aparejo  in  tepid  water,  say  from  ten  to 

fifteen  minutes  (double  the  time  if  cold);  take  out  and  drain,  and 

place  on  bench  or  ground,  and  prepare  two  sticks,  termed  the  "boot 

sticks,"  of  suitable  hard  wood  21  £  inches  long,  2J  inches  wide,  and 

24758—10 3  33 


34  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

three-quarters  of  an  inch  thick;  the  ends  must  be  rounded  on  one 
side.  The  rounded  or  tapered  ends  to  face  the  inside  of  back  piece 
of  the  aparejo;  it  is  positively  forbidden  to  insert  a  "boot  stick"  in 
the  aparejo  that  requires  force  to  adjust  it  across  the  bottom  of  the 
boot,  by  so  doing,  when  the  aparejo  dries,  the  ends  of  the  boot  stick 
project  over  the  sewing  at  ends  of  the  aparejo,  and  soon  wears  itself 
through  the  leather,  as  well  as  bursting  the  sewing  at  ends  of  the 
aparejo.  A  good  substitute  is  the  straight  portion  of  a  disused 
wagon  bow. 

Introduce  a  "boot  stick"  through  hand-hole  on  each  panel,  and 
adjust  it  across  the  bottom  of  the  boot,  the  side  of  the  boot  stick  to 
be  parallel  with  the  sides  of  the  aparejo,  the  flat  surface  of  stick  to 
face  the  inside  of  belly  piece  of  the  aparejo. 

As  the  aparejo  will  take  from  twenty-five  to  thirty  sticks  (willow) 
on  each  side — that  is,  when  laid  side  by  side — it  is  well,  before  com- 
mencing to  "rib  up"  the  aparejo,  to  make  three  divisions  of  the 
sticks  to  be  employed,  say  twenty  in  each  division /rejecting  any  that 
are  not  straight  or  have  any  malformation,  the  largest  for  No.  1,  the 
medium  for  No.  2;  and  the  smallest  for  No.  3;  commencing  with  the 
first  that  fits  under  the  collar  of  the  aparejo,  which  may  have  a  diam- 
eter of  three-quarters  of  an  inch,  lessening  the  diameter  progressively 
to  the  last  at  rear,  the  diameter  of  which  must  be  three-eighths  of  an 
inch. 

Now  take  two  sticks  of  division  No.  1,  largest  size,  and  mate  them 
as  to  size  and  toughness,  one  for  each  side,  to  fit  under  collar  at  front 
of  aparejo. 

Before  introducing  the  first  four  or  five  sticks  it  is  well  to  provide 
a  taper  of  about  2  inches  long  on  butt  end  of  sticks,  as  they  can  thus 
keej)  position  all  the  better  on  the  flat  surface  of  the  boot  stick  when 
placing  them  in  position  under  the  collar  of  the  aparejo.0 

In  measuring  the  length  of  stick,  place  the  stick  on  the  aparejo,  butt 
end  resting  on  lower  edge  of  boot  stick  and  in  alignment  under  the 
collar;  mark  the  stick  in  line  with  the  stitching  of  collar  at  its  for- 
ward part  and  cut  off  with  pocketknife;  round  and  smooth  off  the 
top  surface. 

Introduce  the  stick  through  slit  provided  on  each  side  at  center 
stitch  line,  butt  end  first,  and  press  to  forward  corner  of  boot,  the  end 
of  stick  resting  against  and  over  6  the  flattened  surface  of  the  boot 
stick,  then  bring  the  stick  to  place  under  the  collar  at  the  forward 
edge  of  the  aparejo. 

Under  no  circumstances  permit  a  stick  to  take  position  that  is  too 
long  or  too  short,  throughout  the  operation. 

Having  placed  the  first  two  sticks  in  position,  one  on  either  side  of 
the  aparejo,  under  the  collar,  select  two  more  in  similar  manner  as 
the  first  two,  but  be  careful  that  they  are  not  of  greater  diameter  or 
toughness;  this  rule  must  positively  be  adhered  to  in  the  taper  and 
toughness  of  each  corresponding  pair  of  sticks  throughout  the  opera- 
tion from  front  to  rear.  Any  departure  from  this  rule  will  mark 

a  A  flat  surface  provided  on  butt  end  of  sticks  will  prevent  their  rolling  from  position 
at  the  front  corner  of  the  boot;  these  sticks,  being  of  larger  diameter,  are  apt  to  be 
pressed  out  of  position  during  the  process  of  ribbing. 

&  This  occurs  in  the  process  of  ribbing.  The  aparejo  is  spread  out  its  full  length, 
the  belly  or  body  piece  upward.  When  the  aparejo  stands  on  its  boots,  the  sticks 
show  they  are  against  and  under  the  boot  stick. 


MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION.  35 

the  mule  by  " bunching;'7  taking  out  the  hay,  as  in  fixing  for  a  bunch 
will  not  remove  the  trouble. 

Having  ribbed  up  as  far  as  slit  at  center  of  stitch  line,  commence  at 
rear,  using  the  smallest  stick,  increasing  the  diameter  of  stick  until 
the  center  is  again  reached,  and  the  aparejo  is  properly  ribbed. 

The  aparejo  having  thus  been  "  ribbed  up,"  in  order  to  fill  the  sides 
or  panels  with  hay,  proceed  as  follows: 

Stand  the  aparejo  up  on  its  boots,  the  hand-holes  facing  out,  and 
procure  a  tamping  stick;  an  old  broom  handle  is  good  for  the  pur- 
pose. 

Take  a  pocketknife  or  drawing  knife  and  shave  end  of  stick  so  as 
to  leave  two  sides  flattened,  tapering  toward  end  of  stick;  thickness 
at  end,  one-quarter  inch.  Concave  or  hollow  the  end  on  flat  side, 
so  that  it  may  grip  the  hay  in  tamping.  In  tamping  manipulate  this 
stick  with  the  hands;  do  not  use  a  hammer. 

Introduce  the  hay  through  the  hand-hole,  a  little  at  a  time,  and 
press  into  the  corners  of  boots.  It  is  well  to  commence  at  front  cor- 
ners always.  Tamp  down  with  stick.  In  tamping  do  not  hold  the 
hands  well  out  from  the  aparejo,  but  rather  lean  the  stick  against  the 
top  of  aparejo;  the  point  or  end  of  stick  is  then  not  so  apt  to  pass 
between  the  ribs  in  tamping. 

Be  careful  in  tamping  corners  that  you  do  not  use  too  much  hay  at 
one  time,  or  in  each  course.  You  will  thus  be  enabled  all  the  better 
to  get  the  corners  solid.  This  tamping  should  extend  back  about  6 
inches  from  the  corners  on  either  side,  and  should  be  thoroughly  done. 
Be  careful  to  get  the  four  corners  equal.  Tamp  lightly  along  center 
of  boot.  Three  or  four  courses  of  hay  will  fill  the  lengths  of  boots 
4  inches  in  depth  and  thickness  or  nearly  so. 

Now,  spread  out  the  aparejo  to  its  full  length  on  the  ground,  or 
place  on  bench,  hand-hole  upward,  and  introduce  the  hand  to  ascer- 
tain if  the  ribs  have  been  misplaced  at  top  or  bottom. 

Ribs  being  in  place,  proceed  to  fill  along  top  or  center.  Use  the 
stick  in  pressing  the  hay  into  the  corners  under  collar,  and  at  the  rear 
of  the  aparejo,  but  only  far  enough  back  or  toward  you  to  enable  the 
hand  to  oe  used  in  filling  the  rest.  Lay  two  courses  through  the  body 
of  the  aparejo,  spreading  each  course  evenly.  Do  not  allow  the  hay 
to  lay  in  lumps,  as  it  will  " bunch"  or  wound  the  animal. 

After  the  aparejo  has  been  used  a  while,  and  the  hay  has  been  well 
settled  in  its  place  and  made  compact,  the  thickness  of  the  filling 
through  the  body  should  be  about  2  inches.  The  aparejo  should  have 
a  thin  appearance  through  the  body;  it  should  not  appear  stuffed 
and  swollen. 

The  thickness  of  the  filling  decreases  gradually  from  the  boots  to 
the  hand-hole  of  the  aparejo,  being  about  twice  as  great  in  the  boots 
as  in  the  center  of  panel  or  hand-hole. 

At  the  top  or  center  the  normal  thickness  extends  to  within  about 
4  inches  of  the  center  stitch  line,  the  thickness  gradually  decreasing 
from  there  to  the  middle  seam,  where  it  is  practically  nothing. 

The  packer  now  proceeds  to  put  in  additional  filling,  so  as  to  adjust 
the  aparejo  more  accurately  to  the  mule's  shape,  i.  e.,  he  proceeds  to 
" dress"  or  to  face  up  the  aparejo,  as  it  is  called. 

First,  dress  or  face  each  front  boot,  the*  dressing  to  extend  inward 
each  way  from  the  front  corner  toward  the  hand-hole,  say  7  inches, 
and  must  be  of  oval  shape.  In  introducing  the  hay  hold  the  palm 


36  MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 

of  the  hand  upward,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  bed  of  hay  underneath 
the  hand,  increasing  the  width  and  depth  of  dressing  as  you  recede 
from  the  front  corner,  and  the  inward  edge  of  dressing  to  be  of  semi- 
circular form;  for  the  next  4  inches  decrease  the  thickness  rapidly  as 
the  hand-hole  is  approached.  This  will  leave  the  filling  of  the  front 
boot  obviously  greater  than  the  rear  boot.  The  difference  should  be 
about  1  inch  for  mules  of  ordinary  girth  in  barrel;  mules  of  larger 
girth  will  necessarily  require  more  hay  in  the  front  boot  to  make  the 
aparejo  sit  on  the  animal  with  the  boot  sticks  parallel. 

Next,  make  a  dressing  under  the  collar  of  aparejo  for  the  withers 
of  the  animal. 

For  this  purpose  keep  the  palm  of  .the  hand  up  and  carry  the  hay 
well  into  the  corners  at  front,  using  as  little  of  the  hay  at  each  time 
as  possible,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  bed  formed  beneath  the  hand; 
carry  this  dressing  back  from  the  corner,  increasing  the  width  and 
depth  of  dressing  as  you  recede  from  the  corners,  the  outer  edge  of 
dressing  to  be  of  semicircular  form. 

The  upper  point  of  the  semicircle  should  not  approach  the  center 
line  within  a  space  of  4  inches.  The  whole  line  of  semicircle  should 
gradually  decrease  in  thickness  as  the  hand-hole  is  approached  to 
within  4  inches  of  hole.  The  depth  of  this  dressing  will  be  governed 
by  the  height  of  the  animal's  withers.  The  aparejo  when  cinched  on 
the  mule  should  be  level  from  front  to  rear.  In  similar  manner  the 
boots  must  be  parallel  and  horizontal. 

The  front  edge,  between  boot  and  collar,  may  now  have  an  addi- 
tional dressing  3  inches  wide  and  about  1  inch  in  thickness,  tapering 
each  way  toward  the  center,  so  as  to  give  opportunity  for  the  aparejo 
to  brake  or  conform  to  the  body  of  the  animal,  in  the  act  of  cinching; 
and  the  aparejo  is  properly  "set  up." 

Now  stand  the  aparejo  up;  that  is,  cause  it  to  stand  on  its  boots. 
Next,  procure  a  crupper  (standard  size),  and  two  lace  thongs  each 
about  7  feet  long  and  one-half  of  an  inch  wide;  at  heavy  end  of  each 
lace  thong,  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  each  end  cut  a  slit  1  \ 
inches  long,  introduce  the  light  end  of  each  thong  through  the  upper 
hole  on  each  end  of  crupper  and  pass  the  end  through  the  slit  on 
opposite  end  of  thong  and  draw  down  snug;  next  procure  two  lace 
thongs,  length  of  thongs,  say  12  inches,  and  attach  the  crupper  to 
the  " carrier"  pieces,  and  tie  down;  this  helps  to  hold  the  crupper  in 
the  operation  of  lacing. 

Now  pass  the  end  of  crupper  lacing  through  the  second  hole  on  front 
facing  (counting  from  the  collar),  from  above  down  or,  as  may  be 
said,  from  outside  toward  inside,  and  draw  thong  snug. 

Next,  in  similar  manner,  pass  the  thong  through  the  second  hole 
on  crupper,  then  through  the  fourth  hole  on  front  facing,  again 
through  the  fourth  hole  on  crupper,  and,  lastly,  through  the  bottom 
or  end  hole  on  front  facing  and  crupper,  and  tie  down.  Always 
finish  the  tie  on  the  last  hole  of  the  crupper;  never  on  the  front 
facing,  as  action  of  the  crupper,  which  should  bind  or  steady  the 
aparejo  is  lost  by  such  action. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  the  lacing  must  positively  pass  through 
holes  on  front  facing  and  crupper  from  above  down,  in  order  that 
lacing  may  not  render  or  slip  when  the  aparejo  is  fitted  to  the  mule. 

Next,  punch  two  holes,  one-half  inch  apart,  at  each  extremity  of 
the  center  line  of  the  aparejo,  and  between  the  two  outside  stitch 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  37 

lines.  Procure  thongs  and  fit  aparejo  cover.  Punch  two  holes  cor- 
respondingly in  the  cover  and  tie  down. 

Procure  cincha;  place  the  latigo  along  center  of  its  length  and 
double  the  cincha,  causing  the  upper  surface  of  cincha  carrying 
finger  piece  to  be  inside.  Place  cincha  on  aparejo  in  center,  leaving 
the  ends  on  the  "off  "  side  with  ends  of  finger  loop  on  top. 

Turn  crupper  and  rest  dock  on  center  of  aparejo, 

Procure  a  corona;  double  it  and  place  it  on  aparejo,  its  ends  facing 
to  the  front,  numbered  side  up. 

The  aparejo  is  now  set  up  and  ready  for  use. 

SETTING  UP  THE  UDALY"  APAREJO  FOR  USE. 

SEC.  7.  Owing  to  the  heavy  loads  necessitated  by  the  carrying  of 
mountain  guns  (Vicker's,  Maxim,  etc.),  the  principal  parts  of  which 
are  carried  as  "top"  loads,  it  has  been  found  advantageous  to  supply 
boot  and  saddle  bars  of  suitable  wood,  each  bar  being  shaped  so  as  to 
conform  to  that  particular  part  of  the  aparejo  coming  least  in  con- 
tact with  the  body  of  the  animal,  i.  e.,  that  portion  of  the  aparejo  that 
should  not  rest  on  the  animal's  backbone,  and  be  clear  of  the  mule's 
belly.  Slots  are  provided  on  bars  to  receive  the  ribs  and  hold  them 
securely  in  position.  Nine  ribs  are  provided  on  each  side,  serially 
numbered  with  the  corresponding  number  of  the  aparejo  for  which 
intended,  the  ribs  being  graduated  in  length  of  taper  from  front  to 
rear,  following  the  lines  of  the  willow-stick  method. 

The  boot  bars  conform  to  the  shape  of  the  boots,  as  formed  by  the 
padding  of  hay,  with  the  provision  of  adding  a  sufficiency  of  hay  over 
the  upper  portion  of  the  bars  where  that  portion  of  the  boot  comes 
into  contact  with  the  body  of  the  mule. 

The  saddle  bars,  in  similar  manner,  with  the  provision  of  adding  a 
sufficiency  of  hay  over  the  lower  portion  of  the  bars,  where  the  weight 
of  load  is  carried  by  the  animal. 

To  rib  up  the  aparejo  with  boot,  saddle  bars,  and  ribs  a  slit  12 
inches  long  is  provided  on  the  back  piece  at  rear,  with  holes  punched 
on  either  side  to  receive  lace  thongs,  and  a  "  hand-hole"  is  provided, 
cut  around  to  within  a  space  of  2  inches  at  top,  so  as  not  to  meet 
the  "  hand-hole"  on  opposite  or  belly  side  of  aparejo.  A  hole  is 
punched  on  lower  edge  of  lid,  with  hole  to  correspond  on  back  piece 
for  lace  thong,  to  secure  lid  of  back  piece.  The  "hand-hole"  is  pro- 
vided as  a  help  to  guide  the  ribs  to  proper  position  in  setting  up  the 
aparejo. 

1.  To  rib  up.  —  Unlace  the  slits  and  hand-holes;  soak  the  aparejo 
in  tepid  water  for  about  fifteen  minutes;  drain  it  and  lay  flat,  back 
pieces  up;  insert  the  boot  stick  and  the  saddle  bar  through  the  slit 
in  rear  and  press  them  to  their  places  at  the  boot  and  the  center 
stitch  line,  slotted  sides  up;  insert  the  numbered  set  of  nine  ribs 
through  the  slit  in  rear  in  their  numerical  order,  and  seat  them  in 
that  order  from  collar  to  rear  in  the  slots  of  the  boot  stick  and  saddle 
bar,  butts  at  the  boot;  secure  the  top  of  each  rib  as  it  is  seated  by 
inserting  the  key  bar  at  the  front  edge  below  the  collar  and  passing 
it  over  the  rib  in  place;  fasten  the  key  bar  to  the  collar  by  the  thong. 

NOTE.  —  Aparejos  are  issued  to  the  service  with  ribs  in  place.  Ribs 
are  furnished  in  sets  of  nine.  Each  rib  is  numbered  at  its  butt  to 


UNIVERSITY 


38  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

correspond  to  its  proper  numerical  position  in  the  panel,  counting 
from  the  collar  to  the  rear.  Each  rib  is  also  stamped  with  the  size 
of  the  aparejo  for  which  it  is  made.  The  aparejos  are  furnished  in 
58,  60,  and  62  inch  sizes.  The  ribs  for  a  60-inch  aparejo  are  there- 
fore marked  1-60,  2-60,  3-60,  etc.  Should  repairs  or  alterations 
make  it  necessary  to  rib  up,  the  butt  of  the  fifth  rib  is  seated  in  its 
slot,  the  overlap  at  its  slot  in  the  saddle  bar  is  marked  and  cut  away, 
and  the  other  ribs  are  cut  to  the  exact  resulting  length. 

2.  To  fill  or  pad. — Turn  the  aparejo  over,  belly  pieces  up;  procure 
about  6  pounds  of  fine,  soft,  elastic  hay;  taking  a  little  at  a  time, 
tease  or  "mix"  it  carefully;  insert  it  through  the  hand-hole,  and 
thus  gradually  fill  the  body  of  the  aparejo  with  a  smooth  and  even 
layer  not  more  than  2  inches  thick. 

NOTE. — Other  filling  may  be  used  in  necessity,  such  as  moss,  ex- 
celsior, curled  hair,  sea  grass,  but  these  substitutes  are  difficult  of 
manipulation  in  alteration  necessary  to  accommodate  the  rigging  to 
injuries  of  the  mule.  By  teasing  or  " mixing"  is  meant  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  straws  so  that  they  will  cross  one  another.  The  body  of 
the  aparejo  is  that  part  which  comes  in  contact  with  the  body  of  the 
mule.  As  3  inches  of  the  lower  portion  of  each  boot  stick  and  3 
inches  of  the  upper  portion  of  each  saddle  bar  must  not  come  into 
contact  with  the  mule,  no  filling  should  be  pressed  within  3  inches  of 
the  end  of  the  boot  or  within  3  inches  of  the  center  stitch  line.  The 
body  course  tapers,  however,  so  as  to  overlap  the  boot  stick  and  saddle 
bar,  and  also  tapers  toward  front  and  rear. 

3.  To  face  or  dress. — To  adjust  the  aparejo  more  accurately  to  the 
shape  of  the  mule  introduce  filling  and  press  it  well  into  the  corner 
of  the  front  boot;   working  toward  the  hand-hole,  continue  the  fa- 
cing along  the  boot  stick  and  front  edge,  gradually  increasing  its 
thickness  to  about  an  inch  at  7  inches  from  the  corner  and  forming 
its  inner  edge  into  the  arc  of  a  circle  concentric  with  the  hand-hole, 
the  thickness  tapering  to  the  ends  of  the  arc;  continue  this  for  3 
inches  more  toward  the  hand-hole,  rapidly  decreasing  the  thickness 
to  nothing;  proceed  in  exactly  the  same  way  at  the  collar;  under  no 
circumstances  should  the  collar  facing  reach  within  7  inches  of  the 
center  of  the  hand-hole.     Connect  the  front  boot  and  collar  facings 
by  a  dressing  along  the  front  edge  about  3  inches  wide  and  an  inch 
thick,  decreasing  in  thickness  toward  the  hand-hole  and  toward  the 
middle  of  the  edge. 

NOTE. — In  facing  up  introduce  the  filling  with  the  hand,  palm 
up,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  body  course.  In  case  the  leather  will  not 
yield  enough  to  permit  the  filling  to  be  introduced  well  into  the  cor- 
ners, the  tamping  stick  may  be  used  to  raise  it.  This  stick,  used  with 
the  commercial  aparejo,  is  4  or  5  feet  long,  1J  inches  in  diameter, 
wedge  shaped  for  4  inches  from  one  end,  the  edge  of  the  wedge  being 
about  one-fourth  inch  thick  and  grooved.  The  object  of  the  boot 
facing  is  to  cause  the  boot  stick  to  carry  horizontally  and  parallel  to 
the  center  of  the  mule-and  give  free  action  to  the  mule's  elbow.  Mules 
of  large  barrel  will  require  a  thicker  facing  than  described.  The 
object  of  the  collar  facing  is  to  cause  the  saddle  bar  to  carry  horizon- 
tally and  parallel  with  the  center  of  the  mule  and  to  protect  the 
mule's  withers.  Mules  with  high  withers  will  require  a  thicker  fa- 
cing than  that  described.  In  setting  to  the  shape  of  the  mule  the 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TEANSPOKTATION.  39 

aparejo  bends  at  the  middle  of  the  front  edge.  It  is  important  that 
the  body  course  remain  undisturbed  during  dressing,  and  that  the 
instructions  given  be  carefully  followed  to  avoid  sore  withers  and 
tails  and  body  and  belly  bunches. 

4.  To  attach  the  crupper. — Stand  the  aparejo  on  its  boots  in  its 
normal  position;  secure  a  lace  thong  to  the  front  hole  on  the  upper 
facing  or  the  crupper  on  each  side  and  fasten  the  crupper  with  short 
thongs  to  the  center  holes  of  the  carrier  pieces  on  the  rear  of  the 
aparejo;  pass  the  crupper  lace  thong  through  the  second  hole  from 
the  top  of  the  front  facing  of  the  aparejo,  through  the  second  hole 
of  the  crupper,  through  the  fourth  hole  of  the  aparejo  facing,  through 
the  fourth  hole  of  the  crupper,  and  so  on,  finishing  through  the 
bottom  holes  of  the  facing  and  crupper  and  tying  to  the  crupper  hole. 

NOTE. — In  lacing  the  crupper  to  the  aparejo,  the  thong  must  be 
passed  through  the  holes  from  the  outside  and  must  not  be  twisted, 
the  lacing  must  not  cross,  and  it  is  important  that  the  tie  be  made  on 
the  last  hole  of  the  crupper  instead  of  the  aparejo. 

NOTE. — Guayava,  willow,  dogwood,  hickory  or  any  other  wood 
combining  the  qualities  of  permanent  elasticity  and  strength  may  be 
used  to  replace  broken  ribs. 

When  the  set  up  aparejo  is  to  be  filled,  no  soaking  is  necessary;  in- 
stead make  the  belly  pieces  pliable  by  rubbing  with  a  wet  sponge. 

Mules  weighing  850  to  900  pounds  require  a  58-inch  aparejo;  1,000 
pounds,  60-inch;  1,100  pounds,  62-inch;  for  heavier  mules  requisition 
should  be  made  for  larger  sizes. 

When  the  mule  is  loaded  the  cincha,  in  travel,  should  free  the 
elbow  by  about  1  inch;  more  than  this  will  prevent  a  proper  grip 
on  the  belly. 

If  the  boots  ride  high  on  the  body  of  the  mule,  or  if  they  reach 
under  the  belly,  even  though  they  ride  horizontally  and  parallel  to 
the  center  of  the  mule,  the  aparejo  will  be  likely  to  turn  easily.  This 
fault  encourages  injuriously  tight  cinching  and  sore  tails. 

If  one  or  both  boots  flare  out  or  turn  in  toward  the  mule,  cinch 
sores  and  sore  tails  result,  or  belly  bunches  are  caused. 

The  width  of  the  collar  arch  clearance  should  be  at  least  54  inches. 
If  it  is  too  narrow  or  too  wide,  or  if  the  saddle  bars  slope  downward 
toward  the  front,  there  will  be  sores  on  the  withers;  if  they  slope  to 
the  rear  there  will  be  injuries  over  the  loins,  called  kidney  sores. 

If  the  lacing  of  the  crupper  is  drawn  too  tight  at  the  bottom  the 
lower  edge  of  the  crupper  will  rub  the  buttocks  and  cause  abrasions. 

The  object  to  be  attained  is  the  uniform  distribution  of  the  weight 
of  a  load  over  the  portion  of  the  mule's  body  anatomically  suited 
to  carrying  a  burden;  so  that  the  saddle  will  ride  with  little  motion 
and  without  friction  of  the  bearing  surface  on  the  body.  The  con- 
tact of  the  bearing  surface  of  the  saddle  must  be  close  at  all  points. 
As  the  mule's  body  swells  from  front  to  rear,  the  more  or  less  cylin- 
drically  shaped  aparejo  after  the  body  course  is  laid  must  be  modified 
by  facing  up  so  as  to  provide  a  concave  surface  to  fit  over  a  convex 
surface.  But,  as  the  barrel  of  the  properly  conformed  mule  is  nearly 
cylindrical  through  the  rear  half  or  more  of  the  contact  surface,  no 
facing  is  necessary,  as  a  rule,  in  the  rear  part  of  the  aparejo,  although 
conformation  may  require  it  exceptionally. 


40  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

CARE    OF    THE    APAREJO. 

SEC.  8.  Care  of  the  aparejo, — Packmasters  should  attend  to  the 
cleanliness  of  the  rigging  (aparejo  proper)  at  least  once  a  week. 

The  following  directions  for  cleaning  and  preserving  the  leather 
equipment  should  be  carefully  followed: 

To  preserve  the  life  of  leather  equipments  they  should  be  cleaned 
whenever  dirt,  grit,  or  dust  has  collected  on  them  or  when  they  have 
become  saturated  with  the  sweat  of  the  animal.  In  cleaning  each 
part  do  not  separate  the  crupper  from  the  body  of  the  aparejo, 
except  where  attached  to  the  carrier  pieces,  using  a  lather  of  castile 
soap  and  warm  water.  If  the  equipment  is  cared  for  frequently  this 
method  is  sufficient,  but  if  the  leather  has  become  hard  and  dry  a 
little  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  applied  after  washing  with  castile  soap. 
When  the  oil  is  dry  the  equipment  should  be  sponged  lightly  with  soap 
and  water,  which  will  remove  the  surplus  remaining  on  the  surface. 
If  a  polish  is  desired  a  thin  coat  of  russet  leather  polish  issued  by  the 
Ordnance  Department  should  be  applied  and  rubbed  briskly  with  a 
dry  cloth. 

Particular  care  should  be  taken  not  to  use  too  much  oil  on  the  belly 
piece,  as  the  result  will  cause  the  belly  piece  to  become  baggy,  as  the 
more  firm  the  leather  of  the  belly  or  body  piece  is,  the  better  it  will 
hold  the  padding  of  hay  to  its  place.  In  no  case  should  leather  be 
dipped  in  water  or  be  placed  in  the  sun  to  dry. 

All  accessories  of  the  aparejo  and  other  equipment  of  the  train  will 
likewise  be  kept  clean. 

CAUSES  OF  BODY  AND  BELLY  BUNCHES,  SORE  TAILS,  SORE  WITHERS 
AND  LOINS,  OR  KIDNEY  SORES,  ON  PACK  MULES,  AND  DIRECTIONS 
FOR  THEIR  PREVENTION  AND  CURE. 

SEC.  9.  The  term  "bunch"  is  applied  to  a  swelling  or  "puffing  up" 
of  the  skin,  caused  by  the  stopping  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  at 
that  part  of  the  body;  it  shows  unevenness  in  the  ribbing,  or  placing 
of  the  padding  (hay),  causing  undue  bearing  or  pressure  on  that 
part  of  the  body. 

Use  as  little  hay  through  the  body  of  the  aparejo  as  possible.  When 
the  hay  has  become  packed  the  thickness  should  not  be  greater  than 
2  inches. 

If  through  unevenness  of  the  filling  a  "bunch"  is  caused  on  the  body 
of  the  animal,  mark  this  "bunch"  by  wetting  it  with  water;  wet  the 
face  of  the  "bunch"  only,  as  its  shape  on  the  animal's  body  is  what 
must  be  indicated  on  the  aparejo.  Now  place  the  aparejo  on  the 
animal,  without  corona  or  blanket,  where  it  rests  when  cinched  on; 
do  not  turn  crupper.  Place  a  hand  on  each  side  and  rock  the  aparejo 
so  that  the  wet  surface  on  the  body  of  the  animal  will  leave  its 
imprints  on  the  aparejo.  Raise  the  aparejo  clear  of  the  animal  and 
extend  it  on  the  ground,  inside  facing  up,  and  it  will  show  the  location 
where  the  "bunch"  has  been  caused. 

Remove  the  hay  under  the  wet  surface,  and  nowhere  else,  and 
take  it  out  down  to  the  ribs.  The  better  this  can  be  done  without 
disturbing  the  bed,  but  only  where  it  has  been  marked,  the  more 
confident  one  can  be  that  the  "bunch"  will  disappear  on  the  next 
travel.  If  not  traveling,  a  "bunched"  animal  should  be  loaded  with 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  41 

pack  and  exercised  sufficiently  to  reduce  the  "bunch;"  otherwise  the 
"bunch"  will  develop  into  a  "steadfast." 

Do  not  overlook  any  "bunches,"  no  matter  how  small;  reduce 
them  at  once  and  animals  can  always  be  kept  sound,  and  sound 
animals  will  always  carry  their  load  and  do  so  with  comfort. 

Should  the  animal  be  "bunched"  under  the  belly,  take  out  the 
hay  on  both  sides  for  a  space  of  about  4  inches  above  the  boot,  clear 
to  ribs,  and  across  width  of  aparejo,  leaving  a  little  at  both  edges. 
The  aparejo,  when  cinched  on  the  animal,  will  now  shape  itself  to 
the  animal's  body  and  relieve  the  pressure  on  the  belly. 

The  "bunch"  will  disappear  when  the  animal  is  loaded;  one  or 
two  hour's  travel  is  sufficient  to  bring  it  down.  Where  hay  has 
been  removed,  replace  a  little  from  day  to  day,  until  its  proper  filling 
is  regained. 

The  evidence  of  a  "belly  bunch,"  plainly  indicates  there  has  been 
too  much  padding  (hay)  used  in  the  boots  of  the  aparejo,  as  also 
from  the  boots  to  the  "hand  hole;"  this  undue  filling  of  hay  causes 
the  boots  of  the  aparejo  to  stand  or  flare  out  from  the  body  of  the 
mule,  and  prevents  the  shaping  or  bending  of  the  aparejo  to  the 
conformation  of  the  mule's  body,  the  result  is  too  much  pressure 
brought  on  the  belly  in  cinching  the  aparejo  to  the  conformation  of 
the  body  of  the  animal,  the  circulation  being  stopped  by  the  cinch, 
and  on  its  removal  the  skin  "puffs  up,"  and  we  have  what  is  termed 
a  "belly  bunch."  Therefore  to  prevent  a  "belly  bunch"  the  cause 
must  not  be  provided,  and  if  provided,  must  be  removed;  what 
is  wanted  is  an  even  pressure  bearing  surface  covered  by  the  cinch  and 
aparejo.  As  the  cinch  binds  the  aparejo  to  the  body  of  the  animal, 
the  body  of  the  aparejo  and  its  boots  or  ends  must  bend  and  shape 
itself  without  undue  compression  of  the  ribs  and  belly  of  the  animal; 
otherwise  "body"  and  "belly  bunches"  will  be  sure  to  occur. 

Sore  docks  or  tails. — This  trouble  is  not  clearly  understood  by  the 
average  packmaster  and  cargador;  therefore,  to  clearly  understand 
the  description  here  given,  it  will  be  necessary  to  remember  the 
meaning  of  the  following  terms  in  reference  to  the  aparejo: 

First.  It  is  said  the  aparejo  is  too  long  or  too  short.  The  obvious 
meaning  is,  that  in  fitting  the  aparejo  we  attach  the  crupper  and 
determine  by  the  lacing  (crupper)  how  far  forward  or  rearward  the 
aparejo  shall  work.  When  the  aparejo  is  too  far  forward,  or  long, 
the  cinch  of  the  aparejo  causes  an  abrasion  of  the  elbow,  and  interferes 
with  the  travel  of  the  animal;  if  too  far  rearward,  or  short,  the 
aparejo  will  not  hold  its  place;  it  works  itself  off  to  the  rear  in 
mountainous  country,  and  will  do  so  even  on  level  ground. 

Second.  It  is  said  the  aparejo  is  too  deep  or  too  shallow.  The 
obvious  meaning  is,  that  in  selecting  an  aparejo  to  fit  the  mule,  an 
aparejo  is  provided  that  is  either  too  deep  or  too  shallow  to  properly 
fit  the  pack  animal;  right  here  is  where  packmasters  and  cargadors 
are  apt  to  provide  conditions  or  the  fundamental  cause  for  sore  tails. 
An  aparejo  that  is  too  deep  laps  around  the  belly  and  has  not  sufficient 
grip  on  the  body  of  the  mule  to  hold  the  aparejo  in  its  proper  place; 
that  is,  the  aparejo  not  having  sufficient  grip  on  the  body  of  the 
mule,  it  slips  forward  and  the  dock  of  the  crupper  cuts  the  tail  by 
the  impact  given,  due  to  the  weight  of  the  load  in  the  travel  of  the 
animal. 


42  MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

For  similar  reason,  the  aparejo  when  too  shallow,  the  boots  stand 
too  high  on  the  body  of  the  animal,  and  consequently  the  aparejo, 
having  no  grip  on  the  body  of  the  mule,  slips  forward  and  the  dock 
of  the  crupper  cuts  the  tail.  Therefore  the  object  to  be  attained  is 
to  provide  an  aparejo  that  will  properly  fit  the  animal,  and  take 
sufficient  grip  on  the  body  of  the  animal  so  that  the  aparejo  will 
hold  its  place  when  "set  up"  and  cinched  on  the  pack  mule. 

Third.  Next  in  importance  is  to  "set  up"  the  aparejo  by  a  grad- 
ual tapering  in  diameter  of  the  sticks  horn  front  to  rear,  and  a  gradual 
tapering  in  the  filling  of  hay  horn  front  to  rear,  in  such  manner  so  that 
when  the  aparejo  is  cinched  on  the  animal  the  ends  or  boots  of  the 
aparejo  will  carry  horizontally  and  parallel  to  the  center  of  the  mule 
and  give  free  action  to  the  mule's  elbows.  In  similar  manner  in  form- 
ing the  saddle  on  each  side  of  the  center  stitch  line,  the  center  or  top 
of  the  aparejo  will  carry  horizontally  and  parallel  with  the  center  of 
the  mule. 

As  a  further  aid  to  avoid  sore  tails,  all  aparejos  should  be  not  less 
than  24  inches  wide,  as  the  greater  the  width  of  surface  of  the  animal's 
body  that  is  covered  by  the  aparejo,  the  better  retaining  grip  it  has 
on  the  barrel  of  the  mule. 

Mules  supplied  with  newly  "set  up  rigging"  should  be  loaded  (250 
pounds)  and  exercised  each  day  until  the  aparejos  show  they  have 
assumed  the  shape,  or  as  may  be  termed,  a  plaster  cast  of  the  animal's 
body,  and  for  this  reason  changing  of  aparejos  is  positively  forbidden. 
When  in  such  condition  the  aparejos  are  fit  for  satisfactory  service. 

Should  the  aparejo  cause  the  dock  of  the  crupper  to  cut  the  animal's 
tail,  it  is  evident  there  is  too  much  filling  of  hay  at  the  rear  corners 
of  the  aparejo,  as  well  as  too  much  filling  above  the  boots  at  rear, 
thus  preventing  a  suitable  grip  of  the  aparejo  over  the  swell  of  the 
animal's  ribs  (to  hold  the  aparejo  to  its  place),  always  bearing  in 
mind  that  the  aparejo  is  sufficiently  deep  to  grip  the  body  of  the  mule 
properly.  This  latter  feature  is  the  fundamental  cause  of  sore  tails, 
that  is,  the  first  and  necessary  requisite  to  avoid  sore  tails  is  to  pro- 
vide an  aparejo  that  is  deep  enough  to  grip  the  body  of  the  pack  mule. 
A  shallow  rigging  will  always  cause  sore  tails,  from  the  fact  that  it  has 
no  grip  on  the  animal's  body  and  consequently  works  itself  ahead  by 
travel  action  of  the  animal,  the  weight  of  the  load  giving  the  dock  of 
the  crupper  impact  against  the  animal's  dock  or  tail;  continued  action, 
or  a  day's  travel,  develops  a  sore  tail. 

First.  Sore  withers:  There  are  two  causes  for  this  trouble;  the  first 
is  in  setting  up  the  aparejo  too  weak;  that  is,  in  providing  sticks  that 
are  too  small  in  diameter  to  hold  up  a  250-pound  load ;  the  second  is 
in  not  having  sufficient  hay  or  padding  under  or  below  the  collar  to 
hold  the  aparejo  away  from  the  withers  of  the  pack  mule. 

Second.  Sore  loins  or  kidney  sores:  The  same  causes  operate  for 
this,  trouble  as  for  sore  withers. 

Third.  It  should  be  remembered  that  aparejos  "set  up"  with  sticks 
of  too  large  diameter  are  injurious  to  the  pack  animal;  they  are  too 
hard  to  "break  in,"  that  is,  they  will  not  compress  or  shape  to  the 
body  of  the  pack  mule.  They  are  apt  to  cause  chafes  along  the  shoul- 
der blades,  body  bunches,  and  belly  bunches;  however,  such  rigging, 
to  properly  break  them  in,  should  be  loaded  with  not  less  than  300 
or  350  pounds  on  the  pack  mule,  and  exercised  each  day  for  at  least 
ten  days,  average  distance  10  miles  per  day. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  43 

Steadfasts. — There  is  but  one  cause  for  steadfasts,  that  is  in  neglect- 
ing to  fix  for  "bunches/'  a  neglect  of  twenty-four  hours  after  the  bunch 
has  been  caused  and  the  bunch  will  become  difficult  to  reduce;  a  neg- 
lect of  thirty-six  hours  and  the  bunch  will  result  in  the  flesh  becoming 
hard  and  callous,  and  assume  the  condition  and  appearance  of  dried 
beef;  this  condition  is  termed  a  "steadfast."  To  remove  the  stead- 
fast the  knife  has  to  be  used  and  all  appearance  of  the  steadfast  must 
be  cut  out;  the  animal  experiences  no  pain  until  the  sound  flesh  is 
touched.  Apply  a  slice  of  fat  bacon  after  the  steadfast  has  been  re- 
moved and  the  sore  will  heal  in  a  few  days ;  this  will  not  interfere  with 
the  working  of  the  pack  animal. 

If  packmasters  will  exercise  care  as  above  outlined  when  setting 
up  and  fitting  the  aparejo,  they  can  follow  a  troop  of  cavalry  at  any 
gait  desired,  or  climb  any  mountain  where  an  animal  can  find  footing, 
without  the  least  danger  of  losing  load  or  aparejo. 

In  the  case  of  aparejos  ribbed  with  willow  or  other  sticks,  the  main 
secret  is  "ribbing"  properly,  that  is,  the  gradual  lessening  in  the  diam- 
eter of  each  stick  from  front  to  rear. 

To  keep  animals  sound  requires  the  time  and  experience  of  experts 
at  the  business. 


CHAPTER  III. 

INSTRUCTION    OF   THE    INDIVIDUAL    PACKER    IN    PREPARATION 
FOR  HIS  DUTIES  IN  THE  PACK  TRAIN. 

SECURING    AND    COILING   ROPES. 

SEC.  10.  How  to  prepare  lash,  sling,  and  lair  ropes  for  use. — Take 
a  rope,  standard  size  and  length  (see  table  of  sizes  of  rope  and  can- 
vas, sec.  88),  and  form  an  eye  or  loop  on  one  end  and  wrap  or  seize 
the  opposite  end  in  this  manner: 

To  form  the  eye  unravel  about  6  or  7  inches  of  end  selected  and 
double  this  portion  back  so  as  to  form  a  loop  about  4  inches  long; 
divide  the  strands  in  the  order  of  their  twist,  placing  the  second  or 
middle  strand  against  the  strand  on  rope  selected.  For  this  purpose 
do  not  keep  the  rope  at  a  twist  as  held  by  the  left  hand,  as  the  loop 
or  eye  when  formed  will  be  at  a  twist,  i.  e.,  not  in  proper  alignment. 
Now  untwist  the  strand  selected  sufficiently  to  pass  the  end  of  second 
or  middle  strand  through  opening  thus  made  and  draw  snug.  (See 
fig.  100.)  Next  untwist  the  strand  at  the  left  and  pass  the  first  strand 
through  opening  thus  made  and  draw  snug.  (Fig.  101.)  Now  turn 
the  rope  over  and  untwist  the  remaining  strand  of  rope  and  pass  this 
third  or  last  strand  through  opening  thus  made  from  right  to  left  and 
draw  snug.  (Fig.  102.)  By  this  operation  each  raveled  strand  passes 
between  its  mates  on  the  twist  of  rope. 

Now  draw  the  strands  more  snugly  against  the  free  end  or  twist  of 
rope,  and  commencing  with  either  one  of  the  three  strands  pass  each 
one  from  right  to  left  between  its  mates,  following  the  twist  of  rope 
until  the  operation  is  performed  twice ;  cut  off  the  remaining  portion 
of  each  strand,  allowing  about  one-half  inch  extending.  Now  place 
the  rope  on  something  solid ;  place  the  foot  over  the  splice  thus  made 
and  roll  rope  under  foot  to  smooth  splice  and  the  eye  or  loop  is 
properly  formed.  (Fig.  103.) 

On  the  opposite  end  a  wrapping  of  canvas  twine  may  be  formed 
about  three-fourths  of  an  inch  long;  use  a  needle  to  pass  the  end  of 
cord  between  each  strand  of  rope,  embracing  the  wrapping  in  doing  so 
and  draw  snug  each  time.  The  cord  may  be  waxed — beeswax  is  good 
for  the  purpose — or  when  a  cord  is  not  available  untwist  the  strands 
for  about  7  inches  and  hold  the  rope  in  the  left  hand  close  to  strands. 
Now  take  a  single  cord  of  each  strand  and  untwist  close  to  the  fingers 
of  the  left  hand,  bringing  each  cord  to  the  front  in  the  order  of  the 
strands. 

Now  hold  the  strands  between  the  first  and  second  fingers  of  the 
left  hand,  and  with  the  right  hand  take  the  first  cord  and  loop  it 
over  toward  the  second  or  middle  cord,  and  place  this  second  cord 

44 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  45 

over  the  first,  holding  the  end  of  this  cord  between  the  points  of  the 
second  and  third  fingers;  next  take  the  third  or  last  cord  and  bring 
it  under  the  first,  if  not  already  there,  then  over  the  second  and 
around  the  strands  from  right  to  left,  its  end  passing  into  the  eye 
or  loop  of  first  cord,  and  draw  each  cord  down  separately  until  the 
strands  are  firmly  engaged  by  the  coids. 

This  operation  leaves  the  strands  standing  upward  and  the  cords 
downward,  the  strands  thus  being  held  in  the  center;  now  pass  each 
cord  from  right  to  left  as  before,  as  in  the  operation  of  finishing  the 
splice  for  eye  of  lash  rope. 

This  latter  method  is  preferred  by  packers  as  more  durable,  as  it 
will  not  become  undone,  and  in  similar  manner  is  employed  for  the 
free  ends  of  the  sling  rope. 

The  operation  of  preparing  the  lair  rope  is  entirely  similar  to 
that  of  the  lash  rope. 

SEC.  11.  How  to  do  up  a  lash  rope. — Take  hold  of  rope  in  the  left 
hand  near  the  cincha  or  by  the  lacings;  coil  with  right,  receiving 
coils  in  left  hand;  length  of  coils  24  inches.  This  operation  is  best 
performed  by  keeping  the  left  hand  extended  downward  (this  per- 
mits of  the  cincha  resting  partly  on  the  ground);  now  allow  the  right 
hand  to  slip  down  the  running  rope  at  arm's  length  from  left  to  right. 
This  operation  will  gauge  the  size  or  length  of  each  coil  (length  of 
coil  24  inches)  and  permit  of  rapid  formation  in  coiling  the  rope  as 
well  as  a  guide  in  giving  an  exact  resulting  length  to  each  coil.  The 
action  of  the  right  hand  in  this  operation  is  similar  to  that  of  a  pen- 
dulum of  a  clock,  the  left  hand  receiving  the  coils  and  the  ground 
partly  supporting  the  cinch  and  coils  as  rendered. 

Take  cincha  in  right  hand,  make  one  turn  with  it  around  the 
coils,  and  pass  the  hook  through  the  loop  formed  by  the  coils.  Draw 
the  hook  well  up,  causing  the  cincha  to  tighten  snugly  on  the  coils 

a,  %  i). 

SEC.  12.  How  to  do  up  a  sling  rope. — Take  a  sling  rope  and  bring 
the  ends  together,  grasp  both  parts  in  left  hand  about  20  inches  from 
ends;  coil  as  in  the  case  of  lash  rope. 

Take  three  turns  of  the  loop  around  coils  and  pass  the  loop  through 
the  coils,  as  in  case  of  cincha  hook;  draw  coils  up  snugly  against 
end.  This  should  leave  the  loop  out,  not  exceeding  4  inches;  length 
of  coils  24  inches  (vii,  fig.  1). 

SEC.  13.  How  to  do  up  a  lair  rope. — Take  a  lair  rope  by  its  eye,  in 
left  hand;  pass  the  end  through  the  eye  and  draw  through  until  a 
coil  of  24  inches  is  formed;  hold  and  coil  as  in  case  of  lash  rope, 
taking  three  turns  of  the  end  around  coils.  Pass  the  end  through,  as 
in  the  case  of  cincha  hook;  draw  coils  snugly  up,  leaving  not  more 
than  6  inches  of  end  out  (viii,  fig.  1). 

LAIRING   UP    THE    PACKS. 

SEC.  14.  How  to  square  ends  of  packs  and  tie  before  lairing  up. — 
By  " lairing  up"  a  pack,  we  mean  wrapping  it  up  in  a  manta,  or  pack 
cover,  to  prevent  damage  to  the  pack  during  transportation.  (See 
fig.  6,  etc.) 

When  cargo  is  composed  of  sacks  of  flour,  coffee,  beans,  rice,  corn, 
or  oats,  etc.,  it  is  necessary  that  the  ends  of  packs  be  squared  and 
tied  before  "lairing  up." 


46  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

The  more  compact  the  packs  and  the  better  the  ends  are  kept 
square,  the  better  the  load  will  ride  and  the  less  danger  there  will 
be  of  the  sacks  bursting  when  dropped  on  the  ground,  through  acci- 
dent or  negligence. 

For  this  purpose  old  or  unserviceable  sling,  lair,  or  lash  ropes  may 
be  used.  Cut  a  length,  say,  20  inches  and  untwist;  take  one  of  the 
strands  and  form  a  bowline  knot  at  one  of  its  ends.  (Sec.  46,  fig.  79.) 
Always  commence  at  bottom  or  seamless  end  of  sack. 

Procure  a  marline  spike;  cause  pack  to  rest  on  its  end;  face  one  of 
the  narrower  sides ;  squeeze  the  sack  about  4  inches  below  the  farther 
corner  with  both  hands,  so  as  to  bring  the  hands  toward  one  another. 
Through  the  portion  of  the  sack  thus  included  pass  the  spike,  and 
form  hole  large  enough  for  strand  to  pass  through. 

Pass  the  end  of  strand  through  hole  formed,  and  draw  it  through 
until  bowline  knot  meets  hole;  hold  strand  taut;  tap  lightly  on  knot 
with  heel  of  right  foot,  drawing  slack  as  rendered  by  tapping.  Should 
not  sufficient  slack  be  gained,  tap  lower  down,  4  or  5  inches  from  knot, 
gradually  raising  until  knot  is  reached. 

Hold  the  rope  taut;  move  around  so  as  to  face  the  other  end  of  the 
sack;  make  a  hole  with  the  marline  spike  as  before,  and  pass  the  free 
end  of  the  strand  through;  tap  with  the  heel,  as  described  in  the 
former  case,  and  draw  taut. 

Now  introduce  end  of  strand  through  loop  or  eye  of  bowline  knot, 
(see  fig.  80),  draw  down  snug,  and  secure.  Turn  up  the  other  end  and 
do  likewise,  and  pack  is  in  condition  to  "lair  up."  Sacks  needing 
it  should  be  doubly  sacked. 

HOW   TO    LAIR   UP   SIDE    PACKS. 

SEC.  15.  Secure  a  lair  rope  and  spread  out  manta;  place  pack  diag- 
onally in  center  of  manta;  i.  e.,  with  ends  facing  opposite  corners. 

Face  a  side  of  the  pack;  pick  up  the  near  corner  of  manta  and 
bring  it  tightly  over  pack,  lapping  corner  under  sufficiently  to  make 
it  just  cover  the  pack.  Place  Knees  on  this  part;  grasp  the  opposite 
corner  and,  turning  it  under  also,  bring  it  tightly  over  pack,  its  edge 
flush  with  near  edge  of  pack.  Place  right  knee  to  hold  this  part  in 
place  and  face  one  end;  smooth  canvas  squarely  down,  and  turn  in 
corners;  reach  out  and  grasp  the -end,  and  bring  it  tightly  over  pack, 
spreading  canvas  out,  if  necessary,  to  cover  corners. 

Place  left  knee  thereon,  face  opposite  end,  and  do  likewise.  In 
bringing  this  last  corner  across  length  of  pack  turn  corner  under 
when  necessary  to  square  with  end  of  pack. 

Place  left  knee  on  pack  and  reach  for  lair  rope;  bring  the  rope 
lengthwise  under  pack,  leaving  the  eye  near  the  upper  edge.  Place 
end  of  rope  through  eye,  if  not  already  there,  and  draw  it  through; 
grasp  the  running  rope  in  both  hands;  place  both  knees  on  end  of 
pack,  and  draw  well  taut.  This  should  bring  the  eye  about  6 
inches  over  end. 

Hold  slack  with  left  hand;  grasp  the  rope  with  right  about  2  feet 
in  advance  of  the  left;  form  a  loop  outward  and  inward,  so  that  the 
right  hand  will  come  under  the  left,  and  the  running  part  of  the  rope 
will  ride  under  the  standing  part.  Pass  this  loop  under  the  pack 
about  6  inches  from  the  end  and  draw  taut.  Face  the  other  end, 
placing  the  knee  on  the  intersection  of  the  ropes;  form  a  similar  loop, 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  47 

and  place  it  around  this  end;  holding  taut  with  left  hand,  turn  the 
pack  over,  passing  rope  over  middle  of  end.  Place  foot  on  pack  and 
draw  taut. 

Now  pass  the  end  of  rope  over  and  under  the  middle  of  cross  rope 
at  nearer  end  of  pack;  then  over  and  under  cross  rope  at  farther  end 
and  draw  taut. 

Pass  rope  over  middle  of  end  of  pack,  turning  the  pack  over,  and 
securing  the  rope  to  the  cross  part  at  the  intersection  of  the  ropes. 

If  length  of  rope  permits,  take  a  turn  around  the  center  also. 

The  parts  of  the  lair  rope  are  designated  as  Z,  figs.  13  and  14. 

In  making  up  side  packs  keep  the  sides  and  ends  square.  Never 
make  up  a  side  pack  in  ball  shape,  or  get  it  any  longer  than  the  width 
of  the  aparejo,  when  possible  to  avoid  doing  so. 

HOW  TO  LAIR   UP  A   SIDE  PACK  OF  ROPES   WITHOUT  THE  AID  OF  PACK 

COVER   OR   MANTA. 

SEC.  16.  Take  a  lair  or  sling  rope,  hold  an  end  in  each  hand,  and 
spread  out  the  loop.  Place  the  end  held  in  left  hand  on  the  ground; 
draw  sufficiently  on  the  end  in  right  hand,  so  that  when  this  end  is 
folded  to  the  front  the  rope  will  lie  in  three  equal  lengths.  This  leaves 
an  end  of  the  rope  and  a  loop  at  either  extremity.  Make  the  three 
ropes  equally  distant  from  one  another  at  the  center.  Place  length- 
wise across  the  center  as  many  coiled  ropes  as  it  is  determined  to  form 
into  a  side  pack. 

When  ready,  another  packer  will  assist  to  "lair."  The  two  packers 
face  one  another  on  opposite  sides  of  the  pack,  each  draws  on  his  end 
of  the  rope  until  opposite  loop  is  close  to  side  of  pack;  then  passes 
his  end  of  rope  through  opposite  loop  and  draws  slack.  Each  then 
places  both  knees  on  side  or  pack  and  draws  taut,  causing  the  loops 
to  come  near  center  of  pack. 

Each  packer  holding  rope  taut  with  left  hand,  with  right  hand 
passes  rope  over  middle  of  end  of  pack  to  his  left;  assisting  one  an- 
other, they  turn  the  pack  over.  Each  now  passes  his  rope  to  the 
other;  then  causing  the  ropes  to  cross  at  the  center  of  the  pack,  each 
brings  his  rope  to  the  middle  of  his  side  of  the  pack. 

Resting  their  knees  on  the  pack,  the  packers  now  draw  the  rope 
taut ;  then  holding  the  slack,  they  turn  the  pack  over  and  fasten  the 
ropes  together  by  a  square  knot  on  top  of  tne  pack. 

HOW  TO  LAIR   UP  AN  APAREJO   AND  RIDING   SADDLE   FOR   STORAGE   OR 

SHIPMENT. 

SEC.  17.  Without  turning  the  crupper,  extend  the  aparejo  on  the 
ground,  inside  facing  up.  Place  the  corona  on  it,  full  length,  sweat- 
cloth  facing  up.  Now  procure  a  lair  rope;  bring  the  loop  over  one 
end  of  aparejo  and  place  so  as  to  lie  along  center  of  corona  and 
aparejo.  Cause  the  aparejo  to-  stand  on  its  boots ;  draw  slack  on  rope 
so  as  to  leave  eye  or  bight  of  rope  on  top  and  in  center  of  aparejo. 

Proceed  and  finish  as  in  lairing  side  pack  and  secure  dock  of  crup- 
per at  top. 

Ropes,  canvas,  and  blankets  should  be  made  into  packs  of  con- 
venient size  and  laired;  each  pack  to  have  a  tag  indicating  its  con- 
tents. 


48  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

Each  riding  saddle  should  have  its  blanket  folded;  the  bridle  and 
blind  are  placed  therein  and  rolled  up  and  the  roll  tied  to  cantle  of 
saddle. 

The  stirrups  should  be  wrapped  around  saddle  in  convenient  man- 
ner and  the  whole  placed  hi  a  " gunny"  sack,  secured  at  top,  and 
tagged  to  show  its  contents. 

PUTTING    THE    APAREJO    ON    THE    MULE HOW    TO    FOLD    AN    APAREJO 

BLANKET. 

SEC.  18.  Hold  the  blanket  by  the  corners,  the  short  way  up  and 
down;  fold  across  the  longer  edges,  right  hand  holding  corners,  left 
holding  folded  edge  at  corner.  Shake  the  blanket  and  spread  it  out 
on  the  ground,  the  hands  still  holding  up  the  corners.  Carry  the 
upper  edge  to  the  front,  so  as  to  leave  a  portion  of  the  blanket,  22 
inches  wide,  on  the  ground.  Then  fold  back,  so  as  to  leave  the  blanket 
hi  three  equal  folds,  22  inches  wide  and  42  inches  long.  Fold  once 
more,  bringing  the  ends  together.  It  is  now  in  condition  to  be  placed 
on  the  aparejo  before  putting  the  aparejo  on  the  mule. 

HOW  TO  PLACE  BLANKET  ON  APAREJO  PREPARATORY  TO  PUTTING  ON 

THE  APAREJO. 

SEC.  19.  Place  so  that  the  ends  will  rest  on  front  of  aparejo.  Its 
proper  place,  before  putting  the  aparejo  on  the  mule,  is  under  the 
corona. 

HOW   TO    BLIND    A    PACK   MULE. 

SEC.  20.  Take  hold  of  one  of  the  sides  of  blind  near  end;  hold 
animal  by  halter  or  halter  shank;  bring  blind  fully  over  animal's 
neck  to  "off  side,"  allowing  half  of  blind  with  tail  to  hang  down; 
bring  the  crown  of  blind  well  to  front  and  pass  it  over  animal's  ears 
with  right  hand,  from  right  to  left.  Do  not  raise  the  hand  in  passing 
over,  as  the  animal  may  duck  from  it. 

HOW  TO  PLACE   CORONA,   BLANKET,   AND  APAREJO  ON  THE   MULE. 

SEC.  21.  It  is  assumed  that  two  packers,  called,  respectively,  the 
"near"  and  "off"  packers,  work  together  in  placing  the  apartejo  on 
the  animal  and  see  that  the  aparejo  is  properly  equipped — i.  e.,  that 
the  cincha  is  folded  and  placed  on  top  of  it;  that  the  crupper  is 
turned  so  as  to  rest  on  top  of  the  cincha,  and  that  the  blanket  and 
corona  are  on  top  of  the  aparejo. 

A  corona  is  placed  in  position  on  aparejo,  as  explained  for  the 
blanket  (sec.  18),  numeral  or  design  on  top. 

With  right  hand  take  hold  of  the  upper  hah*  of  corona  at  the 
middle  of  the  nearest  side,  fingers  resting  on  top,  thumb  under; 
raise,  and  with  the  left  hand  grasp  lower  half  in  similar  manner; 
raise,  extend  corona,  and  pass  it  over  animal's  body  with  right  hand, 
the  left  guiding,  to  come  in  line  over  cross  or  birthmark  on  animal's 
withers,  center  of  corona  along  center  of  back. 

A  blanket  is  handled  and  placed  on  corona  in  similar  manner. 

The  "off"  packer,  in  both  cases,  receives  the  "off"  end  of  the 
corona  and  blanket  as  each  comes  over,  and  assists  in  adjusting 
them  in  place. 


f   UNIVERSITY   I 

^MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


49 


50 


MANUAL  OP   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF    PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  51 

To  place  the  aparejo  on  the  animal,  stand  in  front  of  aparejo  and 
take  hold  near  its  center,  in  rear,  with  right  hand ;  place  the  palm  of 
the  left  hand  against  the  front  of  the  belly  piece  of  the  "off"  side 
of  aparejo,  fingers  downward  and  near  to  the  boot  of  aparejo. 

Now  lean  the  aparejo  well  toward  the  body ,% thus  raising  the  "off" 
side  of  the  aparejo  well  off  the  ground,  then,  both  hands  assisting, 
raise  and  swing  the  aparejo  over  animal.  Allow  it  to  rest  on  animal's 
back  slightly  in  rear  of  its  proper  position. 

In  the  operation  do  not  slap  the  aparejo  on  the  animal's  back,  as 
the  animal  may  jump  from  under. 


HOW    TO    TURN    THE    CRUPPER. 

packer  takes  hold  with  left  hand  on  lower 
edge  of  crupper,  fingers  under,  the  right  palm  down,  near  the  dock; 
the  "off"  packer  takes  hold  similarly,  hands  reversed;  both  raise 
crupper  well  up,  press  forward  with  palms,  bringing  edge  of  crupper 
toward  them  writh  the  hand,  and  crupper  is  turned. 
The  quicker  the  action  the  easier  turned. 

HOW   TO    CINCH   AN   APAREJO. 

SEC.  23.  When  crupper  is  turned,  the  "off"  packer,  with  right 
hand,  holds  the  upper  edge  of  crupper  well  up  and  out  from  the 
animal's  buttocks,  and  with  left  hana  passes  the  tail  up  between  the 
crupper  and  the  mule's  hips,  and  receives  it  with  right  hand;  holds 
tail  well  up  on  animal's  hips;  presses  crupper  down  under  dock  with 
left  hand,  and  lets  go  of  tail;  raises  tail  partly  with  left  hand  and 
places  dock  of  crupper  well  under  animal's  tail. 

He  then  places  his  left  breast  against  crupper  to  hold  it  in  place; 
frees  the  animal's  tail,  observing  that  no  hair  rests  on  dock;  places 
the  palm  of  left  hand  on  center  of  aparejo,  the  right  hand  on  corner 
of  boot,  and  pushes  the  aparejo  forward  to  its  place;  steps  to  animal's 
shoulder,  faces  to  rear,  and  places  right  hand  on  collar  of  aparejo. 

While  the  "off"  packer  is  thus  engaged,  the  "near"  packer  draws 
the  upper  fold  of  cincha  quickly  toward  him ;  allows  the  other  end  to 
pass  over  to  "off"  packer,  guiding  it  to  center  of  aparejo  at  top  with 
left  hand;  retaining  the  leather  facing  of  cincha  on  the  near  side 
of  the  aparejo;  grasps  latigo  well  down  with  right  hand  and  calls 
out  "Cinch!" 

At  the  word  "cinch"  the  "off"  packer  passes  the  end  of  cincha 
well  under  with  palm  of  left  hand,  holding  it  in  position  until  he 
feels  it  has  been  received  by  the  near  packer;  he  observes  that  cincha 
is  over  the  center  of  boot  of  aparejo,  places  left  hand  on  rear  corner 
of  boot  and  holds  the  aparejo  forward  to  its  place.  Do  not  raise  the 
aparejo  in  front. 

The  "near"  packer  takes  hold  of  cincha  with  left  hand  on  corner 
(never  at  its  center  or  eye,  as  the  hand  will  thus  interfere),  passes 
the  double  of  latigo  through  eye  of  cincha  from  above,  brings  it  up 
in  front  and  passes  it  through  rendering  ring  from  above,  grasps 
the  double  of  latigo  with  left  hand  well  under,  and  with  the  right 
hand  passes  the  end  through  eye  of  cincha  in  rear  of  the  other  part, 
places  the  palm  of  left  hand  against  the  front  corner  of  boot  as  a 


52 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


53 


54  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

brace  and  pulls  taut  with  right  hand.  (This  is  termed  a  "primary 
cinch/') 

Holding  latigo  in  right  hand,  he  takes  hold  of  rear  corner  of  boot, 
the  left  holding  front,  brings  aparejo  well  forward  to  place,  and  calls 
out  "Cinch!" 

At  this  signal  the  "off"  packer  passing  in  rear  observes  that  the 
aparejo  is  straight  on  the  animal,  takes  hold  of  latigo  in  between  the 
near  packer  and  the  mule,  the  palm  of  right  hand  up  and  of  the  left 
down,  and  places  right  knee  on  boot  of  aparejo. 

The  near  packer  holds  latigo  far  enough  back  to  permit  him  to 
raise  his  left  foot  to  boot  of  aparejo,  his  left  hand  in  front  of  his  right, 
both  palms  up.  The  two  packers  then  pull  together,  reach  forward, 
taking  a  second  and  similar  pull,  and,  if  necessary,  an  additional  pull 
to  bring  the  eye  or  hole  of  cincha  to  edge  of  boot. 

The  cincha  must  be  in  center  both  at  top  and  at  boots  of  aparejo. 

The  "off"  packer,  holding  slack  of  latigo  with  right  hand,  takes 
hold  with  the  left  below  the  right,  palm  down,  the  thumb  grasping 
latigo  underneath.  He  brings  the  latigo  up,  resting  the  butt  of  palm 
of  left  hand  near  top  of  aparejo,  the  fingers  gripping  the  top  thereof; 
with  the  right  hand  passes  ihe  end  of  latigo  from  above  through 
finger  loop  and  receives  it  with  the  two  first  fingers  of  the  left  hand ; 
holds  slack  below  left  with  right  hand  and  pulls  the  end  with  left, 
taking  slack  well  in.  The  latigo  being  drawn  taut  by  this  action, 
the  end  is  engaged  between  the  standing  part  of  the  latigo  and  the 
top  of  the  aparejo  and  is  thus  caught  in  place.  (See  figs.  10,  11.) 

FORMING  THE  LOAD  PREPARATORY  TO  LOADING  THE  MULE. 

SEC.  24.  Take  a  coiled  lash  rope  and  unwrap  cincha  (sec.  11); 
hold  coils  and  cincha  at  point  of  lacing  in  left  hand;  release  as  many 
coils  of  rope  as  will  leave,  say,  from  10  to  15  feet  extended.  Swing 
the  coils  held  in  left  hand  toward  the  right  and  place  on  the  ground, 
cincha  underneath. 

Now  take  the  side  packs,  which  make  up  a  load,  and  place  them 
lengthwise  on  lash  rope,  the  heavier  pack  underneath.  Take  a  coiled 
sling  rope,  unwrap  and  place  crosswise  on  load.  Then  pick  up  the 
end  of  lash  rope,  extended  on  ground,  coil  and  place  on  load. 

In  preparation  for  loading  the  mules  the  cargo  is  thus  formed  in 
separate  loads  according  to  the  number  of  mules  available.  (See 
fig.  109.) 

SLINGING  THE  LOAD HOW  TO  PLACE  THE  SLING  ROPE  ON  THE  APAREJO. 

SEC.  25.  Take  hold  of  the  sling  rope,  about  5  feet  from  one  end, 
with  the  left  hand,  the  two  last  fingers  gripping  the  rope;  with  the 
right  form  as  many  coils  as  may  be  necessary,  according  to  the  size 
of  the  load,  and  receive  the  coils  between  the  thumb  and  two  first 
fingers  of  the  left  hand,  at  the  same  time  retaining  the  grip  on  the 
rope  beyond  the  coils  with  the  two  last  fingers  of  the  right  hand. 
Now  receive  the  coils  from  the  left  hand,  between  the  thumb  and  two 
first  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and,  retaining  the  grip  on  the  free 
ends  of  the  rope  by  the  two  last  fingers  of  each  hand,  throw  the  coils 
over  the  aparejo  to  the  off  side,  separating  the  ropes  at  the  same 
time,  as  the  length  of  the  packs  may  determine.  A  loop  of  the  rope 


MANUAL   OF    PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  55 

is  thus  made  to  hang  down  on  the  "off"  side  of  the  aparejo,  while 
the  two  ends  called,  respectively,  the  "front"  and  "rear"  ropes, 
hang  down  on  the  near  side.  (See  fig.  11.) 

If,  due  to  the  size  of  the  load,  it  is  necessary  to  lengthen  or  shorten 
the  loop  on  the  "off"  side,  do  so  by  taking  or  giving  slack  on  the  rear 
rope,  never  on  the  front  rope;  the  latter  should  be  allowed  to  hang 
nearly  to  the  ground. 

HOW   TO   LIFT    SIDE    PACKS   AND   PLACE   THEM   ON   THE    APAREJO. 

SEC.  26.  The  "off"  packer  stands  facing  the  sides  of  the  packs; 
takes  hold  of  the  uppermost  pack  at  each  end,  hands  well  under,  and 
raises  it  to  his  knees ;  raises  it  from  knees  quickly  to  breast  and  car- 
ries it  to  "off"  side.  If  heavy,  incline  the  body  forward  and  raise 
quickly,  throwing  the  head  and  shoulders  back.  Rest  lower  edge  of 
pack  on  aparejo  and  allow  flat  side  of  pack  to  come  down  on  aparejo. 

The  upper  edge  should  ride  flush  with  the  center  or  top  of  aparejo. 

The  "near"  packer  lifts  in  similar  manner  and  places  his  pack  so 
as  to  lap  about  four  inches  on  top  of  "off"  pack.  Weight  of  packs 
being  equal,  this  will  permit  the  "near"  pack,  after  "braking,"  to 
ride  level  with  the  "off"  pack. 

HOW   TO    SLING   THE    LOAD    AND   TIE   THE    SQUARE    KNOT. 

SEC.  27.  The  "off"  packer,  standing  somewhat  away  from  the  mule, 
as  a  brace,  supports  his  pack  in  place  with  left  hand,  palm  against  the 
center  of  the  pack  and  slightly  underneath  it,  so  as  to  balance  the 
weight  of  the  pack. 

With  the  right  he  picks  up  the  front  and  then  the  rear  parts  of  the 
loop  of  the  sling  rope  and  brings  them  up  to  center,  the  left  hand  re- 
ceiving them  between  thumb  and  forefinger  and  holding  them  taut 
against  the  pack. 

He  then  passes  the  loop  of  the  rope  over  his  right  shoulder,  and 
when  "near"  packer  calls  out  "Rope,"  he  throws  the  loop  lightly 
over  with  his  right  hand.  If  thrown  hard  it  will  bound  back. 
Should  there  not  be  sufficient  rope  to  pass  to  "near"  packer,  he  pulls 
on  the  rear  rope  sufficiently  to  do  so. 

The  "near"  packer  takes  a  similar  position  to  that  above  described 
for  the  "off"  packer  and  supports  his  pack  with  the  left  hand  in  the 
same  manner.  With  the  right  hand  he  picks  up  the  front  rope  and 
brings  it  to  the  center  of  the  pack,  the  left  receiving  it  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  and  holds  it  taut  against  the  pack. 

Now  take  the  end  of  this  rope  in  the  right  hand,  call  out  "Rope," 
to  "off"  packer,  and  quickly  place  the  rope  on  top  of  the  loop  as  it 
comes  over.  Pass  the  end  through  the  loop  from  above  and  draw 
down  taut,  letting  the  right  hand  slip  down  on  rope  to  near  the  edge 
of  pack. 

The  load  is  now  held  in  place  by  the  rope  as  though  caught  in  a 
bight.  The  loop  of  the  sling  rope  should  never  be  placed  above  or 
below  the  swell  of  the  pack,  as  the  rope  then  loses  its  retaining  hold 
on  load.  This  does  not  apply  to  box  loads. 

Now  place  the  left-hand  edge  of  palm  resting  on  top  of  rope  below 
its  engagement  on  the  swell  of  pack,  raise  the  rope  with  the  right 
hand  so  as  to  give  opportunity  for  the  last  two  fingers  of  the  left 


56 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


V 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


57 


58  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

hand  to  grip  it,  and  keep  the  rope  compressed  against  the  palm,  the 
free  end  hanging  down. 

Now  reach  down  with  right  hand  and  pick  up  the  rear  rope,  bring- 
ing it  up  snug  against  pack  in  rear  of  the  front  rope.  Receive  it 
between  the  points  of  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  or  the  left  hand, 
allowing  the  free  end,  or  portion,  to  hang  to  rear — never  allow  this 
portion  to  cross  over  the  front  rope,  to  avoid  confusing  them.  You 
will  learn  this. 

The  fingers  of  the  left  hand  now  hold  the  front  and  rear  ropes,  the 
free  ends  of  each  rope  hanging  down. 

Now  take  the  front  rope  in  the  right  hand,  pass  it  over  and  under 
the  rear  rope  from  right  to  left,  and  pull  taut,  allowing  the  last  two 
fingers  of  the  left  hand  to  escape  from  under  the  rope  as  it  comes 
down  taut,  and  allow  them  to  fall  in  front  of  the  rear  rope  (not  in 
rear  or  behind  it). 

Now,  again,  bring  the  " front"  rope  over  the  outer  or  free  end  of 
"rear"  rope  from  right  to  left  and  up  toward  the  thumb  of  the  left 
hand,  receive  the  rope  by  allowing  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand  to  fall 
down  on  the  crown  or  loop  of  the  front  rope  formed  by  this  operation, 
and  bring  the  thumb-holding  rope  toward  the  palm  of  the  hand,  and 
hold  it  there. 

Now  take  or  grip  the  "rear"  rope,  and  pull  down  taut,  and  the 
square  knot  is  tied.  (K,  fig.  14;  see  also  fig.  63.) 

Coil  up  the  extra  rope,  pass  the  coils  from  rear  to  front  between  the 
rope  and  the  top  of  the  pack,  and  draw  snug. 

(The  parts  of  the  sling  rope  are  designated  as  "  s"  in  figs.  13  and  14). 

NOTE. — In  forming  a  granny  knot  in  distinction  from  the  square 
knot  the  loop  at  top  and  bottom  divides  the  running  ropes.  In  the 
thief  knot  in  distinction  from  the  square  knot  one  end  of  the  rope  is 
on  the  left  and  the  opposite  end  on  the  right,  whereas  in  the  square 
knot  both  ends  are  on  the  right.  (See  figs.  63,  64,  65.) 

HOW  TO  "BRAKE"  A  SIDE  PACK. 

SEC.  28.  The  "off"  packer  does  not  "brake"  his  pack;  if  put  up 
properly  it  is  already  in  position.  The  "near"  packer  "brakes"  the 

The  "near"  packer,  the  square  knot  being  tied,  calls  "Hold," 
indicating  that  the  "off"  packer  must  hold  his  pack  in  position.  To 
do  so,  he  will  place  a  hand  on  each  corner  of  pack,  stand  well  out,  and 
brace  against  load. 

The  "near"  packer  places  a  hand  on  each  lower  corner  of  pack, 
raises  the  lower  edge  well  out  and  up,  causing  the  front  edge  to  work 
down  and  in,  even  with  the  off  pack.  If  found  difficult,  when  the 
pack  is  well  up  alternate  the  hands  down  and  up  until  the  pack  is 
flush  with  off  pack;  then  allow  or  cause  it  to  settle  on  aparejo. 

"Near"  pack  having  been  lapped  four  inches,  packs  of  equal 
weight  should  "brake"  flush.  When  the  weight  of  the  two  packs 
varies,  lap  accordingly,  and  brake  until  rope  becomes  taut,  and  settle. 
Do  not  try  to  brake  a  box  load,  as  it  will  stand  out  from  aparejo; 
"hold  "and  settle. 

Always  remember  the  more  equal  the  weights  of  the  two  packs  the 
less  trouble  they  are  when  traveling,  and  the  closer  they  are  slung 
together  the  better  they  will  ride. 


UNIVERSITY  \ 

& 


MANUAL  OF   PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


59 


60  MANUAL,  OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

HOW   TO   DOUBLE    SLING    SIDE    PACKS    WHEN    LENGTH    OF   PACKS 

REQUIRES   IT. 

SEC.  29.  Place  the  sling  rope  on  the  aparejo,  with  the  loop  on  the 
"off"  side,  leaving  only  enough  of  the  ends  on  the  "near  side  to 
tie  with.  The  packs  being  in  place,  the  off  packer  proceeds  and 
passes  loop  to  near  packer,  as  in  single  slinging,  separating  ropes  as 
much  as  possible. 

The  "near"  packer  supports  his  pack  with  left  arm,  and  grasps 
the  rear  part  of  the  loop  on  top  of  pack  with  left  hand,  with  right 
reaches  down,  picks  up  the  rear  rope  on  aparejo,  and  ties  the  two  ropes 
together  by  a  square  knot,  getting  the  packs  well  together  in  doing  so; 
then  throws  the  front  of  pack  well  up,  to  come  even  with  rear  end, 
picks  up  ropes  in  similar  manner  as  at  rear,  and  ties  square  knot. 
"Brake"  and  settle  packs  in  usual  manner. 

HOW  TO  CROSS   SLING   SIDE   PACKS   WHEN  TOP  PACKS   ARE  NECESSARY. 


.  30.  The  "near"  packer  takes  a  sling  rope  by  its  middle  and 
passes  the  ends  over  to  "off"  side,  retaining  sufficient  of  the  loop  so 
that  when  "off"  pack  is  in  place  the  loop  can  be  passed  up  to  its 
upper  edge. 

The  "off"  packer  then  puts  his  pack  in  position  and  supports  the 
pack  with  his  left  hand,  at  center  of  pack.  With  the  right  hand  he 
picks  up  the  front  and  rear  rope  and  brings  them  up  to  center  of  pack; 
receives  them  in  left  between  thumb  and  forefinger,  ropes  pressed 
taut  against  side  of  pack. 

With  right  hand  he  coils  the  ropes  hanging  down,  coiling  on  left 
thumb,  and  throws  coils  over  center  of  pack  to  "near"  side.  He  then 
separates  the  front  and  rear  ropes.  The  right  hand  now  supports  the 
pack,  and  the  left  receives  the  loop  when  passed  up  by  "near"  packer. 

The  "near"  packer,  after  the  off  pack  is  in  position  and  the  ends  of 
ropes  have  been  thrown  over,  passes  the  loop  to  the  "off"  packer; 
he  then  separates  the  ropes  on  "near"  side.  Placing  "near"  pack 
on,  he  calls  out  "Rope,  and  proceeds  to  tie  as  in  single  slinging. 
(Sec.  27.) 

The  top  pack  is  now  put  in  place  between  the  two  side  packs  and 
above  the  sling  rope.a 

Just  before  tying  the  sling  rope  it  is  sometimes  foun,d  necessary 
to  get  packs  closer  together.  In  such  a  case  the  "off"  packer  takes 
hold  of  the  rear  rope  and  pulls  toward  him  from  below,  the  "near" 
packer  giving  slack  on  front  rope,  as  held  in  bight  of  sling,  and  pulling 
down  on  rear  rope  to  take  in  the  slack  as  rendered  by  the  "off"  packer. 
When  enough  has  been  taken  the  "near"  packer  calls  out  "Good." 

If  the  "near"  packer  desires  more  rope  to  enable  him  to  tie,  the 
"off"  packer  will  pull  on  the  rear  rope  from  above  with  the  left  hand 
until  the  "near"  packer  takes  slack  by  drawing  on  the  front  rope, 
thus  pulling  the  bight  or  loop  of  the  sling  farther  over  to  his  side. 

If  packs  are  high  the  "on"  packer  passes  sling  to  rear  with  left 
hand,  the  "near"  packer  reaching  from  behind  to  receive  it. 

In  passing  loop  to  "near"  packer  over  load,  or  from  behind,  it  is 
well  for  the  "off  packer  to  hold  the  loop  with  the  thumb,  the  fingers 
extended,  as  he  can  thus  more  readily  indicate  position  of  rope  to 

a  In  the  operation  the  side  packs  should  be  carried  high  enough  to  support  the 
weight  of  the  top  pack  to  bind  the  load. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


61 


"near"  packer.  Always  place  the  packs  lengthwise.  Top  packs 
should  never  be  carried  when  possible  to  avoid  them.  They  cause 
delay  and  are  troublesome. 

HOW   TO   DOUBLE    CROSS    SLING    SIDE    PACKS    WHEN   LENGTH   OF   PACKS 

REQUIRES    IT. 

SEC.  31.  The  near  packer  takes  a  sling  rope  by  its  middle  and 
passes  the  ends  over  to  the  "off"  side  in  similar  manner  as  in  single 
cross  sling  with  the  exception  that  the  rope  is  evenly  divided — that  is, 
by  retaining  as  much  of  the  loop  on  the  near  side  as  the  ends  indicate 
on  the  "off"  side;  proceeds  and  ties  as  in  double  slinging,  i.  e.,  at 
rear  and  front. 

LASHING    THE    LOAD HOW    TO    FORM    THE    DIAMOND   HITCH. 

SEC.  32.  In  the  formation  of  the  diamond  hitch  and  tightening  of 
the  load,  two  packers  are  employed.  One,  termed  the  "near"  packer, 


FIG.  13. 

stands  on  the  "near"  side  of  the  animal,  looking  toward  rear;  his 
mate,  termed  the  "off"  packer,  stands  on  the  "off"  side,  facing  toward 
the  front.  The  side  packs  being  slung  on  the  animal  (sees.  26-27-28) 
the  "near"  packer  throws  the  end  of  the  lash  rope  in  rear  of  animal, 
and  the  cincha  portion  under  the  animal's  belly,  convenient  to  the 
"off"  packer,  who  picks  them  up  and  holds  them  in  the  left  hand, 
as  indicated  in  fig.  19,  and  stands  erect. 

(1)  The  near  packer  now  picks  up  the  rope,  about  5  or  6  feet  from 
cincha,  and  holding  about  2  feet  of  rope  between  the  hands,  stands 
close  to  the  animal's  neck ;  now  with  both  hands  extended  downward, 
he  draws  the  right  hand  backward,  to  give  impetus  to  the  motion, 
and  with  one  motion  he  swings  the  rope  fore  and  aft  between  the  side 
packs,  clearing  the  animal's  haunch  in  the  action,  allowing  the  rope 
held  by  the  left  hand  to  drop.  (See  fig.  13.) 


62 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


Now,  holding  on  to  the  rope  held  in  the  right  hand,  he  draws  on  the 
running  portion  between  the  packs,  bringing  the  right  hand  down  by 
the  side,  arm's  length,  and  reaches  up  with  the  left  hand  and  grip's 
the  rope,  so  as  to  have  the  back  of  the  hand  upward.  This  brings  the 
thumb  under  the  rope  (do  not  get  the  fingers  under).  He  then  draws 
on  the  running  portion  between  the  packs,  in  similar  manner  as  done 
by  the  right  hand,  bringing  the  left  hand  down  by  the  side,  arm's 
length;  do  not  let  go  of  the  rope  held  in  each  hand. 

Now,  with  an  outward  and  circular  motion,  bring  the  left  hand 
holding  the  rope  to  the  elbow  of  the  right  arm — this  leaves  the  rope, 
or  loop,  on  the  outside  of  the  right  arm — and  raise  both  hands  to 
the  position  as  seen  in  fig.  14. 

Next  bring  the  right  hand  to  the  center  of  the  pack,  and  with  one 
motion,  both  hands  assisting,  throw  the  " standing"  rope,  held  in  the 


FIG.  14. 

right  hand,  over  the  center  of  the  load,  to  the  "off  "  packer;  the  " run- 
ning" rope,  held  in  the  lefthand,  over  the  mule'sneck. a  (In  this  action 
the  back  of  the  left  hand  rests  on  the  mule's  neck  as  seen  in  fig.  15.) 
Now,  draw  sufficient  slack  on  the  "running"  portion  between  the 
packs,  about  6  or  more  feet,  to  form  the  rear  half  of  the  diamond, 
and  throw  this  rope  to  the  rear  of  the  "near"  pack,  allowing  the 
rope  to  go  free  from  the  hands.  (This  rope  now  becomes  the  '  'rear " 
rope.)  Next  take  hold  of  the  running  rope  on  the  mule's  neck,  the 
left  hand  forward  of  the  right,  and  with  the  assistance  of  the  "off " 
packer,  bring  this  running  rope  to  the  center  of  the  load  (fig.  16),  by 

«The  separating  of  the  standing  from  the  running  rope  is  done  purposely,  to  avoid 
confusing  the  "  off  "  packer;  both  ropes  should  never  be  thrown  together.  Further, 
when  throwing  the  standing  rope  over  the  load,  do  not  give  the  rope  a  wild  outward 
and  circular  swing,  else  the  standing  portion  below  the  hand  will  become  engaged 
around  the  rear  corner  of  the  aparejo  and  cause  delay,  with  perhaps  a  strenuous 
expression  from  the  "  off "  packer. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


63 


64 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


I   UNIVERSITY 

NL/ 


OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


65 


24758—10 5 


66 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


the  side  of  the  standing  rope;  both  packers  should  perform  this 
action  together,  never  singly;  it  causes  confusion  and  delay. 

The  right  hand  now  slips  down  the  rope  to  a  point  about  midway 
between  the  pack  and  the  "boot;"  reach  for  this  rope  by  passing 
the  left  hand  between  the  standing  rope  and  the  aparejo,  and  grip  the 
rope  above  the  right  hand;  now,  both  hands  assisting,  slip  down 
the  rope  and  parting  from  each  other,  on  each  side  of  the  standing 
rope,  hold  the  rope  in  a  horizontal  position,  with  a  space  of  about 
10  inches  between  each  hand;  jam  this  portion  down  between  the  two 
cinchas  under  the  aparejo,  and  the  hitch  is  "formed"  on  the  "near 
side,"  ready  to  tighten.  (See  figs.  17  and  18.) 


FIG.  18. 

To  avoid  confusion,  I  have  explained  the  formation  of  the  hitch  by 
"near"  packer,  in  the  first  instance,  as  is  customary  in  the  practice 
of  instruction.  Now,  we  will  take  up  that  portion  in  the  formation 
of  the  hitch  devolving  on  the  "off"  packer. 

(2)  The  off  packer,  having  picked  up  the  end  of  the  rope  and 
cincha,  holds  them  in  left  hand,  mouth  of  hook  to  the  front,  stands 
erect  and  waits  for  the  standing  rope  to  be  thrown  over  the  center  of 
the  load.  (Fig.  19.)  As  the  rope  comes  over  he  grips  it  as  high  as 
the  arm  will  conveniently  reach  (fig.  20)  and  immediately  places  the 
cincha  hook  in  position  under  the  aparejo,  about  6  or  8  inches,  and 
draws  down  the  slack  on  the  standing  rope,  by  one  or  two  quick  pulls, 
and  lowering  the  hook  for  convenience,  he  engages  the  standing  rope 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


67 


68 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  69 

on  the  hook  from  in,  out;  or  from  above,  down.  This  leaves  the 
standing  rope  next  to  the  aparejo  and  the  running  rope  on  the  outside 
of  the  hook.  (Fig.  21.) 

(After  engaging  the  rope,  do  not  hold  the  rope  taut  on  hook.) 

Now,  place  the  left  hand,  holding  the  end  of  the  rope  on  top  of  the 
running  rope,  between  the  right  hand  and  hook,  and  grip  both  ropes, 
the  thumb  under  the  running  rope;  now  allow  the  right  hand  to  slip 
upward  on  the  running  rope,  and  with  the  assistance  of  the  "near 
packer,  bring  this  rope  to  the  center  of  the  load.  (Fig.  22.)  In  this 
operation  the  left  hand  will  immediately  follow  the  right  to  the  center 
01  the  load;  this  will  bring  both  hands  together.  (Fig.  23.) 

Now,  with  the  right  hand  draw  the  end  of  the  rope  forward,  held 
by  the  left  hand,  so  that  about  12  inches  will  fall  on  the  "near"  side 
of  the  animal's  neck  and  the  hitch  is  formed  on  the  "off  "  side,  ready 
to  tighten  the  load.  (Fig.  18  for  the  "near"  side  and  fig.  24  for  the 
"off"  side.) 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  hitch  is  now  laid  ready  to  tighten.  This 
tightening  is  a  progressive  action,  beginning  on  the  near  side  and 
going  by  the  rear  all  around  the  animal,  assisted  greatly  by  the  taking 
of  the  ropes  out  of  their  line  of  direction. 

(3)  The  near  packer,  to  tighten  the  load,  places  the  left  hand,  palm 
down,  on  the  side  and  center  of  pack;  with  the  right  hand  he  grips 
the  running  rope  in  the  rear  of  the  standing  rope  on  the  side  of  the 
pack  (fig.  25)  and  brings  it  between  the  thumb  and  index  finger  of  the 
left  hand;  now  bearing  against  the  pack  with  the  left  hand  as  a  brace, 
he  holds  the  running  rope  taut  and  calls  out  "Go!"  indicating  he  is 
ready  to  receive  the  slack  from  the  "off"  packer. 

(4)  The  off  packer,  at  the  word  "Go,"  takes  hold  of  the  running 
rope  as  near  the  hook  as  possible,  and  placing  the  left  knee  against 
the  end  of  boot  of  the  aparejo  as  a  brace,  he  pulls  all  the  slack  pos- 
sible by  bending  the  body  well  over,  as  seen  in  fig.  26,  and  gives  this 
slack  to  the  "near"  packer  quickly,  in  such  manner  as  if  trying  to 
hit  the  aparejo  with  both  fists;  do  not  let  go  of  the  rope.     Now  take 
a  second  and  similar  pull  and  call  "Tie,"  indicating  no  more  slack 
can  be  taken  on  the  standing  rope ;  then  step  quickly  to  the  rear  and 
throw  the  "end"  rope  forward  of  the  pack  (this  rope  now  becomes 
the  "front  rope")  and  grasp  the  rear  rope  between  the  packs,  ready 
to  receive  the  slack  from  the  near  packer. 

(5)  The  near  packer,  at  the  call  "Tie,"   brings  the  right  hand 
holding  the  slack  down  toward  the  aparejo  in  the  rear  of  the  stand- 
ing rope;   the  left  hand  receives  this  rope  and  slack  by  bringing  the 
hand  under  the  standing  rope,  gripping  the  rope  above  the  right 
hand,  so  as  not  to  loosen  the  slack,  and  brings  it  forward.     Now,  with 
both  hands,  jam  the  roj>e  upward,  between  the  standing  rope  and 
pack;   the  running  rope  is  thus  held  firmly,  as  if  caught  in  a  bight. 
In  this  operation  pull  the  rope  quickly  toward  the  breast.     (Fig.  27.) 

Now  bring  the  free  portion  of  the  running  rope  below  the  bight, 
around  the  front  boot  of  aparejo  with  the  left  hand,  and  step  to  rear 
of  aparejo  and  with  the  right  hand  grasp  the  rope  in  rear  of  the 
cincha  and  receive  the  slack  from  the  left  nand ;  now  bring  this  rope 
up  in  the  rear  of  the  boot  and  place  the  left  hand  below  the  right, 
both  hands  bringing  the  rope  up  quickly  to  the  upper  corner  of  side 
pack,  and  hold  the  slack  taut,  the  palm  of  the  left  hand  compressed 
against  the  pack,  the  right  hand  indicating  how  much  slack  has  to  be 


70 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


71 


72 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


73 


taken  in  by  the  "off "  packer  (fig.  28)  who  then  receives  it,  hand  over 
hand,  quckly,  and  prepares  to  pull  on  the  rope.  To  do  so  take  hold 
of  this  rope,  termed  the  "rear"  rope,  with  both  hands,  and  pull  the 
rope  taut  (fig.  29);  do  not  let  go  or  this  rope  until  you  see  the  body 
of  the  "off"  packer  "setting"  on  the  rope,  then  let  go  of  the  rope 
quickly;  learn  to  turn  the  rope  loose  at  the  proper  time;  the  difference 
will  be  noted.  Now  step  forward  of  the  load  and  face  to  the  rear, 
and  grasp  the  end  of  rope,  and  wait  for  slack  from  the  "off"  packer. 
(Fig.  30.) 

(6)  The  off  packer  having  taken  in  the  slack  from  the  "near" 
packer,  hand  over  hand,  takes  a  wrap  of  the  rope  around  either  hand, 
and  leans  the  body  forward,  toward  the  animal's  haunch,  takes  a 
forward  step  with  the  right  foot  and  in  line  with  the  animal's  body, 


FIG.  24. 


never  outward,  and  sets  back  on  the  rope  with  all  his  weight.  (Figs. 
31-32.)  He  now  holds  the  slack  with  the  left  hand,  and  with  the 
right  brings  the  free  or  running  portion  under  and  around  the  boot 
of  the  aparejo  to  the  front;  steps  forward  and  faces  toward  rear;  now 
grips  the  rope  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right,  and  brings  both 
hands  quickly  to  the  upper  corner  of  pack,  the  left  holding  the  rope 
compressed  against  the  pack,  the  right  indicating  how  much  slack 
has  to  be  taken  by  the  "near"  packer.  (Figs.  33-34.)  This  is 
termed  the  "front"  rope. 

(7)  The  near  packer  having  gripped  the  end  of  the  rope  (fig.  30) 
proceeds  to  take  in  slack,  hand  over  hand,  until  he  has  about  6  or  8 
feet;  this  portion,  or  end  of  rope  is  thrown  over  the  center  of  the 
load  to  the  "off"  packer;  he  then  continues  to  take  in  the  remainder 


74 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


75 


of  the  slack.  Now,  likewise,  he  takes  a  wrap  of  the  rope  around 
either  hand  and  leans  the  body  forward  toward  the  load  (ng.  35)  and 
"sets"  back  on  the  rope  (fig.  36),  giving  the  slack  in  similar  manner 
as  described  for  the  "off"  packer;  the  "near"  packer  now  holding  the 
slack  with  the  left  hand  brings  the  free  or  running  portion  with  the 
right  hand  under  and  around  the  boot  of  the  aparejo  and  partly 
toward  the  center  of  the  load,  and  calls  out,  "Rope."  (Fig.  37.) 

(8)  The  off  packer,  having  given  the  slack  to  the  "near"  packer, 
steps  to  the  center  of  the  load  and  grasps  the  end  of  the  rope,  and 
at  the  call  "Rope,"  takes  in  all  slack,  hand  over  hand,  coiling  the 
rope  in  the  operation,  and  holds  coils  in  the  right  hand. 

At  the  call,  "Take  slack"  (fig.  38)  from  the  "near"  packer,  he 
places  the  left  hand  palm  down  against  center  of  pack,  as  a  brace, 


FIG.  26. 


and  receives  the  slack  from  the  "near"  packer.  (Fig.  39.)  He  now 
grasps  the  standing  portion  of  the  rope  above  the  coils  and  raises 
this  portion  high  enough  above  the  load  to  permit  placing  the  coils 
on  top  of  the  load;  in  this  action  swing  the  coils  from  rear  to  front 
and  bring  the  standing  portion  of  the  rope  down  on  top  of  the  coils, 
to  hold  them  there,  and  secure  the  end  of  the  rope;  to  do  so  take  a 
wrap  of  the  standing  portion  of  the  rope  from  right  to  left  between 
the  standing  and  running  ropes  and  pack;  holding  the  end  of  loop 
in  both  hands  jam  the  double  of  the  rope  well  up,  so  as  to  be  caught 
in  a  bight,  and  take  a  similar  turn  between  the  standing  and  running 
ropes  and  jam  this  portion  up  likewise,  and  the  load  is  tightened. 
(Figs.  40  and  41,  showing  completion  of  the  hitch.) 

NOTE. — The  act  of  tightening,  taking  the  standing  and  running 
ropes  out  of  their  line  or  direction,  forms  the  "diamond"  on  top  of 


76 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


77 


78 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


UAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


79 


80 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK  TRANSPORTATION.  81 


24758—10 6 


82 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


83 


84 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


85 


86 


MANUAL   OP  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


87 


88 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


89 


the  load;  hence  the  name  given  this  form  of  hitch.  In  its  formation 
a  single  knot  is  made,  and  when  undoing  the  hitch  the  end,  or  top 
rope,  when  freed,  is  pulled  or  drawn  from  between  the  standing  and 
running  ropes;  this  leaves  the  lash  rope  free  of  knot. 

In  the  formation  of  the  " diamond"  the  rope  has  six  designated 
names: 

On  the  "near"  side  we  have  the  standing,  running,  and  marking 
ropes,  and  the  front,  rear,  and  top  ropes. 

On  the  "off"  side  we  have  the  standing,  running,  front,  rear,  and 
top,  or  end  ropes. 

The  standing  rope  is  that  portion  encircling  the  mule  and  load  to 
point  of  engagement  on  hook.  (Figs.  40  and  41.) 

The  running  rope,  from  hook  going  back  over  center  of  load  to 
center  of  pack  on  the  "near"  side.  (Fig.  40,  to  R,  fig.  41.) 


FIG.  40. 


The  marking  rope,  from  the  center  of  side  pack  on  the  "near" 
side,  from  point  were  jammed  under  the  standing  rope  and  front 
corner  of  boot  of  aparejo.  (Fig.  41,  R  and  M.) 

The  front  rope  passes  over  the  front  corners  of  the  load;  the  rear 
rope,  in  similar  manner,  over  the  rear  corners;  in  both  cases,  on  each 
side,  the  rope  passes  under  and  around  the  boot.  These  ropes  are 
sometimes  referred  to  as  the  quarter  ropes.  (F  and  D,  fig.  40,  and 
DandF,  fig.  41.) 

The  top  rope,  from  the  rear  corner  of  the  boot  on  the  "near"  side, 
running  up  toward  and  across  the  center  of  the  load  (fig.  41)  to 
the  center  and  side  of  the  "off"  pack,  where  the  wrapping  of  rope 
indicates  completion  of  the  hitch.  (Fig.  40.) 

It  may  be  added,  there  are  various  methods  of  finishing  the  hitch, 
as  conditions  of  loading  may  suggest  to  the  experienced  packer. 


90 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


The  utop"  rope  may  be  used  as  a  marking  rope  by  bringing  the 
rope  to  rear  of  the  near  pack  instead  of  to  the  center,  to  indicate 
that  the  load  has  been  tightened,  in  lieu  of  the  marking  rope,  and 
by  many  packers  is  preferred  as  a  better  method  of  marking  the 
load. 

The  formation  of  the  " diamond"  hitch  and  tightening  of  the  load 
is  performed  in  from  twenty-five  to  thirty  seconds. 

The  operation  of  loading  a  pack  mule  (this  includes  putting  on  the 
aparejo)  is  performed  by  experts  in  from  forty-five  to  sixty  seconds.0 


,,1, 


FIG.  41. 


HOW  TO  FORM  THE  DOUBLE  DIAMOND. 

SEC.  33.  This  hitch  is  sometimes  used  when  employ  ing  top  packs 
or  top  loads,  kegs  and  barrels  excepted;  for  these  latter  the  "double 
hitch"  is  employed. 

The  near  packer  takes  a  lash  rope  and  uncoils  about  15  feet  of 
the  free  end,  and  passes  it  over  the  animaPs  haunch  to  the  "off" 
packer,  who  in  turn  passes  the  rope  between  the  top  and  side  pack 
and  allows  the  end  to  fall  over  the  animal's  neck  to  ground. 

a  As  an  aid  to  learn  how  to  form  the  diamond  and  other  hitches,  a  wooden  horse, 
such  as  used  by  "carpenters"  may  be  provided. 

It  should  stand  4  feet  high,  the  center  or  ridge  pole  to  be  6  feet  long,  the  legs  to  be 
spaced  9  inches  on  each  side,  from  center  of  ridgepole,  so  as  to  have  18  inches  spread 
on  each  side.  Bevel  the  upper  ends  of  legs  adjoining  ridgepole  so  that  their  extremi- 
ties will  stand  on  the  ground  about  2  feet  apart.  As  a  reenforce  supply  a  small  cleat 
of  wood  on  the  upper  and  outer  ends  of  legs  underneath  the  ridgepole. 

Now  place  the  corona,  blanket,  and  aparejo  on  this  wooden  horse,  turn  the  crupper 
and  cinch  the  aparejo  in  the  customary  manner;  place  the  sling  rope  on  the  aparejo 
and  proceed  to  put  on  .the  side  packs,  forming  the  load  as  described  in  sections  25 
to  38. 


MANUAL  OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  91 

The  near  packer,  in  similar  manner,  brings  the  rope  between  the 
top  and  side  pack;  in  both  cases  the  top  corners  of  each  "side"  pack 
retain  the  rope  in  position  during  the  formation  of  the  hitch. 

The  near  packer  will  then  hold  the  cincha  with  the  right  hand,  and 
allow  the  coils  held  in  left  hand  to  drop  to  ground. 

Now  throw  or  pass  the  cincha  to  the  "off"  packer,  under  the  ani- 
mal's belly,  and  form  a  loop,  and  pass  the  standing  rope  over  the 
load;  the  running  rope  over  the  animal's  neck,  as  in  forming  the 
single  "diamond,"  and,  after  the  "off"  packer  engages  the  standing 
rope  on  the  hook,  the  near  packer  throws,  or  passes,  all  rope  on 
ground  to  rear;  this  forms  the  rear  half  of  the  "diamond." 

Next,  with  the  assistance  of  the  "off"  packer,  bring  the  running 
rope  up  to  center  of  load,  and  pass  the  running  rope  from  rear  to 
front,  between  the  standing  rope  and  cincha,  as  in  forming  the  single 
"diamond."* 

Now  bring  the  end  of  rope  between  the  standing  and  running  ropes 
from  in,  out,  and  draw  3  or  4  feet  of  the  end  forward  and  a  '  'diamond  " 
is  formed  on  the  near  side.  (Fig.  42.) 

The  off  packer,  to  form  a  "diamond"  on  the  "off"  side,  takes  the 
end  rope,  as  resting  between  the  "top  and  side"  pack,  doubles  a  por- 
tion, forming  a  loop,  and  brings  this  loop  between  the  standing  and 
running  ropes  from  in,  out,  and  allows  the  loop  to  fall  down;  the 
loop  comes  under  the  boot  in  the  tightening  of  the  hitch,  separating 
the  rear  and  front  ropes,  thus  forming  a  "diamond"  on  the  "off" 
side.  (Fig.  43.) 

The  hitch  is  now  formed,  ready  to  tighten  the  load. 

In  tightening  the  hitch,  proceed  in  similar  manner  as  in  the  single 
"diamond,"  with  the  exception  that  the  rear  and  front  rope,  in  tight- 
ening, passes  along  the  face  of  each  end  of  top  pack,  to  retain  the  top 
pack  in  position.  This  formation  gives  a  "diamond"  on  each  side 
of  the  load;  hence  the  name,  "double  diamond."  (Fig.  44  for  near 
side  and  fig.  45  for  off  side.) 

HOW  TO  FORM  THE  DOUBLE  HITCH. 

SEC.  34.  This  form  of  hitch  should  never  be  used,  except  when 
packs  are  so  narrow  that  the  " diamond"  will  slip  over  them,  as  in  the 
case  of  kegs,  a  single  barrel,  coils  of  rope,  etc. 

The  double  hitch  is  made  as  described  for  the  single  diamond  hitch, 
with  the  two  following  exceptions: 

(1)  The  "near"  packer,  before  passing  the  running  rope  to  rear 
of  pack,  brings  the  running  rope  up,  from  the  animal's  neck,  and  lays 
it  on  the  center  of  the  load,  in  front  of  the  standing  rope.     He  then 
takes  sufficient  slack  on  the  running  rope  between  the  packs,  and  lays 
or  throws  it  to  rear  of  load,  thus  causing  it  to  ride  over  both  the  run- 
ning and  the  standing  ropes;  he  then  takes  the  rope  in  front  of  the 
standing  rope  and  brings  it  down  from  right  to  left  between  the 
standing  rope  and  pack  and  under  the  boot  of  the  aparejo  in  the  cus- 
tomary manner. 

(2)  The  "off"  packer,  instead  of  placing  the  end  of  rope  between 
the  standing  and  running  ropes,  places  it  under  both,  then  raises  to 
center  of  load,  and  drops  about  12  inches  of  end  on  "near"  side  of 
animal's  neck,  and  hitch  is  formed  ready  to  tighten. 

The  hitch  is  tightened  in  the  usual  manner  as  in  the  operation  of 
the  "diamond." 


92 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


93 


94 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


95 


96  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

HOW  TO   FORM  THE   DIAMOND  HITCH  WHEN   THE   CINCH  HOOK  IS   LOST 

OR  BROKEN. 

SEC.  35.  First,  the  near  packer  will  remove  cincha  from  lash  rope 
and  place  it  on  top  of  load;  then  throw  the  lash  rope  as  usual. 

The  off  packer  picks  up  the  end  of  lash  rope,  and,  as  the  standing 
rope  is  passed  to  him  by  the  "near"  packer,  ne  brings  the  end  of  the 
rope  from  rear  to  front  around  the  standing  rope;  holding  standing 
rope  in  loop  he  forms  a  bowline  knot  on  end  of  rope;  this  leaves  the 
standing  rope  in  loop  of  bowline  knot.  (See  fig.  80.)  Then  proceed 
with  the  diamond  hitch  in  the  usual  manner. 

To  take  the  lash  rope  off  undo  the  bowline  knot. 

HOW  ONE  PACKER  CAN  SLING  THE  LOAD  AND  FORM  THE  DIAMOND  HITCH. 

SEC.  36.  Take  the  lash  rope  and  grasp  it  with  both  hands,  about 
3  feet  apart,  anywhere  near  the  middle  of  rope;  bring  the  portion 
of  rope  between  the  hands  under  the  boot  of  the  aparejo,  and  bring 
the  hands  together  above  the  boot  of  the  aparejo  and  grasp  both 
ropes  with  left  hand. 

Now,  grasping  the  rear  rope  with  right  hand  forward  of  the  left, 
pass  a  loop  of  it  over  the  aparejo,  of  size  proportionate  to  the  size  of 
the  pack.  Lay  the  standing  part  as  close  to  the  rear  edge  of  the 
aparejo  as  length  of  pack  admits  and  rest  the  running  part  on  the 
animal's  hips.  Drop  the  rear  rope  from  left  hand;  then  grasp  the 
front  rope  with  right  hand  below  the  left  and  with  the  left  hand  pass 
the  rope  over  to  "off"  side  in  similar  manner  as  described  for  the 
rear  rope,  resting  the  outer  or  running  part  on  the  animal's  neck. 
Now  place  the  sling  rope  in  position  in  the  usual  way  (sec.  25) .  It 
should  lie  between  the  front  and  rear  parts  of  the  lash  rope. 

Take  up  the  "off"  pack  and,  from  the  "near"  side,  place  it  well 
up  toward  center  of  aparejo.  Place  the  left  hand  at  center  and  lower 
edge  of  pack  to  hold  it  in  place.  Take  the  rope  resting  on  the  ani- 
mal's hips  and  bring  the  loop  over  the  rear  end  of  pack,  letting  the 
right  hand  relieve  the  left  at  center  of  pack  and  with  the  left  bring 
the  front  loop  over  the  front  end  of  pack. 

Now  place  the  left  arm  with  elbow  supporting  the  pack;  grasp  the 
rear  rope  of  lash  rope  with  left  hand,  as  explained  in  double  slinging 
side  packs  (sec.  29).  Grasp  the  front  rope  with  the  right  hand, 
bring  it  under  the  boot  of  the  aparejo,  from  front  to  rear,  and  up  to 
the  left  hand.  Tie  the  two  ropes  by  a  square  knot,  as  before  de- 
scribed (sec.  27).  Then  work  the  pack  so  as  to  settle  it  to  off  side, 
giving  slack  at  square  knot,  if  necessary  to  get  it  settled  to  place. 

Pass  to  off  side  and  bring  the  sling  rope  over  the  center  of  pack, 
resting  the  loop  on  rear  corner  of  pack.  Return  to  near  side  and 
place  the  near  pack  in  position. 

Reach  for  the  loop  of  the  sling  rope  from  behind,  bring  it  over 
center  of  packs,  and  tie  the  square  knot  in  the  usual  manner  (sec. 
27) ;  then  brake  or  settle  pack  to  place. 

Untie  the  lash  rope  from  under  the  packs  and  proceed  with  the  dia- 
mond hitch  in  the  usual  manner,  passing  from  near  to  off  side,  as  re- 
quired, until  the  hitch  is  in  position  to  take  in  slack. 

Then  take  in  all  slack  possible  on  the  "off"  side,  and  to  hold  it 
bring  a  bight  of  the  running  rope  between  the  standing  rope  and  the 
pack,  so  as  to  make  it  bind. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  97 

Proceed  to  take  in  slack  in  the  usual  manner.  After  pulling  taut, 
as  shown  in  fig.  26,  bring  the  hands  toward  the  aparejo  quickly 
and  grasp  both  ropes,  i.  e.,  the  standing  as  well  as  the  running  rope, 
and,  holding  both  ropes  with  left  hand,  receive  the  slack  above  the 
bight,  as  caught  under  the  standing  rope.  Take  a  second  and  sim- 
ilar pull  and  receive  the  slack  above  the  bight  as  before  and  pass  to 
the  near  side.  Note. — Bringing  the  running  rope  between  the  stand- 
ing rope  and  the  pack  forms  a  holdfast  and  retains  the  slack  as  taken 
above  the  bight. 

Take  the  running  rope  from  under  the  standing  rope  on  "near" 
side,  should  it  be  there,  and  draw  in  all  slack.  Then  bring  the  run- 
ning rope  under  the  standing  rope  as  before.  (Fig.  27.) 

The  taking  of  slack  should  be  repeated  until  all  is  rendered.  In 
the  completion  of  the  hitch,  pass  from  near  to  off  side,  as  necessary, 
taking  up  all  the  slack  until  the  hitch  is  completed. 

HOW    TO    FORM    THE    POLE    HITCH. 

SEC.  37.  For  this  purpose  a  lash  rope  without  cincha,  or  two  sling 
or  lair  ropes  joined  together,  may  be  used  for  the  purpose. 

The  near  packer  takes  a  lash  rope  and  removes  cincha  and  passes 
one-half  of  rope  over  the  load  to  the  "off"  packer.  Each  packer 
takes  hold  of  rope  with  the  right  hand,  with  the  arm  extended 
downward,  raises  the  rope,  causing  it  to  rest  on  the  left  arm,  and 
reaches  for  the  standing  rope  at  pack  with  left  hand.  Now  bring 
the  right  hand,  holding  rope,  to  and  above  the  left  hand,  allow- 
ing the  free  end  to  drop  downward,  and  part  the  hands,  bringing  each 
rope  over  the  upper  corners  of  side  packs  and  the  loop  portion  under 
the  boots  of  the  aparejo. 

Pass  each  end  over  the  load  to  the  opposite  side,  the  "off"  packer 
bringing  his  end  under  the  standing  rope  at  center  of  pack,  waits 
for  the  word  "Go,"  and  the  hitch  is  formed,  ready  to  tighten.  (Figs. 
46-47.)  Also  figs.  72,  73,  74. 

The  near  packer,  to  tighten  the  load,  holds  the  end  of  rope  passed 
by  the  "off"  packer  over  the  load,  and  placing  the  left  hand  as  a 
brace  against  the  pack,  calls  out  "Go." 

The  off  packer  will  pull  the  slack  on  the  running  rope  in  the  usual 
manner  and  call  out  Tie." 

The  near  packer  brings  the  rope  under  the  bight  of  the  standing 
rope,  immediately  takes  hold  of  the  running  rope  at  center  of  boot, 
and  waits  for  the  call  of  "Go"  from  the  "off"  packer,  who  frees 
the  end  of  rope  from  under  the  jight  and  proceeds  to  take  in  slack 
in  similar  manner,  each  packer  securing  the  end  of  rope  as  in  comple- 
tion of  the  "diamond"  hitch  or  as  convenience  may  dictate.  (Figs. 
48-49.) 

The  pole  hitch  is  the  formation  of  a  half  hitch  over  each  side  pack; 
no  portion  of  the  rope  passes  under  the  belly  of  the  animal,  distin- 
guishing it  from  all  other  forms  of  hitches.  While  it  compresses 
the  load  to  extreme  tightness,  it  affords  no  tightening  of  the  aparejo 
to  the  body  of  the  animal,  a  necessary  qualification  when  climbing  a 
mountain,  or,  in  other  words,  the  load  may  be  compressed,  while  the 
aparejo  may  be  loose  on  the  animal.  It  should  never  be  used  when  a 
lash  rope  is  available.  It  may  be  used  for  packing  odds  and  ends 
after  cargo  is  loaded  and  a  loose  animal  is  available,  and  when  pressed 
24758—10 7 


98 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION 


99 


100  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

for  time.     It  is  also  used  to  secure  travois  to  aparejo  and  improvised 
"litters."     (See  figs.  71  and  74.) 

HOW   TO    FORM    THE    OREGON   DIAMOND    HITCH. 

SEC.  38.  This  form  of  hitch  is  performed  by  one  packer,  and  is 
closely  related  to  the  crosstree  or  sawbuck  hitch. 

Standing  on  the  near  side  of  the  animal,  take  a  coiled  lash  rope  and 
free  the  coils,  hold  the  cincha  and  allow  the  coils  to  drop  to  ground; 
now  take  sufficient  slack  on  rope  and  pass  the  cincha  over  the  load  in 
such  manner  that  the  cincha  will  come  under  the  animal's  belly  within 
easy  reach ;  pick  up  cincha  and  engage  the  standing  portion  on  hook 
from  in  out,  bringing  a  portion  of  the  running  rope  upward,  and 
engage  it  under  the  standing  rope  from  right  to  left,  to  hold  it  there; 
now  take  the  free  or  running  portion  of  rope  and  form  a  half  hitch, 
or  single  loop,  keeping  the  free  end  under,  and  draw  sufficient  slack 
to  engage  over  the  off  pack  and  boot  of  aparejo. 

Pass  to  the  "off"  side  and  pass  the  running  rope  from  right  to 
left,  between  the  pack  and  standing  rope,  and  press  to  place  under 
boot  of  aparejo,  as  performed  on  the  near  side  in  the  regular  "dia- 
mond." 

Now  pass  to  the  "near"  side  and  take  the  end  of  the  rope  and 
pass  it  over  and  under  the  standing  rope  at  front,  draw  sufficient  slack 
and  drop  the  end  of  rope  over  the  animal's  haunch  to  ground,  and 
the  hitch  is  formed,  ready  to  tighten  the  load.a  (Figs.  50-51.) 

To  tighten  the  load,  pull  on  the  running  rope  close  to  cinch  hook 
in  the  usual  manner,  but  be  careful  that  the  rope  is  not  drawn  from 
under  the  bight  of  standing  rope,  as  its  purpose  is  to  retain  the  slack 
as  given. 

In  giving  slack,  bring  the  hands  quickly  to  standing  rope  and  grip 
both  ropes  with  the  left  hand,  so  as  to  hold  the  slack,  then  receive 
this  slack  above  the  bight  on  standing  rope,  and  repeat  the  operation 
until  all  slack  has  been  taken;  pass  to  the  "off"  side  and  receive  this 
slack  in  the  usual  manner.  Now  pass  from  the  "off"  to  the  "near" 
side  until  hitch  is  tightened,  finishing  the  hitch  in  the  usual  manner, 
or  as  conditions  may  indicate.  (Figs.  52-53.) 

HOW  TO  SLING  THE  LOAD  AND  FORM  THE  CROSSTREE  HITCH  ON  CROSS- 
TREE   OR    SAWBUCK HOW   TO    SLING   THE    LOAD    ON    CROSSTREE. 

SEC.  39.  It  is  assumed  that  the  animal  is  equipped  with  crosstree 
and  ready  to  receive  load. 

The  near  packer  takes  the  sling  rope  and  forms  two  half  hitches 
on  the  ' 'forks"  at  the  front  of  saddle,  and  allows  each  half  to  drop  to 
ground,  on  each  side  of  the  animal.  See  Figs.  71,  72,  73,  and  74. 

Each  packer  will  then  form  a  half  hitch  on  the  free  end  over  the 
forks  at  rear,  allowing  sufficient  loop  on  rope  to  receive  side  packs. 
The  "off"  side  is  entirely  similar;  in  this  operation  the  free  end  of 
rope  should  come  under  the  loop  thus  formed.  (Fig.  54.) 

The  off  packer  places  the  side  pack  well  up  toward  forks  and,  hold- 
nig  it  there  with  the  right  hand,  palm  down,  against  center  of  pack, 
proceeds  to  pass  the  rope  along  the  lower  side  of  pack,  taking  slack 

« The  running  rope  maybe  kept  to  front  of  the  standing  rope  in  the  formation;  the 
end  of  the  rope  will  then  be  over  the  animal's  neck  on  the  off  side  instead  of  over  the 
haunch. 


MANUAL,  OF   PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


101 


102 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


103 


104 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  105 

on  free  end  of  rope  at  rear  and  brings  this  portion  under  the  pack  to 
center,  then  with  the  end  of  the  rope  take  a  turn  around  the  rope 
along  the  side  of  the  pack  at  center  and  draw  snug.  This  will  hold 
the  pack  or  support  it,  and  forms  a  bowline  knot  on  end  of  rope;  he 
now  brings  the  rope  upward  at  center  of  pack  and  waits  for  the  call, 
"Rope!"  from  the  "near"  packer. 

The  "near"  packer  proceeds  in  similar  manner  (without  forming 
bowline  knot),  and  when  ready  calls  out  "Rope!"  He  will  then  pass 
the  end  of  rope  over  and  under  through  the  eye  of  bowline  knot  and 
draw  the  packs  well  together,  each  packer  holding  packs  well  up,  to 
assist  in  doing  so,  and  secure  the  end  of  rope  at  bowline  knot,  or  at 
center  of  side  pack  at  turn  of  sling  rope,  as  it  is  always  within  easy 
reach.  (Fig.  55;  same  on  "off"  side.) 

This  operation  may  be  performed  by  one  packer. 

Another  method  in  common  use  is,  the  near  packer  forms  two  half 
hitches  on  the  "forks"  at  front  of  saddle  and  allows  each  half  to  drop 
to  ground  on  each  side  of  the  animal. 

The  near  packer  places  the  side  pack  well  up  toward  forks  and, 
holding  it  there  with  the  right  hand,  with  the  left  he  brings  the  rope 
upward  and  over  the  side  pack,  and  then  forming  a  loop  or  half  hitch, 
he  brings  this  loop  over  the  forks  of  the  saddle;  in  forming  the  loop 
keep  the  free  end  under  and  draw  the  pack  well  up,  or  as  may  be 
determined,  if  carrying  one  or  more  top  packs,  change  position  of 
hands  and  with  the  right  hand  bring  the  fore  or  running  rope  to  rear 
and  form  a  similar  loop  or  half  hitch  on  the  forks  at  rear  and  draw  all 
slack  taut;  now  bring  the  fore  or  running  portion  under  and  over 
the  pack  at  rear  and  form  a  similar  half  hitch  over  the  forks  and  tie 
at  intersection  of  ropes  below  the  forks;  the  operation  for  the  off 
side  is  entirely  similar.  This  operation  may  be  performed  by  one 
packer. 

HOW   TO    FORM   THE    CROSSTREE   HITCH. 

SEC.  40.  For  this  purpose  take  a  lash  rope  with  cincha,  about  35 
feet  long,  and  stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  animal,  facing  the  load; 
take  the  cincha  and  throw  or  pass  it  over  the  load  in  such  manner 
that  the  cincha  will  pass  under  the  animal's  belly,  convenient  to 
packer;  pick  up  the  cincha  and,  taking  in  all  slack,  engage  rope  on 
hook;  now  bring  a  portion  of  the  running  rope  up  to  side  of  pack, 
double  this  portion,  and  pass  it  under  the  standing  rope  from  rear 
to  front,  so  as  to  be  caught  in  a  bight  between  standing  rope  and  pack; 
this  will  hold  the  rope. 

Now  bring  the  running  rope  upward,  double  the  rope  and  bring 
it  under  and  forward  of  the  standing  rope,  and  take  slack  on  double 
of  rope,  then  form  a  loop  or  half  hitch  on  this  portion,  keeping  the 
free  end  under  and  turn  loop  over,  drawing  sufficient  slack  on  rope  to 
pass  over  the  "off"  side  pack,  from  front  to  rear;  step  to  "off  side 
to  place  rope  over  upper  corners  and  along  the  lower  side  of  pack; 
now  come  to  "near"  side,  and  bring  the  running  rope  around  the 
lower  side  of  pack,  and  pass  the  end  over  and  under  the  standing, 
running,  and  rear  ropes  at  center  or  top  of  load,  from  above  down, 
and  taje  hi  all  slack,  in  similar  manner  as  performed  on  the  "off" 
side,  and  the  hitch  is  formed,  ready  to  tighten  the  load. 

Or,  in  forming  the  hitch,  after  engaging  the  rope  onto  hook,  bring 
the  running  rope  upward  and  then  pass  the  rope  to  rear  without 


106 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


107 


108 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


109 


110  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

forming  a  loop,  and  then  under  and  around  the  pack  to  front;  now 
bring  the  end  of  the  rope  over  and  under  the  standing  and  running 
rope  and  draw  sufficient  slack  on  rope  to  pass  under  and  around  the 
pack  on  the  rear  side  to  the  rear;  now  bring  the  end  of  the  rope  over 
and  under  the  intersection  of  the  standing,  running  and  front  rope, 
and  drop  the  end  of  the  rope  over  the  animal's  haunch  on  the  off  side 
of  the  animal,  and  the  hitch  is  formed  ready  to  tighten  the  load. 

To  tighten  the  load,  bring  the  running  rope  under  the  standing  rope 
so  as  to  be  caught  in  a  bight,  now,  take  hold  of  the  running  rope, 
close  the  cinch  hook  and  take  all  slack  possible,  allowing  the  hands  to 
come  quickly  to  standing  rope,  and  grasp  both  ropes  with  the  left 
hand;  receive  this  slack  from  above  the  bight,  pass  to  the  "off"  side 
and  take  in  all  slack  from  front  to  rear,  keeping  the  rope  against  the 
lower  edge  of  pack;  pass  to  "near"  side,  and  take  in  all  slack  by 
pulling  the  end  of  rope  and  place  the  rope  in  similar  manner  as  for 
the  "off"  side  and  secure  the  end  of  rope  on  the  near  or  off  side  or 
on  top  of  load.  (Figs.  56,  57.) 

The  forks  of  the  saddle  act  as  a  holdfast  in  keeping  the  packs  from 
moving  fore  and  aft,  the  lash  rope  tightening  the  load  at  the  center  of 
side  packs. 

NOTE. — This  form  of  hitch  is  the  parent  of  all  other  hitches  used 
in  pack-train  service.  The  change  in  not  bringing  the  loop  under  the 
standing  rope  forms  the  "Oregon  diamond,"  the  latter  leading  to  the 
"diamond/'  "double  diamond,"  etc.  This  hitch  is  used  by  pros- 
pectors, miners,  hunting  parties,  the  Bureau  of  Forestry,  and  is 
known  and  practiced  in  many  countries. 

HOW   TO    FORM   THE    STIRRUP   HITCH. 

SEC.  41.  This  form  of  hitch  is  used  principally  by  cattlemen  ("cow 
punchers")  on  the  "round-up"  or  trail,  the  ordinary  riding  saddle 
being  sometimes  employed  for  the  purpose. 

Assuming  that  the  load  is  properly  slung  on  the  crosstree,  take  a 
rope  about  30  feet  long,  without  cincha,  and  pass  the  rope  over  the 
load,  so  as  to  have  an  equal  division  on  each  side;  now  form  a  loop 
on  top  and  center  of  load.  Each  packer  will  now  take  the  end  of 
rope  and  pass  it  from  above,  down  into  the  loop  at  top,  taking  suffi- 
cient slack  so  as  to  leave  a  loop  long  enough  to  place  the  foot  therein. 

Each  packer  will  then  pass  the  loop  held  by  the  foot  to  each  other 
under  the  belly  of  the  animal,  and  receive  it  by  passing  the  end  of 
the  rope  into  the  opposite  loop  and  release  the  foot.  (Fig.  58.) 

Before  taking  slack  it  is  well  to  spread  the  rope  at  top  of  side 
packs,  so  as  to  grip  them  more  securely.  At  the  call  "Ready,"  each 
packer  will  place  his  foot  against  the  animal's  body  and  draw  rope 
taut,  and  secure  end  of  rope  to  loop  on  center  of  load;  or  a  bowline 
knot  may  be  formed  on  end  of  rope  on  the  "off"  side,  sec.  46,  fig.  79, 
the  "near"  packer  passing  his  end  through  loop;  the  "off"  packer 
giving  slack  in  the  usual  manner,  and  secure  rope  at  bowline  knot. 
(Figs.  58,  59,  and  60.) 

TAKING  OFF  THE  LOAD  AND  APAREJO HOW  TO  TAKE  OFF  THE  LASH 

ROPE  AND  THE  LOAD. 

SEC  42.  (1)  Off  packer.— The  "off"  packer  releases  the  end  of  the 
lash  rope,  as  secured  on  the  "off"  side  (fig.  40)  and  passes  it  quickly 
over  the  animal's  neck  to  near  side.  This  should  be  done  quickly, 


r 


MANU 


AL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


Ill 


112 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


113 


24758—10 8 


114 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL,  OF   PACK   TEANSPOKTATION. 


115 


116  MANUAL  OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

so  as  to  cause  any  coils  of  the  end  that  have  been  placed  under  the 
top  rope  to  fall  to  the  ground. 

Grasp  the  front  rope,  draw  on  the  slack  sufficiently  to  bring  it  over 
and  to  rear  of  packs,  stepping  to  rear  as  you  do  so.  Then  draw  in 
the  slack,  hand  over  hand,  coiling  the  rope  in  the  operation,  and 
receive  the  coils  in  the  left  hand,  until  the  end  of  the  rope  has  been 
freed  from  between  the  standing  and  running  ropes.  (This  is  the 
reverse  of  the  process  illustrated  in  figs.  22  and  24.) 

Now  step  to  center  of  aparejo,  and  when  slack  is  rendered  on  run- 
ning rope  at  bight  of  standing  rope  (R,  fig.  41)  by  "near"  packer, 
free  the  cincha  hook  from  the  rope. 

(2)  Near  packer. — The  "near"  packer  grasps  the  rear  rope  (D, 
fig.  41)  with  right  hand,  and  when  slack  is  rendered  by  "off"  packer, 
he  draws  enough  slack  on  the  "marking"  rope  (M,  fig.  41)  to  free  the 
running  rope  from  under  the  standing  rope  at  center  of  pack  (R,  fig. 
41).     He  allows  sufficient  slack  to  the  "  off "  packer  to  enable  him  to 
free  the  rope  from  the  hook. 

The  hook  being  freed  he  grasps  with  the  left  hand  the  running  and 
rear  ropes  and  the  standing  rope  near  the  lacings  of  the  cincha,  and 
calls  to  "off"  packer,  "To  rear." 

(3)  Off  packer.— The  "off"  packer,  at  the  call  "To  rear,"  grasps 
the  running,  standing,  and  rear  ropes  in  right  hand,  passes  them  back 
over  the  animal's  haunches,  and  swings  or  throws  the  coils  held  in 
left  hand  to  the  rear,  in  line  with  the  "  near"  packer. 

(4)  Near  packer. — The  "near"  packer,  holding  ropes  in  left  hand, 
coils  them  with  right,  receiving  coils  with  left  hand,  leaving  from  10 
to  15  feet  of  the  end  extended. 

He  then  steps  forward  and  partly  in  front  of  the  animal  swings 
the  coils  toward  the  rear  and  places  the  lash  rope  on  the  ground, 
cinch  underneath.  (See  footnote.) 

(5)  Off  packer. — The   "off"   packer,  having  passed  the  ropes  to 
the  rear,  steps  to  center  of  load  and  with  left  hand  frees  whatever 
portior.  of  the  sling  rope  that  may  have  been  placed  between  the 
packs  and  allows  it  to  drop  to  ground  on  near  side  of  the  animal.     He 
now  places  a  hand  on  each  end  of  pack  as  a  support  and  waits  for  the 
knot  to  be  untied  by  the  "near"  packer. 

(6)  Near  packer. — The   "near7     packer,   having  placed   the   lash 
rope  on  the  ground,  steps  to  center  of  load,  places  left  hand,  palm 
down,  on  center  of  pack,  and  calls  out  "  Ready! " 

He  then  frees  the  knot  with  the  right  hand  and,  changing  the  posi- 
tion of  the  hands,  he  frees  the  front  rope  from  the  bight  of  the  sling 
and  allows  it  to  drop  to  the  ground. 

Grasping  the  pack  at  ends  he  allows  the  pack  to  come  down  against 
his  breast,  carries  and  places  it  lengthwise  on  the  coiled  lash  rope. 

(7)  Off  packer. — The  pack  being  freed,  the  "off"  packer  receives 
it  against  the  breast,  allowing  the  sling  rope  to  be  caught  between 
the  pack  and  breast;  carries  pack  and  places  it  on  top  of  the  "near" 
pack,  coils  the  sling  rope,  and  places  it  crosswise  on  the  packs;  then 
takes  the  end  of  the  lash  rope  where  extended  on  the  ground,  coils 
and  places  it  on  top  of  pack.     The  load  is  now  formed  as  described 
in  section  24. 

NOTE. — When  occasion  requires  in  forming  cargo,  the  lash  ropes 
mav  be  passed  to  the  front  instead  of  to  the  rear,  i.  e.,  over  the  ani- 
mal's head  instead  of  the  haunches.  This  is  effected  in  a  manner 
entirely  similar  to  that  described  above. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  117 

HOW    TO    UNCINCH    AN    APAREJO    AND    TURN    THE    CRUPPER. 

SEC.  43.  With  the  left  hand  loosen  the  end  of  the  latigo  or  cincha 
strap  and  with  the  right  hand  draw  the  latigo  down.  Loosen  and 
release  the  latigo  from  the  rendering  ring;  then  pass  the  latigo  over 
to  the  "off"  side,  causing  it  to  lie  along  the  middle  of  cincha. 

Grasp  the  lacings  of  the  cincha  with  the  right  hand,  the  left  arm 
resting  on  top  of  the  aparejo  as  a  support,  the  thumb  engaged  under 
the  latigo  as  a  guide  to  keep  the  latigo  in  the  middle  of  the  cincha 
and  draw  the  cincha  downward  so  as  to  have  about  four  feet.  Now, 
place  the  left  hand,  fingers  extended,  on  cincha,  and  fold  the  end  over 
with  the  right  hand.  This  should  leave  the  cincha  doubled  on  top  of 
the  aparejo,  equally  divided. 

Step  to  the  front,  place  left  hand  on  collar,  right  on  corner  of  boot, 
and  push  the  aparejo  slightly  to  the  rear;  if  necessary,  alternate  each 
hand.  Step  squarely  behind  animal,  with  the  right  hand  grasp  the 
end  of  the  animal's  tail,  raise  it  to  the  right  and  upward,  resting 
it  on  the  animal's  haunch,  and  hold  it  there  with  the  left  hand.  With 
the  right  raise  the  crupper  so  as  to  free  the  tail  and  allow  the  tail 
to  drop. 

Take  hold  of  the  upper  edges  of  the  crupper  with  both  hands, 
about  10  inches  from  the  dock  on  either  side.  Raise  and  bring  the 
hands  together.  Take  both  edges  in  the  left  hand;  place  the  right 
palm  under  the  lower  edge  of  crupper,  and  while  the  left  hand  is 
pressing  downward,  press  upward  with  the  palm  of  the  right,  thus 
turning  the  crupper  upside  down.  Allow  the  dock  of  crupper  to 
rest  on  the  center  of  aparejo. 

The  animal  should  be  held  throughout  the  operation  by  retaining 
the  end  of  the  halter  shank  in  the  left  hand. 

HOW    TO    TAKE    OFF    AN    APAREJO. 

SEC.  44.  Take  hold  with  right  hand,  near  the  center  of  the  aparejo 
on  the  near  side  and  at  rear,  the  left  at  front  corner  of  boot;  press  in 
quickly  with  left,  and  pull  toward  body  with  right.  This  gets  the 
aparejo  quartering  on  the  animal's  back.  Pass  left  hand  over  to  off 
side,  palm  against  inside  of  belly  piece  of  aparejo;  raise  the  aparejo 
with  left  hand,  to  clear  animal's  back,  and  place  it  on  the  ground. 
It  will  be  observed  that  the  position  of  hands  is  the  same  as  when 
putting  on  the  aparejo. 

NOTE. — In  taking  off  the  aparejo  packers  must  not  place  the  aparejo 
on  the  ground  with  force. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 
HOW    TO    FORM    TWO    HALF    HITCHES THE    POLE    ( CLOVE)    HITCH. 

SEC.  45.  Take  a  rope  at  point  determined  to  form  hitch,  and  hold 
in  left  hand,  the  last  two  fingers  pressing  rope  against  palm,  the 
thumb  and  first  two  fingers  ready  to  receive  the  hitches  as  formed. 

Grasp  the  rope  in  the  right  hand  in  front  of  the  left  and  at  a  dis- 
tance from  the  left  determined  by  the  size  of  the  loops  or  hitches  it 
is  desired  to  form. 

By  an  outward  and  inward  motion  of  the  right  hand  make  a  loop 
hi  the  rope,  the  part  held  in  the  right  hand  passing  under  that  held 
in  left.  Allow  the  first  finger  of  left  hand  to  receive  this  loop. 


118  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

Make  a  second  and  similar  loop  and  place  it  on  top  of  the  loop  first 
formed,  receiving  it  between  the  thumb  and  loop  already  formed. 

Render  slack  either  way,  to  permit  of  hitches  being  of  similar  size. 
Place  hitches  over  object  and  draw  taut.  (See  Figs.  71,  72,  73,  74.) 

HOW    TO    FORM    A    BOWLINE    KNOT. 

SEC.  46.  With  the  left  hand,  palm  up,  grasp  the  rope,  say,  about  12 
inches  from  the  end,  the  standing  part  of  the  rope  extended  out 
from  you. 

With  the  right  lay  the  end  or  running  portion  over  the  standing 
part,  in  front  of  the  left  hand,  and  grip  both  ropes  with  the  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers. 

Now  bring  the  left  hand,  holding  rope  forward,  passing  over  the 
end  of  the  rope  as  held  by  the  right  hand,  and  lay  this  loop  or  eye  on 
top  of  the  standing  rope  and  grip  both  ropes  between  the  thumb  and 
first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand.  This  operation  leaves  the  end  of 
the  rope  standing  upward  in  the  eye  of  rope  as  thus  formed. 

Now  take  the  end  of  the  rope  in  the  right  hand  and  bring  it  for- 
ward, then  under  and  over  the  standing  rope  and  back  again  into  the 
eye  of  bowline,  grip  the  end  between  the  two  first  fingers  of  the  left 
hand  and  pull  taut  on  the  standing  rope.  See  Fig.  79.  The  rope  d 
forms  the  loop  or  eye ;  the  rope  c  is  that  portion  first  engaged  in  the 
loop,  as  seen  in  the  eye  adjoining;  d,  the  rope;  a,  in  first  position, 
adjoins  d,  as  seen  in  the  eye;  now  follow  this  rope  around,  as  seen  at 
c  and  a,  and  the  bowline  knot  is  formed. 

HOW   TO    FORM    THE    BOWLINE    AND    BIGHT. 

SEC.  47.  Take  a  rope  and  double  it  at  any  point  determined  to  form 
the  bight;  now  grasp  the  double  or  loop  at  end  with  the  right  hand, 
and  with  left  reach  forward  and  grasp  both  ropes  as  far  as  the  size  of 
the  loop  may  be  determined;  bring  the  loop  end  of  the  rope  over 
and  under  both  ropes  and  into  the  "eye"  thus  formed. 

Now  with  the  right  hand  grasp  the  loop  or  double  and  draw  suffi- 
cient slack  to  pass  the  right  hand,  palm  up,  from  above  down  through 
the  loop  end  only.  Now  grasp  the  double  of  the  rope  in  the  center 
of  the  eye  and  hold  it  there.  Next  bring  the  loop  end  forward 
against  the  standing  part,  and  turn  the  rope  over,  as  seen  at  a,  Fig. 
81,  and  pull  taut  on  the  double  of  the  rope  held  by  the  right  hand 
until  the  loop  end  compresses  on  the  standing  part,  and  the  bowline 
and  bight  are  formed. 

NOTE. — In  the  first  instance,  the  end  of  rope  held  in  the  right  hand 
and  brought  into  the  eye  is,  in  the  second  instance,  brought  under 
and  back  to  the  standing  part  extending  forward,  the  double  of  the 
rope  enclosed  in  the  eye  is  drawn  toward  the  body,  this  forms  the 
loop  as  seen  on  the  right  of  d ;  the  loop  at  d  forms  the  eye  or  bight. 

This  form  of  knot  is  used  in  stretching  a  picket  line,  etc. 

HOW   TO   FORM    A   SHORT    SPLICE    ON    ROPE. 

SEC.  48.  Take  two  sections  of  rope  of  same  size  diameter  and 
unravel  the  strands  of  each  section  about  6  or  8  inches  long;  now 
place  the  back  of  one  section  on  the  front  of  the  other  section  so  that 
the  strands  of  one  section  will  pass  between  the  strands  of  its  mate, 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  119 

bring  each  section  snug  up  and  tie  down  with  cord  across  the  inter- 
section or  middle,  to  hold  the  strands  to  place  during  the  operation. 
NOTE. — There  is  a  back  and  a  front  in  the  formation  (or  twist)  of 
all  ropes,  and  also  in  the  formation  (or  plaiting)  of  all  ropes,  whips, 
etc.  The  back  is  that  portion  facing  toward  the  body;  the  front  is 
that  portion  facing  from  the  body  and  is  the  under  or  bottom  side 
of  the  twist  in  the  formation  of  the  rope;  therefore,  in  short  splicing 
place  the  back  of  one  section  on  the  front  of  the  other  section  so  as 
to  follow  the  twist  in  splicing  the  rope;  now  pass  each  strand  from 
right  to  left  over  and  under  its  mate  on  the  twist  or  section  of  rope; 
then  take  two  more  turns,  drawing  each  strand  down  snugly  during 
the  operation;  turn  end  for  end  and  proceed  in  similar  manner;  cut 
off  all  remaining  portions  of  the  strands  extending  from  the  splice 
or  rope ;  roll  the  splice  under  foot  or  something  smooth  and  solid  and 
the  splice  is  formed.  Neatness  or  handiness  in  the  packer  is  every- 
thing in  forming  all  splices,  knots,  and  hitches.  See  Figs.  95  to  98. 

HOW   TO    FORM    A   LONG    SPLICE    ON    ROPE. 

SEC.  49.  Take  two  sections  of  rope  of  same  size  diameter  and 
unravel  one  strand  of  each  section  about  12  inches  long,  or  as  long 
as  may  be  determined;  now  place  the  rope  held  in  the  right  hand 
on  top  of  the  rope  held  in  the  left  hand,  so  as  to  have  the  unraveled 
strand  of  top  section  adjoining  the  unraveled  strand  of  bottom  sec- 
tion (in  the  operation  of  the  splice  it  may  be  well  to  tie  the  sections 
of  rope  with  a  cord  at  point  of  intersection  of  the  unraveled  portions) ; 
now,  holding  each  section  in  the  left  hand,  unravel  the  forward  or 
bottom  section  of  rope,  same  strand,  one  or  two  more  turns  and 
follow  this  unraveling  by  the  unraveled  strand  of  top  section;  con- 
tinue the  operation  until  about  4  inches  of  the  top  strand  is  reached; 
now  take  the  strand  of  the  top  section  and  pass  it  over  and  under 
the  strand  of  the  forward  or  bottom  section  and  draw  down  snug, 
so  that  the  tie  or  slip  knot  will  lay  smooth ;  now  turn  the  rope  end  for 
end,  and  hold  the  rope  in  the  left  hand  as  before,  and  unravel  the 
remaining  strands  of  each  section  until  the  last  one  or  two  turns  are 
reached.  In  unraveling  the  last  one  or  two  turns  be  careful  to  have 
the  strand  of  the  top  section  meet  the  strand  of  the  bottom  section, 
so  that  the  strand  of  the  top  section  will  follow  up  the  vacant  turn 
of  the  bottom  strand  until  about  4  inches  of  the  top  strand  is  reached, 
and  form  a  slip  knot  as  before;  if  carefulness  is  used  this  will  leave 
the  remaining  strand  of  top  and  bottom  section  in  alignment,  one 
with  the  other,  showing  there  is  no  interference  in  the  lay  of  the 
twist  of  the  rope;  now  take  the  strand  of  the  top  section,  which  will 
be  the  strand  adjoining  the  left  hand,  and  pass  this  strand  over  and 
under  the  strand  of  the  forward  section  and  draw  down  snug;  this 
operation  leaves  all  the  strands  engaged,  each  strand  having  occu- 
pied the  place  made  vacant  by  its  mate.  To  finish  the  splice,  unravel 
each  strand  until  the  slip  knot  is  reached,  divide  the  cords  of  one 
strand,  and  pass  one  division,  or  half  the  cords,  from  right  to  left  over 
and  under  the  adjoining  strand  of  rope  and  draw  down  snug;  proceed 
in  similar  manner  with  the  remaining  five  strands,  using  one-half  of 
the  cords  of  each  strand  as  before;  now  cut  off  all  remaining  portions 
extending  on  rope  and  roll  the  rope  under  foot  on  board  or  something 
smooth  and  the  splice  is  formed ;  the  operation  when  neatly  done  will 
show  the  rope  of  same  diameter  all  through  the  splice.  See  Fig.  99. 


120 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


Fig.  72 


C'love    hitch. 


Fig.  73. 


Fig.  74.t 


MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


121 


Fig.  75.  Timbej  hitch,  Fig.  76.    Timber  hitch  and  Half  hitch. 


Fig>78.    Hawser  Bend. 


Fig. 79.     Bowline. 


Fig. 80.    Running  Bowline. 


Fig.  81.    Bowline  on  a  Bight. 


122 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


Fig.  82.    Sling  for  barrel  horizontal,  Rg,  83.    Sling  for  barrel  vertical. 


Fig.  87.    Rolling  Hitch.          Fig.  86.    Sheepshank.          Fig.  85.    Cat's  Paw.  6. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


123 


Fig.  88.  Blackwall  Hitch. 


Fig.  89.  Mooring  Knot. 


Pjg.91.  Wall  Knot      Fig.  92.  Wall  Knot. 


Fig.  90. 
Carrick  Bend. 


Fig.  93.  Fig.  94. 

Crown  on  Wall. 


124 


MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 


Fig.  95.    Short  Spliet.  n«'96-  Short  Spite. 


Fig.  99.    Long  Splice. 


Fig.  100.  Fig,  101.  Fig.  102.  Fig.  103. 


MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION.  125 

HOW  TO  CONSTRUCT  A  TRAVOIS. 

SEC.  50.  Secure  two  poles  from  14  to  16  feet  long,  as  light  as  can 
be  had,  the  diameter  at  the  smaller  ends  being  not  greater  than  2 
inches. 

Six  inches  from  the  butt  end  of  each  pole  cut  a  notch  deep  enough 
to  receive  a  sling  or  lair  rope. 

Take  a  manta  and  place  poles  thereon  at  opposite  edges,  leaving 
about  6  feet  of  the  butt  end  of  the  poles  extended  beyond  the  manta. 
Roll  the  poles  toward  one  another,  leaving  a  space  of  2  or  3  feet 
between  the  poles.  Lace  the  poles  to  the  manta  by  means  of  lace 
strings  or  small  rope,  or  secure  with  horseshoe  nails,  always  available. 

Take  a  sling  or  lair  rope  and  near  middle  of  rope  secure  the  butt 
end  of  each  pole  where  the  notches  were  cut.  Use  half  hitches  (see 
figs.  72,  73,  74)  and  allow  about  18  inches  of  rope  between  the  two 
poles. 

Raise  the  poles  and  so  place  them  that  the  center  of  the  rope 
between  the  poles  will  rest  on  the  center  of  the  aparejo  on  the  mute. 
Secure  the  poles  to  the  aparejo  with  pole  hitch.  (Sec.  37.) 

The  construction  should  be  strengthened  by  a  distance  pole  lashed 
to. jpoles  below  the  manta. 

One  packer  should  lead  the  animal,  and  two  should  be  in  rear  to 
hold  up  ends  of  travois  in  bad  places  or  in  crossing  streams. 

To  enable  them  to  hold  the  ends  up,  a  rope  should  be  attached  to 
end  of  each  pole. 

HOW   TO   IMPROVISE    A    STRETCHER. 

SEC.  51.  Cut  two  poles  3  feet  long;  double  sling  them  (sec.  29), 
and  tie  down  to  boot  of  aparejo.  Cut  two  poles  2  feet  long;  place  one 
in  front  and  one  in  rear  of  aparejo,  crosswise;  mark  and  notch  and 
secure  to  side  poles.  This  should  bring  the  cross  poles  2  inches  clear 
of  the  aparejo. 

Cut  two  poles  6  feet  long  to  form  frame  for  stretcher.  Take  a 
manta  and  place  the  poles  on  the  opposite  edges  of  manta.  Roll 
toward  center,  leaving  a  width  of  20  inches  between  the  outer  edges 
of  the  poles.  Lace  manta  to  poles,  or  secure  with  horseshoe  nails, 
which  are  always  convenient.  Place  a  distance  pole  at  each  end, 
notch,  and  secure.  The  plane  of  the  canvas  should  ride  on  top. 
Secure  body  to  stretcher  by  a  lacing  over  body,  clearing  the  stomach. 
Secure  poles  of  stretcher  at  front  and  rear  to  each  crosspiece  and  lash 
stretcher  to  aparejo.  (Figs.  104,  105,  106,  107.) 

Fig.  104  shows  adjustment  of  bamboo  frame  to  the  aparejo  prior  to 
lashing  litter  thereto. 

Fig.  105  shows  method  of  attaching  litter  to  bamboo  frame,  the 
crosspieces  passing  through  legs  of  litter  at  front  and  rear  as  a  hold- 
fast and  lashed  to  aparejo — near-side  view. 

Fig.  106  shows  position  of  wounded  on  litter,  fig.  107  showing  off- 
side view.  Jolo  pack  train  carrying  wounded  soldiers  to  the  sea  from 
the  interior. 

NOTE. — The  writer  is  indebted  to  Col.  H.  L.  Scott,  Superintendent 
of  the  United  States  Military  Academy,  West  Point,  N.  Y.,  for  the 
above  views. 


126 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION, 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION, 


127 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


129 


24758—10 -9 


CHAPTER  IV. 

INSTRUCTION  IN  THE  SERVICE  OF  A  PACK  TRAIN. 
1.  SUMMARY  OF  DUTIES  IN  LOADING  AND  UNLOADING  A  TRAIN. 

SEC.  52.  The  operation  of  loading  a  train,  or  of  imparking,  in  pre- 
paring for  a  march,  may  be  summarized  as  follows: 

(1)  The  mules  follow  the  bell  horse  and  take  their  places  at  the 
rigging.     They  are  tied  together  by  means  of  their  halter  shanks  as 
they  stand  facing  the  rigging. 

(2)  The  packers  then  put  on  the  aparejos.     Each  animal,  after 
receiving  his  aparejo,  is  tied  to  the  lash  rope  under  the  load  he  is  to 
carry.     (Sec.  58.) 

pi)  The  aparejos  being  on,  the  packers  begin  at  once  to  load  the 
animals.  As  each  animal  receives  its  load  it  is  turned  loose,  and  cer- 
tain men  are  detailed  to  keep  the  animals  in  the  neighborhood  of  the 
"bell." 

In  the  operation  of  unloading  a  pack  train,  or  of  parking,  after  a 
march,  the  elements  of  a  pack  train  are  arranged  as  follows: 

(4)  The  cargo  is  formed  by  the  cargador.     (Sec.  53.) 

(5)  The  rigging  is  placed  in  an  orderly  manner,  convenient  to  the 
cargo.     (Sec.  54.) 

(6)  The  animals,  if  not  on  herd,  are  tied  to  a  picket  line,  placed 
conveniently  in  rear  of  rigging.     (Sec.  75.) 

(7)  The  kitchen  is  placed  convenient  to  water  and  nearest  to  cargo. 
In  this  order  a  pact  train  is  parked  in  camp  or  bivouac. 

These  various  operations  are  described  in  detail  in  the  succeeding 
sections. 

2.  LOADING  A  PACK  TRAIN. 
HOW   TO   FORM    CARGO    PREPARATORY   TO    LOADING   THE   MULES. 

SEC.  53.  In  selecting  ground  for  the  cargo  always  choose  the  highest 
available,  so  that  water  will  drain  from  it. 

In  first  forming  a  cargo  at  the  place  where  the  stores  to  be  trans- 
ported are  received,  the  coiled  lash  ropes  are  all  placed  on  the  ground 
in  order  before  the  loads  are  laid  on  them. 

•  Take  the  middle  of  the  ground  selected  for  the  first  rope.  Undo  a 
lash  rope  (sec.  11)  and  place  it  on  the  ground,  the  cincha  underneath 
the  coils,  the  end  of  the  rope  extended  10  feet.  Get  a  sling  rope  and 
place  it  on  top  of  end  of  lash  rope  about  2  feet  from  coil.  Take 
another  lash  and  sling  rope  and  place  them  similarly  near  those 
already  in  position,  the  heads  of  the  coils  adjoining  and  about  6  inches 
apart,  the  ends  of  the  lash  ropes  extended  out  in  opposite  directions. 

The  remaining  ropes  are  then  placed  in  a  similar  manner  in  posi- 
tion on  either  side  of  these  two,  thus  leaving  them  in  two  lines,  with 
130 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION.  131 

a  space  of  6  inches  between  the  lines  and  an  interval  of  about  2  feet 
from  center  to  center  of  lash  ropes  in  the  same  line. 

Now  place  the  loads  on  top  of  their  respective  lash  ropes. 

In  selecting  packs  to  form  a  load,  cargadors  should  be  careful  to 
get  both  side  packs  of  as  nearly  the  same  weight  as  possible,  always, 
however,  placing  the  heavier  pack  on  the  bottom.  Form  loads  ac- 
cording to  their  kind  as  much  as  possible,  as  a  mixed  load  is  always 
troublesome. 

Place  the  packs  lengthwise  on  the  ropes,  but  with  the  natter  side 
of  the  packs  dow^n. 

When  cargo  is  in  place  on  lash  ropes,  commence  at  ends  and  place 
the  sling  ropes  on  top  of  loads  crosswise;  then  coil  the  ends  of  the 
lash  ropes  and  place  them  on  top  of  the  sling  ropes. 

In  parking  a  pack  train  the  cargo  is  formed  as  here  described,  ex- 
cept that  the  lash  ropes  are  placed  only  as  the  loads  are  removed. 
See  Fig.  109. 

HOW    TO    PLACE    THE    RIGGING. 

SEC.  54.  Preparatory  to  loading,  the  rigging  is  placed  together, 
either  in  line  or  in  some  other  formation,  as  an  L,  a  half  circle,  a 
horseshoe,  etc.,  as  convenience  or  the  nature  of  the  ground  may  dic- 
tate. 

If  to  be  arranged  in  a  straight  line,  the  aparejos  are  placed  so  that 
each  will  have  its  boots  abutting  squarely  against  those  next  adjoin- 
ing. The  line  is  parallel  to  the  line  of  the  cargo  and  about  10  paces 
from  it. 

If  an  L,  place  the  first  rigging  in  prolongation  of  the  line  of  the 
cargo  and  10  paces  from  the  end  of  the  cargo.  Then  run  ten  rigging 
in  line  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  the  cargo;  turn  at  right  angles 
and  run  the  rest  parallel  to  the  line  of  the  cargo.  The  cargo  is  thus 
included  in  the  angle  of  the  L. 

If  a  double  L,  start  as  in  the  case  of  a  single  L,  and  run  ten  rigging 
in  line  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  the  cargo;  turn  and  run  thirty 
parallel  to  the  line  of  the  cargo ;  then  turn  again  and  run  the  last  ten 
perpendicular  to  the  line  of  cargo. 

Ir  half  circle  is  desired,  incline  boot  of  each  aparejo  toward  the 
boot  of  the  next  aparejo,  already  in  place. 

In  each  of  these  last  two  cases,  the  cargo  is  included  between  the 
extremities  of  the  line  of  rigging. 

In  placing,  always  watch  the  front  corners  of  the  boots  of  the 
aparejo;  for  as  they  are  inclined  or  squared,  so  will  the  line  run. 

As  one  stands  in  rear  of  the  line  of  rigging,  facing  the  front,  the 
"head  rigging"  is  on  the  right,  the  "end  rigging"  on  the  left.  See 
Figs.  108,  109. 

HOW   TO   TEACH   ANIMALS   TO    COME    PROPERLY   TO    RIGGING. 

SEC.  55.  Pack  animals  should  be  early  taught  to  "  come  to  the 
rigging."  The  first  and  necessary  requisite  is  to  teach  them  to  come 
in  from  the  herd  ground  properly.  That  is,  they  should  string  out 
behind  the  "bell"  animal,  and  should  not  bunch  together  like  a  flock 
of  sheep.  A  thoroughly  organized  train,  if  brought  up  in  a  bunch, 
may  take  their  places  at  the  rigging  without  trouble;  but  a  " shave- 
tail," or  unorganized  train,  never  will. 


132  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

The  object  of  the  instruction  is  to  teach  the  animals  to  approach 
the  rigging  quietly  and  take  their  places  in  line  in  rear  of  it,  facing 
toward  the  rigging. 

As  the  animals  approach  the  rigging  from  the  rear,  in  single  file, 
packers  should  take  station  on  either  side  of  the  column. 

One  packer  holds  the  bell  animal,  facing  the  third  rigging  from  the 
head  rigging.  By  the  time  all  the  animals  are  in  place,  the  "bell" 
will  have  been  crowded  down,  opposite  the  first  or  head  rigging.  The 
mules  are  then  guided,  so  as  to  form  in  line,  facing  the  rigging,  on 
the  flank  of  the  "bell"  animal.  (Figs.  108,  109.) 

To  do  this,  one  packer,  in  rear  of  the  "bell"  animal,  guides  the 
first  mule  to  the  proper  flank  of  the  "bell"  animal;  while  one  packer, 
immediately  in  rear  of  the  rigging,  crowds  the  mule  up  toward  the 
"bell"  animal.  As  the  mules  come  in  these  two  men  gradually  work 
down  the  line,  guiding  each  successive  mule  to  his  position.  Three 
packers  are  stationed  on  each  side  of  the  column  of  approaching  ani- 
mals to  assist  in  guiding  them  in  place.  Should  any  animals  break 
away,  the  herders  must  be  prompt  to  round  them  up  and  get  them 
back  in  place. 

The  pack  master  and  the  cargador  should  stand  in  front  of  the  rig- 
ging to  prevent  the  animals  from  jumping  over. 

To  more  readily  teach  them  to  come  to  rigging,  the  animals  may 
be  fed  there,  the  feed  covers  being  spread  on  rigging  for  that  purpose. 
This,  however,  should  be  discontinued  as  early  as  possible. 

HOW  TO  TIE  ANIMALS  AT  RIGGING. 

SEC.  56.  The  animals  having  taken  their  places  as  described  in 
section  52,  they  are  next  tied  together  by  means  of  their  halter  shanks. 
(Figs.  108,  109.) 

The  packers  station  themselves  in  rear  of  the  animals  and  keep 
them  well  up  to  the  rigging.  The  pack  master  and  cargador  are  in 
front.  The  cargador  places  a  blind  on  the  last  animal. 

The  mules,  as  they  come  in  from  herd,  have  the  halters  on,  the 
halter  shanks  detached.  These  shanks  are  piled  conveniently,  one- 
half  at  the  head,  one-half  at  the  the  end  of  the  rigging. 

The  pack  master  beginning  at  one  end  and  the  cargador  at  the 
other  now  work  toward  the  center,  attaching  the  halter  shanks  to  the 
halters. 

This  is  done  by  means  of  the  "snap"  at  one  end  of  the  shank. 

Then  working  from  the  center  to  the  ends  they  tie  the  animals 
together.  Additional  packers  will  be  detailed  to  assist  when  neces- 
sary. 

This  is  done  as  follows :  Take  the  case  of  the  man  who  is  working 
from  the  center  toward  his  right  or  toward  the  "end  rigging;"  he 
takes  the  halter  shank  of  the  fir§t  mule,  i.  e.,  the  one  nearest  the  cen- 
ter, about  9  inches  from  the  snap,  and  forms  a  bight  or  loop  in  it  6 
inches  long.  Holding  this  in  the  left  hand  he  grasps  the  halter  shank 
of  the  second  mule  about  2  feet  from  snap  and  brings  it  from  front 
to  rear  over  the  loop  held  in  left  hand,  retaining  it  in  place  on  the 
loop  by  the  pressure  of  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand.  Then,  with 
the  right  hand,  he  grasps  the  free  or  running  part,  passes  a  bight  of 
it  under  the  loop  and  under  and  over  the  standing  part;  then  down 
through  the  loop  held  in  left  hand.  Holding  the  original  loop  in  the 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TE  AN  SPORT  ATION. 


133 


134 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  135 

left  hand  he  grasps  this  bight  of  the  running  part  in  the  right  hand 
and  pulls  taut. 

This  knot  is  immediately  unfastened  by  pulling  on  the  running  or 
free  end  of  the  shank. 

In  tying  the  third  animal  form  the  loop  in  the  halter  shank  of  the 
second  animal  between  the  snap  and  the  knot  just  tied.  Then  take 
the  halter  shank  of  the  third  animal  and  proceed  as  before.  So  con- 
tinue to  the  flank  until  all  are  tied. 

In  the  case  of  working  from  center  to  left  (or  toward  head  rigging) 
along  the  line  of  mules  the  knot  is  formed  similarly.  Note,  however, 
that  in  this  case  the  first  loop  is  formed  each  time  in  &  free  halter 
shank,  and  that  the  running  or  free  part  of  the  halter  shank  on  the 
right  is  used  in  making  the  Knot. 


LOAD. 

SEC.  57.  To  keep  the  halter  shank  out  of  the  way  and  prevent  it 
from  dragging  it  is  secured  in  the  following  manner: 

With  the  left  hand  hold  the  animal  by  the  cheek  piece  of  halter  on 
near  side,  and  with  the  right  pass  the  shank  over  the  animal's  neck 
to  the  off  side. 

Grasp  the  shank  over  the  animal's  neck  and  pass  it  between  the 
ears  so  that  it  will  lie  between  the  crown  and  ear  on  near  side  and 
along  in  front  between  the  ear  and  eye  on  off  side,  keeping  the  arm 
well  over  the  animal's  neck  in  doing  so. 

Now  bring  right  hand  to  near  side,  reach  for  the  shank  under  ani- 
mal's neck  and,  bringing  it  up  snug,  pass  it  up  from  rear  to  front 
under  the  buckle  piece  of  the  halter  at  point  below  brow  band.  Draw 
sufficient  of  this  loop  through  to  permit  its  being  passed  from  rear  to 
front  under  crown  piece  above  brow  band.  Then  pass  the  loop  down 
between  the  halter  and  the  shank;  draw  snug;  take  the  end  of  the 
shank  and  pass  it  through  the  loop.  (Figs.  40-41.) 

HOW    TO    TIE    AN    ANIMAL    TO    HIS    LOAD. 

SEC.  58.  Lead  animal  to  load  selected  and  take  the  end  of  the  lash 
rope.  Pass  this  end  (or  bight  of  it)  into  chin  piece  of  halter  from 
above,  with  left  hand,  and  receive  it  in  the  right  hand.  Then  with 
this  end  form  a  single  slipknot  on  the  standing  part  and  draw  up  snug. 

HOW   TO    LOAD    A    PACK    TRAIN    FOR    THE    DAY'S    MARCH    IN   THE    MOST 
EXPEDITIOUS    MANNER. 

SEC.  59.  The  following  is  the  routine  in  the  service  of  a  pack  train 
in  preparation  for  the  day's  march : 

It  is  assumed  that  the  train  has  been  properly  parked,  the  animals 
being  on  herd  or  at  the  picket  line. 

First,  the  cook  must  be  awakened  one-half  hour  before  the  train- 
men. He  folds  his  blankets,  places  them  in  front  of  the  head  rigging, 
and  immediately  proceeds  to  get  breakfast. 

The  moment  the  trainmen  are  awakened  they  must  promptly  arise 
and  dress ;  then  fold  their  blankets  and  canvas  and  place  them  in  front 
of  the  rigging;  the  one  first  ready  placing  his  blankets  next  in  order 
after  the  cook's  blankets;  then  so  on  with  the  other  blankets  until  all 
are  placed. 


136  MANUAL   OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

(It  may  be  noted  that  the  pack  blankets  are  used  for  sleeping  pur- 
poses by  the  men  of  the  pack  train  while  in  camp  or  bivouac.) 

The  first  two  packers  ready  will  remove  the  rigging  covers  (sec. 
74)  and  fold  them,  placing  them  lengthwise,  in  front  of  such  aparejos 
as  the  cargador  may  direct.  Other  packers  will  assist  as  soon  as 
ready. 

Commencing  at  head  of  rigging  and  working  toward  end,  packers 
not  engaged  will  place  blankets  on  aparejos.  (Sec.  19).  Then  two  or 
three  packers  will  step  in  rear  of  rigging  and  place  the  blankets  under 
coronas. 

Those  packers  not  thus  engaged  remove  the  cargo  covers  (see  sec. 
73),  fold  and  place  them  in  front  of  rigging  as  directed.  In  the 
meantime  the  herd  guard  has  brought  in  the  animals,  if  on  herd,  and 
the  animals  are  tied  up  at  the  rigging.  (Sec.  56.)  Packers  then  sad- 
dle their  riding  animals. 

Breakfast  should  now  be  ready.  Each  packer  should  endeavor  to 
be  first  at  breakfast  and  first  to  put  on  an  aparejo  after  breakfast. 

PUTTING   ON    THE    APAREJOS. 

SEC.  60.  The  animals  are  either  at  the  rigging  or  at  the  picket  line. 

If  at  rigging,  remove  the  blind  from  the  last  animal  and  place  it 
on  the  next  to  the  last.  Untie  the  last  animal  and  lead  him  around  in 
front  of  rigging  until  his  number  or  design  is  reached. 

For  convenience  the  packers  should  work  in  pairs.  The  mate 
assists  in  getting  the  animals  up  to  the  aparejo. 

While  one  packer  is  blinding  the  animal  the  other  puts  on  the 
corona.  After  blinding  the  animal,  the  first  packer  steps  to  off  side  to 
receive  blanket  and  assist  in  adjusting  it  in  place;  or,  if  before  the 
mate  can  get  into  position,  he  is  quick  enough  to  himself  put  the 
corona  on,  then  his  mate  steps  to  "off"  side  to  receive  the  blanket. 
One  packer  must  not  wait  for  the  other  to  do  what  he  can  do  first. 

The  aparejo  having  been  properly  cinched  on  the  animal,  the  halter 
shank  is  tied  up  (sec.  57),  and  the  animal  is  led  to  the  cargo  and  tied 
to  the  load  assigned  him  (sec.  58). 

If  animals  are  tied  to  picket  line,  to  put  the  aparejos  on,  commence 
at  end,  untying  the  animals  and  leading  them  to  their  aparejos  as 
before,  and  work  toward  the  "bell." 

When  "bell"  animal  is  removed  and  tied,  the  blacksmith  takes  up 
picket  line  and  places  it  on  load  indicated  by  cargador. 

Packers  should  not  count  how  many  aparejos  they  are  getting  on 
in  excess  of  another  set.  The  pack  master  is  taking  notice  and  will 
give  due  credit. 

When  an  animal  is  tied  to  his  load,  do  not  stand  waiting  for  the 
mate  to  bring  the  next  animal  around  to  his  rigging.  Time  is  not 
to  be  wasted  in  such  a  manner.  Move  and  assist  him. 

PUTTING    ON    THE    CARGO.0 

SEC.  61.  The  mules,  having  received  their  aparejos,  and  having 
been  tied  to  their  respective  loads,  the  packers  begin  at  once  to  put 
on  the  loads. 

Two  sets  of  packers  work  at  each  end  of  cargo,  working  toward 
center.  First  ready,  first  choice  of  sides.  Packers  will  soon  learn 

°For  cargo,  see  Glossary. 


MANUAL    OF    PACK    TRANSPORTATION.  137 

which  is  the  choice  side.  Do  not  unnecessarily  move  an  animal 
around,  causing  loss  of  time. 

Blind  the  animal,  the  mate  in  the  meantime  putting  on  the  sling 
rope.  Pick  up  pack  and  place  it  in  position  on  "off"  side,  mate 
putting  up  the  near"  pack  and  tying  the  sling.  The  "off"  packer 
steps  quickly  around  and  grasps  the  end  of  lash  rope.  Swing  it 
away  back,  as  in  so  doing  time  is  saved  and  labor  with  it.  Get  in 
position  and  wait  for  near  packer  to  pass  the  loop  of  the  rope  over. 
Work  quick  and  true,  and  above  all  things  keep  the  mouth  shut,  for 
no  packer  has  time  to  listen. 

As  each  mule  is  loaded  he  is  turned  loose. 

When  cargo  is  nearly  loaded,  or  before,  if  opportunity  offers,  the 
pack  master  will  detail  a  packer  to  assist  the  cook  to  load,  the  kitchen 
mules  being  tied  conveniently  for  the  purpose. 

Before  loading,  but  after  the  rigging  is  on,  the  pack  master  causes 
the  "bell"  animal  to  be  tied  in  some  convenient  place  in  as  open 
ground  as  possible,  so  that  the  mules,  as  they  are  loaded  and  turned 
loose,  will  remain  in  the  vicinity. 

The  blacksmith  will  keep  loaded  animals  from  straying  away,  and 
the  cook,  when  ready,  will  assist.  Each  keeps  count  of  the  animals 
as  they  are  turned  loose,  prevents  them  from  lying  down  or  straying 
away,  and  reports  any  accident  to  the  pack  master. 

LEAVING  THE  PARK  OR  CAMP  GROUND. 

SEC.  62.  Loads  being  on,  the  pack  master  calls  out  "Bell!"  The 
cook,  riding  quickly,  unties  the  bell"  animal  and  leads  out  in  direc- 
tion indicated  by  pack  master. 

Cargador  and  blacksmith  count  the  animals  as  they  string  out, 
cargador  reporting  quickly  if  any  are  missing. 

Time  allowed. — Twenty  minutes  for  getting  blankets  and  canvas 
and  riding  animals  saddled,  fifteen  minutes  for  breakfast,  twenty 
minutes  for  rigging,  and  twenty  minutes  for  cargo.  Total,  one  hour 
and  fifteen  minutes.  It  can  be  done  in  less  time  with  a  well-organized 
crew. 

3.  DUTIES  OF  PACKERS  ON  THE  MARCH. 

SEC.  63.  In  open  country. — On  leaving  camp  packers  must  string 
out  so  as  to  take  in  five  packs,  one  packer  riding  opposite  every  fifth 
animal,  and  about  30  yards  from  near  side  of  train,  dust  or  conditions 
of  country  permitting.  Each  packer  should  not  only  watch  the  five 
packs  in  front,  but  also  those  in  rear,  as  far  back  as  his  eyes  can 
detect  whether  a  pack  is  riding  straight  or  not.  Circumstances  per- 
mitting, packers  should  ride  in  the  order  of  mate  following  mate. 

SEC.  64.  On  bad  and  narrow  trails. — Packers  must  ride  on  trail  one 
behind  each  fifth  animal.  If  a  pack  needs  attention,  the  packer  in 
rear  calls  out  to  packer  ahead,  who  will  assist  him  in  catching  animal 
and  straightening  its  load. 

While  the  two  packers  are  thus  engaged,  those  in  rear  ride  forward 
and  take  their  places  in  the  train. 

When  the  two  packers  have  straightened  load  and  turned  animal 
loose,  they  will  immediately  fall  in,  in  places  made  vacant  by  those 
who  have  gone  ahead. 


138  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

SEC.  65.  Up  and  down  a  mountain. — In  traveling  up  or  down  a 
mountain  a  pack  master  should  have  one  or  two  packers  with  him  at 
the  head  of  train.  He  will  ride  far  enough  in  advance,  when  nature  of 
country  indicates  danger,  to  enable  him  to  station  either  one  or  both 
packers,  as  emergency  requires,  to  keep  animals  in  trail  and  guard 
against  accidents. 

The  same  rules  apply  as  in  the  case  of  bad  or  narrow  trails,  though 
when  possible  packers  wall  work  on  side  of  train. 

Be  especially  vigilant  in  watching  the  condition  of  packs,  giving 
prompt  attention  thereto  when  needed. 

SEC.  66.  In  crossing  streams,  either  fording  or  swimming. — Packers 
must  always  be  stationed  on  the  downstream  side  and  at  the  most 
dangerous  points  of  crossing,  keeping  the  animals  well  up  arid  clear 
of  obstacles  that  may  endanger  their  footing. 

If  ford  is  such  that  animals  have  to  swim,  packers  should  remain 
on  lower  side,  likewise  keeping  animals  well  up  and  riding  close  up 
to  the  weakest  swimmers. 

HOW  TO  CATCH  A  PACK  ANIMAL  WHEN  HIS  LOAD  NEEDS  ATTENTION. 

SEC.  67.  A  packer,  noticing  a  pack  that  needs  attention,  will  call 
out  to  his  mate  the  name  of  the  animal.  Both  packers  will  then  ride 
far  enough  in  advance  of  the  pack  animal  to  gain  time  to  tie  their 
riding  animals  before  the  pack  animal  comes  up. 

Let  one  packer  cross  the  trail  and  the  other  remain  on  the  near  side. 
They  should  keep  far  enough  away  from  trail  to  keep  therein  any 
that  show  a  disposition  to  break  out.  When  the  pack  animal 
approaches  they  will  close  in;  one  will  stand  squarely  in  front  of  the 
animal — never  on  the  side — reach  out  and  take  him  by  the  halter,  and 
lead  him  out  on  near  side  of  train. 

Blind  the  animal,  loosen  the  lash  rope,  and  straighten  the  load  as 
quickly  as  possible.  Do  not  detain  him  a  moment  longer  than  is 
necessary.  The  animal  knows  how  far  he  has  to  travel  to  catch  up 
and  work  back  to  place  in  the  train.  Packers  should  bear  this  in 
mind. 

Eager  to  get  back  into  place  in  the  train,  the  animal  will  become 
unmanageable  and  be  apt  to  throw  his  load.  Should  the  animal  break 
away  before  his  load  is  straightened  he  is  certain  to  throw  it,  and 
then,  running  through  the  train,  dragging  the  lash  rope  after  him,  he 
will  scare  others  in  the  train  and  perhaps  cause  other  packs  to  fall  off. 

The  animal  will  stand  a  reasonable  length  of  time,  but  no  longer. 
The  animal  having  once,  broken  away,  the  "bell"  animal  has  to  be 
stopped,  the  animal  caught,  led  back,  and  its  load  put  on;  three  pack- 
ers are  needed,  one  to  hold  him,  while  the  others  put  on  the  load. 

Certainly  no  good  packer  will  cause  such  trouble  and  delay. 

Packers  can  not  be  termed  first  class  if  loads  fall  off  while  traveling; 
attention  must  constantly  be  given  to  animals  and  their  packs. 

HOW  TO  TIGHTEN  A  LOAD  AND  INDICATE  IT  HAS  BEEN  TIGHTENED. 

SEC.  68.  The  "off"  packer  releases  the  "top"  rope  (fig.  40)  and 
passes  it  over  the  animal's  neck  to  near  side;  loosens  the  "front" 
rope,  drawing  the  slack  toward  him,  and  steps  to  center  of  aparejo. 

The  "near"  packer  steps  to  rear  and  pulls  on  "rear"  rope  so  as 
to  loosen  it,  then  steps  to  center  of  aparejo  and  loosens  the  "marking" 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  139 

rope  (M,  fig.  41) — that  is,  pulls  from  rear  to  front  on  rope  at  front 
corner  of  boot  and  draws  it  from  under  the  standing  rope  (R,  fig.  41). 

The  "off"  packer  pulls  on  the  running  rope  so  as  to  slacken  the 
tension  at  the  cincha  hook. 

The  hitch  is  now  loosened  throughout. 

The  "near"  packer  adjusts  the  load  in  its  proper  place,  and  the 
two  packers  then  begin  and  tighten  the  hitch,  taking  up  slack  as  pre- 
scribed in  paragraphs  4  to  8,  section  32. 

To  indicate  that  the  load  has  been  tightened,  however,  the  follow- 
ing variation  is  made  in  the  hitch : 

The  "near"  packer  passes  the  bight  of  the  running  or  marking 
rope  under  the  standing  rope,  as  usual  (R,  fig.  41),  but  does  not  bring 
it  around  front  corner  of  boot.  He  allows  the  marking  rope  to  drop 
down  to  center  of  boot;  then  with  the  right  hand  he  receives  the  slack 
as  usual,  in  rear  of  cincha.  The  hitch  is  then  finished  as  usual;  or  the 
top  rope  may  be  passed  to  rear  of  near  pack  in  finishing  the  hitch; 
this  latter  method  is  preferred  by  some  pack  masters. 

HOW    TO    TEACH    SADDLE    MULES    TO    STAND. 

SEC.  69.  For  this  purpose,  when  in  bivouac  and  using  a  picket  line, 
the  riding  mules  should  aways  be  tied  at  the  opposite  end  of  the 
line  from  the  bell  horse;  this  rule  should  be  followed  when  stables 
are  provided.  In  preparation  for  the  day's  march  after  "saddling 
up,  tie  the  animals  as  far  away  from  the  bell  horse  as  opportunity 
oners.  On  the  trail  do  not  endeavor  to  be  always  rear  the  "bell;" 
and  when  necessary  to  catch  a  pack  mule,  when  his  load  needs  balanc- 
ing, tie  the  riding  mule  with  the  shank  of  the  bridle  rein,  when  other 
opportunities  are  not  convenient,  to  either  hind  leg  above  the  hock;  in 
doing  so  bring  the  mule's  head  well  around  so  that  should  he  endeavor 
to  travel  he  will  "mill,"  or  travel  in  a  circle.  Should  the  animal  get 
loose  and  endeavor  to  overtake  the  "bell, "  do  not  maltreat  him  when 
caught  as  he  will  become  more  difficult  to  catch  on  the  next  occasion; 
instead,  pet  the  animal — that  is,  treat  him  kindly.  A  crust  of  bread 
or  a  little  sugar  is  a  great  aid  to  teach  the  mule  to  become  attached 
to  its  rider.  In  time  the  animal  will  show  a  disposition  to  wait  for 
its  master,  who,  in  turn,  should  show  appreciation  by  patting  the 
animal's  neck  or  other  kind  attention.  Kindness  will  teach  the  riding 
mule  to  wait  for  its  master  or  approach  him  when  called  for. 

SIGNAL  CODE. 

SEC.  70.  When  desiring  to  slacken  gait  of  pack  train  the  pack  master 
raises  either  hand  above  the  shoulder,  fingers  extended. 

To  increase  the  gait  he  raises  the  hat  vertically. 

Requiring  the  assistance  of  two  packers  at  head  of  train  he  waves 
the  hat  in  front  of  him  from  side  to  side  in  such  manner  as  to  be 
distinctly  seen. 

Requiring  the  assistance  of  all  packers  but  one,  driving  in  rear,  at 
head  of  train  he  waves  the  hat  in  circular  motion  over  his  head. 

When  a  halt  is  necessary  he  will  extend  both  arms  sideways;  or, 
"bell"  animal  will  be  led  to  one  side  of  trail  and  brought  to  a  halt; 
packers  then  ride  quickly  to  head  of  train  and  give  attention  to  packs, 
the  packer  in  rear  riding  quickly  forward  keeping  the  animals  well 
rounded  up. 


140  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

4.  HOW  TO  PARK  (UNLOAD)  A  PACK  TRAIN 

OUTLINE     OF     DUTIES. 

SEC.  71.  A  pack  master  in  parking  his  train  will  give  the  highest 
ground  to  cargo;  next  to  the  cargo  comes  the  rigging,  and  then  the 
picket  line. 

The  camp  is  arranged  so  that  the  kitchen  is  near  the  cargo  and 
convenient  to  water.  The  cargo  is  formed  in  a  double  line  as  de- 
scribed in  section  53. 

The  ground  being  selected  for  cargo,  the  cargador  should  place  the 
first  lash  rope.  Placing  it  in  the  middle  of  the  ground  selected  its 
position  indicates  how  the  cargo  should  run. 

As  the  loads  are  removed  by  the  packers  the  animals  are  turned 
loose,  being  kept  in  the  vicinity  by  the  herders. 

If  the  animals  are  to  be  at  once  tied  to  picket  line,  the  latter  is 
now  stretched.  The  loads  being  removed,  the  animals  are  caught  in 
succession  and  the  aparejos  taken  off,  as  described  in  section  72.  The 
aparejos  are  placed  by  the  cargador,  as  described  in  section  54. 

If  the  animals  are  to  be  herded  at  once  for  grazing,  they  are  then 
sent  out  under  charge  of  the  herd  guard.  Ordinarily  two  packers 
are  detailed  daily  on  this  duty.  The  cargador  then  has  certain  pack- 
ers detailed  to  assist  in  cleaning  the  coronas.  (Sec.  76.)  The  cargo  is 
covered  as  described  in  section  73;  the  rigging  as  in  section  74.  The 
picket  line  is  stretched  as  in  section  75. 

HOW  PACK  ANIMALS  SHOULD  BE  LED  TO  CARGADOR,  FOR  CONVENIENCE 
IN     TAKING     OFF     THE     RIGGING. 

SEC.  72.  Packers  catch  the  animals,  undo  the  halter  shanks  (see 
sec.  57),  and  lead  the  animals  in  single  file  to  the  cargador,  who  re- 
moves all  the  aparejos  and  places  them  in  the  order  desired. 

Just  before  reaching  the  cargador  with  an  animal,  the  packer 
uncinches  the  aparejo,  and,  removing  any  canvas  which  may  be  under 
the  cincha,  places  it  on  the  ground  lengthwise,  in  front  of  an  aparejo 
already  in  place. 

The  aparejo  being  uncinched  (sec.  43),  the  mule's  halter  shank  is 
passed  to  the  cargador,  and  the  packer  passes  to  rear  of  the  animal. 

Each  mule  in  turn  is  then  brought  to  the  cargador,  those  in  rear 
closing  up  as  the  line  of  rigging  advances.  No  packer  should  be  per- 
mitted to  lead  in  ahead  of  the  animals  in  his  front;  he  should  close 
up  and  await  his  turn. 

If  the  animals  are  to  be  sent  out  on  herd  at  once,  the  cargador, 
after  removing  an  aparejo,  unsnaps  the  mule's  halter  shank  and  turns 
him  loose.  Halter  shank  should  never  be  thrown  on  ground  in  front 
of  rigging,  but  on  top  or  in  rear  of  rigging.  If  not  herded,  the  mules 
are  tied  at  once  to  the  picket  line. 

HOW  TO  COVER  CARGO  AND  TIE  DOWN. 

SEC.  73.  Before  placing  covers  on  cargo,  coil  up  ends  of  lash  ropes, 
and  place  the  coils  on  top  of  their  respective  loads.  (Sec.  53.)  The 
ropes  of  the  two  packs  at  each  end,  however,  should  be  left  entirely 
uncoiled,  the  load  resting  merely  on  the  lash  rope  cincha.  These 
ropes  are  used  for  securing  the  covers  on  top  of  the  cargo. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  141 

Unfold  the  covers  (see  sec.  79)  and  bring  them  lengthwise  over 
cargo,  lapping  them  over  one  another,  and  allowing  ends  of  covers  to 
come  over  ends  of  cargo,  down  to  the  ground.  In  doing  this,  notice 
the  direction  of  wind,  and  lap  covers  so  that  end  may  not  be  raised 
by  the  wind. 

In  covering  cargo  four  packers  are  needed,  in  order  to  work  to  the 
best  advantage.  Two  work  at  each  end,  facing  one  another  on  oppo- 
site sides  of  the  cargo.  Each  coils  one  of  the  corner  lash  ropes, 
and  passes  or  throws  the  same  down  along  the  center  of  the  cargo, 
lengthwise;  working  from  ends  toward  center;  each  pair  of  packers 
will  then  exchange  ropes,  pass  them  into  cincha  hooks  at  the  sides 
and  bottom  of  the  cargo,  and  repeat  until  center  is  reached.  Then 
secure  the  ropes  at  the  top,  or  at  the  last  hook,  as  the  length  of  the 
rope  determines.  The  ropes  thus  form  a  lacing  over  the  cargo. 

HOW  TO  COVER  RIGGING  AND  TIE  DOWN. 

SEC.  74.  Two  packers  at  each  end  of  rigging,  working  toward  cen- 
ter, unfold  covers  (sec.  78)  and  place  them  lengthwise  along  the  line 
of  rigging.  In  doing  so  overlap  the  cover  adjoining,  so  that  its  end 
may  be  engaged  in  tying  down  on  top  of  aparejo  selected. 

For  securing  covers  in  place  sling  or  lair  ropes  are  used  when  the 
animals  are  tied  to  picket  line,  halter  shanks  when  the  animals  are 
on  herd. 

In  the  first  case,  take  a  sling  or  lair  rope  and  pass  an  end  of  it  from 
rear  to  front  under  the  last  aparejo  on  the  line.  This  may  readily 
be  done  by  "  whipping"  the  rope  over  and  under  the  aparejo. 

Then  on  top  of  the  aparejo  fasten  the  end  by  a  slipknot  to  the 
running  part  of  the  rope  and  draw  snug,  so  that  the  knot  will  be  at 
the  collar  of  the  aparejo. 

Proceeding  to  the  third  aparejo,  pass  the  other  end  of  the  rope 
under  it  from  rear  to  front  as  before;  then  bring  the  end  up  and, 
passing  it  under  and  over  the  standing  part,  draw  taut,  so  that  the 
intersection  of  the  ropes  will  be  at  the  collar  of  the  aparejo.  Take  a 
similar  turn  of  the  rope  around  the  sixth  aparejo,  and  so  on. 

Lengthen  the  rope  as  needed  by  additional  lair  or  sling  ropes. 

One  rigging  cover  extends  over  ten  aparejos.  At  every  tenth 
aparejo  the  rope  must  consequently  be  made  fast,  so  as  to  catch  the 
covers  where  they  lap.  Thus  the  rope  is  made  fast  at  the  third,  sixth, 
tenth,  thirteenth,  etc.,  aparejo.  (Fig.  108.) 

In  the  second  case,  when  the  animals  are  on  herd  the  covers  are 
secured  by  means  of  halter  shanks.  Pass  the  snap  end  under  the 
aparejo  from  rear  to  front  and  tie  the  ends  together  by  a  square  knot 
at  the  collar.  As  in  the  first  instance  "whip"  the  shank  to  more 
readily  get  it  over  and  under  the  aparejo. 

HOW  TO  STRETCH  A  PICKET  LINE. 

SEC.  75.  For  securing  the  ends  of  picket  line,  if  other  conveniences 
are  not  available,  sink  what  is  termed  a  "dead  man"  for  each  end 
and,  if  necessary,  one  also  at  the  middle. 

To  do  this  cut  two  or  three  pieces  of  wood  about  18  inches  long. 
At  the  ends  and  middle  of  the  picket  line  dig  holes  about  18  inches 
long,  12  inches  wide,  and  18  inches  deep,  or  as  deep  as  the  nature  of 


142  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

the  ground  may  require,  the  length  of  the  holes  being  perpendicular 
to  the  direction  of  the  picket  line. 

For  each  "dead  man"  take  a  sling  rope,  tie  its  ends  together,  and 
give  a  single  twist  on  rope  and  bring  the  loop  ends  together;  this 
causes  the  folds  to  lie  evenly.  Twist  again  and  bring  the  loop  ends 
together  as  before. 

Now  hold  the  folds  of  rope  in  the  left  hand  at  opposite  point,  or 
part  where  ends  of  rope  had  been  tied;  at  opposite  part  grasp  the 
folds  with  the  right  hand  and  bring  the  folds  to  the  middle  finger  of 
the  left  hand  and  receive  them. 

Now  introduce  the  "dead  man"  through  the  folds  of  rope  made  by 
this  formation,  and  allow  the  folds  of  rope  held  in  the  palm  of  the 
left  hand  to  fall  over  the  folds  of  rope  held  by  the  middle  finger,  and 
draw  taut  on  "dead  man,"  and  the  "dead  man"  is  thus  caught  in  a 
slipknot.  As  in  the  case,  as  seen  in  fig.  82. 

rlace  the  "dead  man"  in  the  hole  dug  for  it,  and  keeping  the  end 
of  the  sling  rope  out,  fill  the  hole  and  tamp. 

The  picket  line  is  then  stretched  by  being  attached  to  these  sling 
ropes. 

As  facilitating  the  tightening  of  the  rope,  the  following  is  a  con- 
venient method  of  stretching  the  picket  line: 

If  the  picket  line  consists  of  a  single  rope,  fasten  one  end  to  the 
sling  rope  of  one  of  the  "  dead  men;"  bring  the  other  end  through  the 
loop  at  the  center  "dead  man."  About  10  or  15  feet  from  this  end 
form  a  bowline  knot  on  the  rope;  then  pass  the  end  through  the  loop 
of  the  sling  rope  at  the  last  "dead  man;"  bring  it  back  and  pass  it 
through  the  loop  of  the  bowline. 

By  drawing  on  the  end  all  slack  is  now  readily  taken  in,  and  the 
end  is  then  secured. 

If  the  picket  line  consists  of  two  ropes,  fasten  each  to  one  of  the 
extreme  "  dead  men;"  take  an  end  of  one,  pass  it  through  the  loop  at 
center  "dead  man,"  and  form  a  bowline  knot  in  the  end.  Then  pass 
the  free  end  of  the  other  rope  through  the  loop  of  this  bowline,  draw 
taut,  and  secure  as  before. 

Obviously  the  same  method  may  be  employed  when  the  ends  of  the 
picket  line  are  attached  to  other  forms  of  holdfasts  than  the  one  here 
considered. 

HOW  TO  CLEAN  CORONAS. 

SEC.  76.  For  this  purpose  a  table  knife  is  ordinarily  employed,  and 
for  convenience  a  provision  is  supplied  on  selected  aparejo.  This  is 
done  by  cutting  a  slit  between  the  two  inside  lines  of  stitching  on  the 
"near"  side  of  "front"  facing,  just  wide  enough  to  permit  the  blade 
of  knife  to  pass  downwardly;  the  handle  of  knife  will  hold  it  in  posi- 
tion. Two  or  more  knives  may  thus  be  provided  for  cleaning  pur- 
poses. 

Immediately  after  the  aparejos  have  been  taken  off  the  packmaster 
or  cargador  details  certain  packers  to  assist  in  cleaning  coronas. 

Commencing  at  each  end,  spread  corona,  canvas  side  up,  and  allow 
it  to  fall  on  either  side  of  aparejo,  and  with  knife  clean  the  canvas 
thoroughly.  Before  cleaning  corona  place  corona  on  top  of  aparejo 
adjoining,  and  clean  the  canvas  and  dock  of  crupper  thoroughly;  then 
replace  corona  and  proceed  and  clean,  as  explained. 


MANUAL   OF    PACK    TRANSPORTATION.  143 

Should  the  corona  be  wet,  leave  the  canvas  side  exposed  to  dry;  in 
due  time  fold  coronas,  cover,  and  tie  down.  (See  sec.  74.) 

HOW   TO   FOLD    PACK   COVERS. 

SEC.  77.  The  operation  of.  folding  a  pack  cover  is  similar  to  that 
provided  for  the  folding  of  a  pack  blanket,  with  this  exception,  that 
the  pack  cover  is  square.  (Sec.  18.) 

HOW   TO   FOLD   RIGGING   COVERS. 

SEC.  78.  For  this  purpose  two  packers  are  ordinarily  employed; 
each  packer  takes  hold  of  one  end  at  corners,  folds  and  brings  the 
corners  together,  and  holds  corners  with  one  hand;  the  packer  at 
one  end  holds  the  corners  with  the  right  hand,  while  packer  at  oppo- 
site end  holds  corners  with  the  left  hand. 

Now,  with  the  free  hand,  each  packer  takes  hold  of  the  folded 
corner,  and  bracing  from  each  other  they  draw  taut  on  cover,  to  cause 
the  folds  to  lay  evenly.  Then  one  packer  lays  his  end  on  the  ground, 
while  his  mate  gives  a  quick  swing  backward,  so  as  to  cause  the  oppo- 
site end  to  come  quickly  toward  him,  and  places  end  on  top  of  oppo- 
site end. 

Now  fold  one  end,  and  fold  opposite  end  on  top  of  fold  thus  formed 
so  as  to  have  folds  of  equal  length;  or  each  end  may  be  brought 
together  and  folded  as  may  be  determined. 

HOW  TO  FOLD  CARGO  COVERS. 

SEC.  79.  For  this  purpose  two  packers  are  employed;  each  packer 
takes  hold  of  one  corner  on  the  same  side  of  cover  and  folds  within 
the  last  section  or  strip ;  now  fold  this  odd  section  or  strip  on  top  of 
fold  already  formed,  then  fold  once  more  and  draw  taut.  Now  rold 
one  end  to  near  center  of  its  length,  and  fold  opposite  end  on  top  of 
fold  thus  formed,  or  as  conditions  may  require. 

HOW   TO   FOLD   FEED    COVERS. 

SEC.  80.  The  operation  of  folding  feed  covers  is  entirely  similar  to 
that  prescribed  for  rigging  covers. 

In  preparation  for  the  day's  march,  pack,  rigging,  cargo,  and  feed 
covers  so  folded  are  placed  lengthwise  in  front  of  rigging  selected. 

In  the  operation  an  canvas  should  be  well  shaken  in  order  that  dust 
and  other  matter  may  fall  therefrom.  In  no  case  must  folded  covers, 
when  placed  on  the  aparejo,  reach  within  six  inches  of  the  boots  or 
ends  of  the  aparejo,  or  must  the  folds  be  wider  than  the  width  of  the 
aparejo. 


CHAPTER  V. 

MARCHES  AND  LOADS. 
1.  WHAT  MAY  BE  REQUIRED  OF  THE  PACK  MULE. 

SEC.  81.  Under  ordinary  conditions,  the  pack  mule  carrying  a  load 
of  250  pounds  will  travel  from  20  to  25  miles  per  day,  and  maintain 
a  rate  of  speed  of  4  J  to  5  miles  per  hour. 

With  occasional  days  of  rest  ne  may  be  expected  to  perform  this 
amount  of  work  steadily;  and  this,  too,  without  the  aid  of  grain  or 
hay. 

It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  except  on  extraordinary 
occasions  pack  mules  should  never  be  tied  to  a  picket  line,  but  should 
be  herded  as  much  as  possible.  In  bivouac  they  should  be  taken  to 
graze  at  night  as  well  as  day,  packers  being  detailed  as  herd  guard. 

The  "bell"  horse  being  hobbled  or  picketed  in  the  vicinity,  there  is 
no  danger  of  the  mules  stampeding,  as  they  will  not  leave  the  "bell. " 

If  allowed  to  graze,  mules  will  always  keep  in  average  condition, 
and  on  nutritious  grasses  will  stand  a  twelve  months'  campaign  and 
keep  fat. 

SEC.  82.  Mountainous  country. — In  rough  and  mountainous  coun- 
try, the  pack  mule  will  carry  the  same  load  (250  pounds),  and  travel 
from  10  to  15  miles  per  day.  He  should  not,  however,  be  forced 
when  traveling  up  or  down  a  mountain,  unless  the  occasion  is  very 
urgent.  Uphill  work  is  hard  on  man  and  beast. 

SEC.  83.  Forced  inarches. — In  forced  marches  the  pack  animals 
should  not  be  loaded  in  excess  of  200  pounds. 

If  traveling  with  cavalry,  the  pack  mule  may  not  be  able  to  spurt 
off  at  a  10-mile  gait,  but  he  will  be  pushing  the  horse  before  30  miles 
are  covered,  and  he  has  the  horse  at  his  mercy  in  a  march  of  75  to  100 
miles  in  twenty-four  hours. 

The  following  instances,  out  of  a  great  many,  may  be  briefly  men- 
tioned : 

In  the  campaign  of  1881,  under  Colonel  Buell,  Fifteenth  Infantry, 
against  Chiefs  Victoria  and  Nana,  of  the  Warm  Spring  tribe  of 
Apaches,  a  company  of  Indian  scouts  and  one  pack  train  made  a 
march  of  85  miles  in  twelve  hours,  loaded  200  pounds  to  the  pack 
animal. 

Later,  in  pursuing  Indians  of  the  same  tribe,  a  company  of  Indian 
scouts  and  one  pack  train  marched  from  old  Fort  Cummings  to  Fort 
Seldon,  on  the  Rio  Grande,  about  60  miles,  from  sunrise  to  sunset ;  then 
went  by  rail  to  Fort  Craig,  N.  Mex.,  loaded  250  pounds  to  the  mule; 
marched  across  the  valley,  some  30  miles,  to  the  San  Mateo  Range; 
struck  the  trail  of  Chief  Nana  and  party;  and,  without  making  an 
all-night  camp,  followed  the  hostiles  into  old  Mexico,  south  of  the 
Hatchet  Mountains. 

This  was  a  running  fight  the  entire  way.  A  distance  of  about  300 
miles  was  covered  in  about  four  days. 

During  the  "Loco"  outbreak  from  San  Carlos  Agency,  Ariz.,  in 
1882,  one  company  of  scouts  and  one  pack  train,  loaded  200  pounds 
to  the  mule,  made  a  forced  march  of  280  miles  in  three  days. 

144 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


145 


During  the  Garza  campaign  on  the  Rio  Grande  frontier,  in  Texas, 
in  1891  and  1892,  a  troop  of  the  Third  Cavalry  and  a  part  of  one 
pack  train  marched  108  miles  in  sixteen  hours;  the  mules  were  loaded 
250  pounds  to  the  mule. 

In  the  same  campaign  another  troop,  with  part  of  a  pack  train, 
marched  104  miles  in  a  night  and  part  of  the  following  dav. 

In  another  instance,  in  the  same  campaign,  a  pack  train  made  90 
miles  in  less  than  twenty-four  hours,  the  animals  carrying  loads  of 
250  pounds.  After  such  marches  the  mules  were  given  twelve  to 
twenty-four  hours'  rest  to  regain  their  normal  condition. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  pack  animals  should  be  kept  in  con- 
dition by  constant  exercise,  for  if  fat  such  marches  will  quickly  kill 
them. 

2.  GAITS. 

SEC.  84.  When  moving  at  a  slow  rate  of  speed  the  walk  is  the  ordi- 
nary gait  of  the  pack  mule. 

As  the  rate  of  travel  is  increased,  however,  a  trained  pack  mule, 
instead  of  quickening  the  walk,  falls  into  an  amble  or  "fox"  trot. 
This  is  for  the  reason  that  an  extended  walk  or  a  " jogging"  trot 
would  transmit  motion  to  the  load,  which  would  greatly  inconvenience 
the  animal.  He  has,  accordingly,  learned  to  acquire  the  gait  which 
enables  him  to  move  to  the  best  advantage  without  rocking  his  load. a 
At  this  ambling  gait  he  is  able  to  cover  from  5  to  6  miles  an  hour 
without  undue  fatigue. 

SEC.  85.— 

3.  Table  showing  loads  and  rates  of  travel  considered  practicable  for  a  well-organized 

and  seasoned  pack  train. 


•  Weight  of  load. 

Maximum 
rate  of 
travel  per 
hour. 

Number  of 
miles  per 
day. 

Number  of 
days  con- 
tinuous 
travel. 

Two  hundred  pounds          

Miles. 

8 

25 

7 

Do 

7 

40 

10 

Do  

6 

50 

7 

Do..                      

6 

100 

3 

Do 

5 

25 

365 

Two  hundred  and  fifty  pounds 

g 

25 

3 

Do 

7 

40 

7 

Do 

6 

100 

1 

Do... 

6 

50 

5 

Do  

6 

25 

30 

Do 

6 

20 

60 

Do 

5 

100 

2 

Do  

5 

50 

10 

Do 

5 

25 

60 

Do 

5 

20 

90 

Three  hundred  pounds  

5 

75 

1 

Do     .              

5 

50 

7 

Do 

5 

25 

30 

Do  

5 

20 

60 

Three  hundred  and  fifty  pounds  

4 

20 

30 

Four  hundred  pounds 

4 

15 

30 

a  To  acquire  this  ambling  gait  a  young  pack  train  should  be  taught  to  travel  5  miles  an  hour  and  under  no 
circumstances  should  mules  be  allowed  to  straggle  out,  i.  e.,  keep  them  in  close  order,  one  mule  following  the 
trail  or  step  of  the  other.  After  a  few  practice  marches  they  readily  acquire  this  ambling  gait.  Occasionally 
one  or  two  mules  in  a  train  seem  to  have  difficulty  in  acquiring  this  ambling  gait.  Do  not  overload  such 
animal  in  the  endeavor  to  teach  him;  instead  place  the  cincha  sufficiently  forward  on  the  aparejo  so  that 
the  elbow  will  rub  against  the  cincha  during  travel;  as  soon  as  the  elbow  becomes  sore  the  mule,  to  escape 
the  cincha,  will  take  short  and  quick  steps  in  order  to  keep  his  place  in  line  and  thus  readily  learns  this 
ambling  gait.  Do  not  continue  the  forward  use  of  the  cincha  longer  than  necessary. 


24758—10 10 


146  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

4.  THE    ENDURANCE    OF    THE    PACK    MULE  UNDER    PROPER 

CONDITIONS. 

SEC.  86.  As  a  prerequisite  he  must  not  be  less  than  14.1  and  not 
over  15  hands  high,  of  blocky  build,  weighing  from  950  to  1,025  pounds, 
sound  in  body  and  limbs,  age  from  4  to  6. 

Head  well  formed  and  intelligent  looking,  broad  between  the  eyes, 
eyes  clear,  large,  and  full;  ears  flexible;  teeth  and  tongue  free  from 
blemishes;  neck  full  and  inclined  to  arch;  withers  low  and  broad; 
back  short  and  straight;  belly  large  and  deep;  dock  low  and  stiff; 
legs  straight,  standing  well  apart  at  front  and  rear,  the  former  indi- 
cating good  lung  power,  the  latter  full  in  buttocks;  the  hoofs  sound, 
broad,  and  full. 

The  mule  should  have  a  pack  saddle  that  will  protect  the  body 
from  all  manner  of  loading — that  is,  capable  of  being  adjusted  so  as 
to  support  heavy  loading  when  necessary  without  injury  to  the 
withers  and  with  a  proper  bearing  surface  on  either  side  of  the  ani- 
mal's backbone.  For  such  a  purpose  there  is  no  form  of  pack  saddle 
that  has  ever  been  devised  comparable  to  the  aparejo. 

As  an  instance  of  the  adaptability  of  the  aparejo  to  carry  heavy 
and  unwieldly  loading,  reference  to  figure  110  will  show  what  can  be 
accomplished  by  the  aid  of  the  aparejo  and  expert  packer.  This  cage 
mount  of  naval  rapid-fire  gun,  weighing  540  pounds,  was  taken  from 
the  gunboat  Quiros  (Captain  Walker,  U.  S.  Navy)  and  carried  3 
miles  inland,  island  of  Jolo,  P.  I.,  and  back  again  on  the  same  mule 
by  order  of  Col.  H.  L.  Scott. 

To  accomplish  this  feat  Assistant  Chief  Packer  Mora  E.  Smith 
made  a  wooden  frame  to  fit  over  the  aparejo  as  a  base  on  which  to 
rest  the  cage  and  lashed  the  frame  to  the  aparejo.  The  cage  was 
then  lifted  onto  the  mule  and  secured  with  lash  rope.  Such  a  feat 
could  not  be  accomplished  by  the  use  of  the  crosstree  or  Moore  pack 
saddle. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


147 


PIG.  110. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


ORGANIZATION. 


SEC.  87.— 


1.    Usual  organization  and  equipment  of  a  pack  train. 


PERSONNEL. 


Pack  master 
Cargador. . . 
Blacksmith. . 

Cook 

Packers. . 


ANIMALS. 


Bell  horse 1 

Pack  mules 50 

Riding  mules 14 

EQUIPMENT. 

Aparejos,  proper 50 

Head  halters  and  shanks 65 

Blankets,  pack 50 

Lash  ropes  with  cincha  and  hook 50 

Sling  ropes 50 

Lair  ropes 100 

Pack  covers 100 

Rigging  covers 5 

Cargo  covers 5 

Feed  covers 5 

Packers'  blinds 14 

Packers'  saddles 14 

Packers'  bridles 14 

SEC.  88.— 


EQUIPMENT — continued. 

Blankets,  saddle 14 

Clothes  or  war  bags 14 

Bell  (sheep)  with  strap 1 

Pair  hobbles 1 

Mess  or  kitchen  boxes 2 

Field  stove  with  kit 1 

Package  matches s  1 

Pack  train  mess  kit 1 

Wall  tent  with  jointed  poles 1 

Tool  sack 1 

Cargador's  box 1 

Cargador's  kit 1 

Blacksmith's  kit 1 

Blacksmith's  boxes .' 2 

Mule  shoes,  Nos.  1  and  2  (fitted) 200 

Horseshoes  (fitted) 8 

Box  horseshoe  nails,  No.  6 1 

Ax..  1 


Spade. 
Pick.  . 


1 

1 

Hay  pads 10 

Currycombs 10 

Horse  brushes 10 

Feet  of  picket  line,  £  inch 150 

Linen  shipping  tags 200 


2.   Table  showing  size  and  quantity  of  rope  and  canvas  required  for  one  pack  train. 

ROPE. 


Article. 

Made  of- 

Length. 

Number, 
required. 

Total 
feet. 

Lash  rope 

One-half  inch 

Feet. 
50 

50 

2  500 

Sling  rope 

Three-eighths  inch 

30 

50 

1  500 

Lair  rope  

do  

30 

100 

3,000 

NOTE. — The  size  of  the  above  rope  is  measured  by  the  diameter. 

A  coil  of  half-inch  best  hand-laid  manila  contains  1,200  feet,  weighs  85  pounds,  and  will  furnish  24  lash 
ropes.  (Sec.  10.) 

A  coil  of  three-eighths  inch  best  hand-laid  manila  contains  1,200  feet,  weighs  55  pounds,  and  will  furnish 
40  sling  or  lair  ropes.  (Sec.  10.) 

148 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


149 


2.  Table  showing  size  and  quantity  of  rope  and  canvas  required  for  one  pack  train — Con. 

CANVAS. 


Article. 

Made  of— 

Length. 

Number 
required. 

Total 
yards. 

Pack  covers 

72-inch  No. 

4  cotton  duck  . 

Feet. 
6 

100 

200 

Rigging  covers 

22-inch  No. 

2  cotton  duck 

24 

5 

80 

Cargo  covers  

28-inch  No. 

10  cotton  duck  

12 

5 

100 

Feed  covers 

44-inch  No. 

10  cotton  duck  .  .  .  .   ' 

24 

5 

40 

NOTE.— A  roll  of  72-inch  No.  4  cotton  duck,  containing  100  yards,  weighs  312J  pounds,  or  3.125 
pounds  per  linear  yard,  and  will  furnish  50  pack  covers  or  mantas.  (Sec.  98.) 

A  roll  of  22-inch  No.  2  cotton  duck,  containing  100  yards,  weighs  106J  pounds,  or  1.0625  pounds  per  linear 
yard,  and  will  furnish  5  rigging  covers.  (Sec.  99.) 

A  roll  of  28-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck,  containing  100  yards,  weighs  78J  pounds,or  0.78125  pound  per  linear 
yard,  and  will  furnish  5  cargo  covers.  (Sec.  100.) 

A  roll  of  44-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck,  containing  100  yards,  weighs  112.5  pounds,  or  1.125  pounds  per  linear 
yard,  and  will  furnish  12  feed  covers.  (Sec.  101.) 

3.  ARTICLES  OF  EQUIPMENT  IN  USE  IN  PACK  TRAINS. 

The  following  articles  are  ordinarily  comprised  in  the  equipment 
of  a  pack  train  for  the  field : 

MESS  OR    KITCHEN   BOXES. 

SEC.  89.  Made  of  seven-eighths  inch  white  pine,  26  inches  long,  18 
inches  wide,  and  11  inches  high-,  outside  measurements;  dovetailed; 
no  lid  or  cover. 

PACKER'S  FIELD  STOVE,  WITH  KIT. 

SEC.  90.  The  stove  is  made  of  sheet  iron. 

The  kit  comprises  2  square  nests  of  kettles;  2  frying  pans  with 
short  handles;  1  bread  pan;  1  coffee  mill  (box);  1  butcher  knife; 
1  steel;  1  package  of  matches. 

COOKING    OUTFIT,  WITHOUT    STOVE. 

SEC.  91.  This  comprises  3  camp  kettles,  telescoping;  1  Dutch  oven, 
with  lid;  2  frying  pans,  short  handles;  1  bread  pan;  1  coffee  mill 
(box);  1  butcher  knife ;  1  steel;  2  mess  pans. 

NOTE. — A  small  buzzacot  may  be  used  to  replace  the  Dutch  oven. 

PACK    TRAIN    MESS    KIT. 

SEC.  92.  To  each  packer  1  coffee  cup,  without  handle;  1  pie  plate; 
1  knife;  1  fork;  and  1  tablespoon. 

CLOTHES  OR    WAR    BAGS. 

SEC.  93.  These  bags  are  ordinarily  made  by  the  packers,  as  follows: 

Take  a  piece  of  22-inch  No.  4  cotton  duck  30  inches  long,  double  it 
across  the  shorter  edges;  lap  the  long  edges  over  one  another  1  inch 
and  sew  them  together  with  a  flat  seam. 

Now,  to  the  edges  at  one  end  attach  a  round  piece  11  inches  in 
diameter,  as  a  bottom  for  the  bag ;  the  edges  are  lapped  1  inch  and 
sewed  with  a  flat  seam. 

Turn  the  bag  inside  out  and  sew  down  the  edges  along  the  side  and 
at  the  bottom. 


150  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

As  a  flap  for  the  bag,  take  a  piece  of  duck  12  inches  long  and  3 
inches  wider  than  the  bag  when  flattened  out.  Cut  one  of  the  shorter 
edges  in  semicircular  shape  and  hem  this  edge.  Attach  the  straight 
edge  to  the  upper  edge  of  the  bag,  lapping  1  inch.  Then  for  securing 
the  flap  over  the  bag,  fasten  a  lace  string  at  the  center  of  the  semi- 
circular edge  of  the  flap  and  attach  a  corresponding  loop  6  inches 
from  the  bottom  of  the  bag. 

,     PACKER'S  WARDROBE. 

SEC.  94.  Packers  are  ordinarily  permitted  to  carry  3  changes  of 
underclothing ;  3  overshirts ;  6  pairs  of  socks,  wool  preferred ;  2  over- 
alls ;  1  canvas  coat ;  1  overcoat ;  1  slicker,  or  rain  coat ;  1  extra  pair 
of  boots  or  shoes ;  1  pair  of  overshoes. 

PACKER'S  WALL  TENT. 

SEC.  95.  The  tent  is  a  wall  tent,  regulation  size.  For  convenience 
the  upright  poles  are  cut  diagonally  in  two  at  the  center;  length  of 
cut,  4  inches.  For  use  the  two  parts  of  an  upright  are  united  by  a 
collar  or  sleeve.  This  is  made  or  stiff  tin  or  iron,  shaped  to  the  pole 
and  riveted  to  the  lower  joint,  so  that  it  will  fit  well  over  the  diagonal 
cut. 

The  ridgepole  is  hinged  on  the  flat  side  at  the  center  of  its  length. 
The  hinge  is  screwed  on  and  the  pole  is  then  sawed  in  two  at  the 
center. 

TOOL  SACKS. 

SEC.  96.  Same  as  clothes  or  war  bags,  but  instead  of  a  flap  at  open 
end,  use  a  double  lace  string,  and  secure  as  in  drawing  or  closing  up  a 
tobacco  sack.  The  sack  is  used  for  extra  lace  strings  and  for  curry- 
combs and  brushes. 

GRASS    OR   HAY   PADS. 

SEC.  97.  Take  a  piece  of  28-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck,  7  feet  long; 
double  across  the  long  edges  and  sew  the  edges  together  all  around 
with  a  flat  seam.  Cut  a  slit  10  inches  long  in  center  of  one  side  and 
bind  the  edges  of  the  slit  all  around  with  sheepskin.  Attach  a  string 
for  lacing. 

These  pads  are  used  for  carrying  extra  grass  or  hay,  for  readjusting 
the  filling  of  the  aparejos. 

PACK   COVERS. 

SEC.  98.  Made  of  72-inch  No.  4  cotton  duck;  cut  6  feet  long;  allow 
1  inch  at  either  end  for  hemming,  to  be  sewed  down  with  No.  "Q" 
canvas  twine,  four  stitches  to  the  inch. 

RIGGING    COVERS. 

SEC.  99.  Made  of  22-inch  No.  2  cotton  duck;  cut  two  lengths  24 
feet  long,  to  be  sewed  with  rolling  stitch,  with  No.  "0"  canvas  twine, 
four  stitches  to  the  inch. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  151 

CARGO   COVERS. 

SEC.  100.  Made  of  28-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck;  cut  five  widths  12 
feet  long;  lapped  on  border  line  and  hemmed  at  ends;  to  be  sewed 
down  with  flat  seam  with  No.  "0"  canvas  twine,  four  stitches  to  the 
inch. 

FEED    COVERS. 

SEC.  101.  Made  of  44-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck;  to  be  24  feet  long, 
hemmed  at  ends;  to  be  sewed  down  with  No.  "0"  canvas  twine,  four 
stitches  to  the  inch. 

CARGADOR'S  BOX. 

SEC.  102.  This  is  made,  preferably  of  leather,  18  inches  long,  9 
inches  wide,  and  6  inches  high,  with  lid. 

It  is  reenforced  on  the  inside  by  iron  bands,  1  inch  wide  and  one- 
eighth  inch  thick,  riveted  around  the  edges  at  top  and  bottom.  Half 
of  the  upper  iron  band  is  left  exposed  above  the  edges  of  the  box, 
serving  as  a  support  for  the  lid,  when  in  place. 

Thimbles  for  tools  are  sewed  to  the  sides  of  the  box  on  the  inside. 
A  slide  handle  of  leather  may  be  attached  to  the  lid. 

For  a  hinge,  take  a  piece  of  leather  the  length  of  the  box  and  about 
2  inches  wide,  and  sew  it  to  the  back  of  the  lid  and  the  back  of  the 
box. 

For  fastening,  a  strap  may  be  used  across  each  end,  provided  with 
buckle  and  held  in  place  by  means  of  leather  keepers,  and  an  attach- 
ment provided  for  a  small  Yale  or  other  lock. 


KIT. 


SEC.  103.  To  consist  of — 


Half-round  knife 

Gauge  knife 

Riveting  hammer 

Rivet  cutter f. 

Rivet  set * 

Spring  punch 

Hand  punches,  size  f ,  {,  and  £  inch 3 

Edge  tool 1 

Awl  handles 3 

Awl  blades  or  points,  assorted  sizes 12 

Saddler's  needles,  Nos.  2  and  4 papers..  2 

Sailmaker's  needles,  assorted  sizes 6 

Palm 1 

Sailing  twine,  No.  "0" ball..  1 

Shoe  thread,  "Barbour's"  No.  10 balls..  6 

Beeswax pound. .  £ 

Black  wax do | 

Halter  rings,  regulation  size 12 

Halter  snaps,  "trigger,"  size  1£  inches 12 

Common  japanned  buckles,  size  1£  inches 12 

Side  of  latigo  leather 1 

Side  of  bridle  leather,  "fair  " 1 

Oilstone,  "small " 1 

Tailor's  shears,  6-inch  blade 1 

The  leather  is  carried  on  one  of  the  aparejos,  between  the  aparejo 
and  the  aparejo  cover. 

NOTE. — One  stitching  horse,  when  stationed  at  post. 


152  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

BLACKSMITH'S  BOXES. 

SEC.  104.  Made  of  seven-eighths  inch  white  pine,  24  inches  long,  12 
inches  wide,  and  9  inches  high,  outside  measurements;  to  be  dove- 
tailed ;  inside  tin  lined ;  no  lid  or  cover. 

BLACKSMITH'S  KIT. 

SEC.  105.  To  consist  of— 

Horseshoe  knives,  blades  3J  inches 2 

Rasps,  length  16  inches 2 

Shoeing  hammer 1 

Hand  hammer 1 

Pritchel 1 

Pincers 1 

Clinch  cutter 1 

Clinch  iron 1 

Packer's  field  anvil 1 

To  make  the  field  anvil,  take  a  piece  of  flat  iron  about  18  inches 
long,  3  inches  wide,  and  one-half  inch  thick;  shape  this  into  a  triangle 
about  5  inches  on  the  side  and  weld  together. 

4.  HOW  TO  ORGANIZE  A  PACK  TRAIN. 

SEC.  106.  As  an  aid  to  more  readily  teach  the  animals  in  their 
duties  a  corral  should  be  provided  in  which  to  arrange  the  rigging 
and  cargo  and  to  keep  them  off  the  ground.  Procure  some  two  by 
fours;  space  them  18  inches  apart  and  hold  them  by  crosspieces,  on 
which  to  place  the  aparejos;  for  the  cargo  procure  some  boards  to 
rest  on  the  two  by  fours  and  form  a  platform  8  by  65  feet  (it  is  not 
expected  to  provide  these  conditions  in  the  field).  Now,  to  teach 
the  animals  to  come  to  rigging  and  prevent  crowding  and  pushing 
the  aparejos  out  of  position  drive  five  stakes  in  rear  of  the  rigging 
and  connect  them  by  two  by  fours  or  suitable  poles  placed  on  top  of 
the  stakes  and  nail  down;  the  height  of  stakes  should  not  exceed 
6  inches  above  the  rigging.  Next  cover  the  rigging,  tie  down  and 
spread  the  "feed  covers"  thereon.  Along  the  line  of  covers  pour 
sufficient  grain  to  encourage  the  animals  to  approach  the  rigging  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  stakes  or  guard  rail;  for  this  purpose  the  gateway 
to  enter  the  corral  should  be  placed  facing  the  line  and  end  of  the 
rigging,  the  first  aparejo  placed  being  considered  the  head,  the  last 
in  line  the  end  of  rigging. 

Before  the  train  is  brought  into  corral  to  "line  up"  the  pack  master 
and  cargador  should  take  position  in  front  of  the  rigging  to  prevent 
the  animals  jumping  over  the  guard  rail.  Six  packers  take  station 
in  rear  of  the  guard  rail  facing  the  line  of  'approaching  animals, 
while  one  packer  leads  the  "bell"  horse,  and  the  other  packers  remain 
on  the  outside  of  corral  to  keep  the  animals  together. 

The  bell  horse  is  tied  to  guard  rail  with  halter  shank  at  end  of  rig- 
ging, the  packer  taking  station  in  rear  of  the  animal  and  causing 
the  other  animals  as  they  approach  to  fall  in  on  the  flank  of  the 
bell  horse,  the  packers  in  rear  of  the  guard  rail  causing  the  animals 
to  fall  in  line  in  the  flank  of  each  animal  following.  As  the  line 
fills  up  the  packers  in  rear  of  guard  rail  take  station  behind  the  ani- 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  153 

mals  until  all  are  lined  up.  The  pack  master  and  cargador  with  the 
assistance  of  the  packers  that  were  guarding  the  mules  on  the  outside 
of  corral  assist  in  tying  the  animals  to  guard  rail ;  this  should  be 
done  as  promptly  as  possible,  and  under  no  circumstances  should 
the  animals  be  permitted  to  leave  their  positions  first  taken.  While 
the  animals  are  tied  up  at  rigging,  care  should  be  exercised  to  prevent 
their  wasting  the  grain  and  kicking  each  other.  A  small  switch  or 
aparejo  stick  in  the  hands  of  each  packer  will  cause  the  animals  to 
give  attention — this  should  be  used  for  correction,  not  for  abuse," 
which  must  not  be  permitted  under  any  circumstances,  remembering 
the  more  abuse  the  animal  is  given  the  more  unruly  or  ugly  it  be- 
comes, until  it  is  classed  as  an  outlaw ;  the  animal  is  dumb — the 
packer  is  presumed  to  be  intelligent  and  human. 

In  due  time  "turn  loose,"  that  is,  unsnap  the  halter  shank  from 
halter.  For  this  purpose  always  commence  with  the  bell  horse  and 
then  successively  each  animal  in  turn  until  all  are  freed;  lead  the 
ubell"  toward  opposite  end  of  corral  and  cause  each  animal  to  fol- 
low the  "bell"  as  turned  loose.  Packers  should  now  go  among  them 
and  approach  as  many  as  will  permit,  stroke  the  animals  on  the  neck 
and  back  and  call  them  by  given  name;  animals  like  to  be  petted. 
The  results  will  be  astonishing  in  the  short  time  in  which  a  train  of 
gentle  mules  can  be  loaded  for  the  day's  march. 

A  young  train  should  be  accustomed  to  line  up  at  rigging  twice  per 
day  at  regular  intervals,  on  each  occasion  placing  a  little  grain  on 
the  feed  cover,  as  they  soon  become  accustomed  to  look  forward  in 
patient  expectation  for  the  morning  and  evening  meal. 

In  due  time  as  they  learn  to  line  up  properly,  the  feeding  at  the 
rigging  should  be  discontinued. 

During  the  process  of  teaching  the  animals  to  line  up  at  rigging, 
they  should  be  loaded  and  taken  out  of  camp  a  distance  of  2  or  3 
miles  and  the  pack  master  should  then  round  up  the  train  and  note 
the  condition  and  fit  of  each  aparejo  in  memorandum  book,  correct- 
ing those  needing  immediate  attention;  continue  this  practice  each 
day  until  each  aparejo  is  properly  fitted  and  adjusted,  when  longer 
marches  should  be  taken,  to  get  the  animals  in  good  muscular  condi- 
tion and  harden  their  backs. 

After  a  period  of  four  weeks  practice  marches  should  be  reduced  to 
four  times  each  week,  one  day  to  the  practice  of  lairing-up  side  packs, 
the  last  day  of  the  week,  Saturday,  to  cleaning  up  the  rigging  and 
other  duties. 

From  four  to  six  weeks,  as  noted  above,  should  get  the  train  in  serv- 
ice for  active  duty. 

Chapter  IV,  "B.  Instruction  in  the  service  of  a  pack  train,"  should 
be  thoroughly  understood  and  complied  with;  also  Chapter  VI, 
"  Duties  of  individuals." 

To  maintain  an  organization  and  efficiency  both  men  and  animals 
must  be  taught  their  duties,  and  regular  practice  marches  be  had, 
together  with  stated  inspections  of  both  men  and  animals  and  equip- 
ments. 

As  pack  trains  are  organized  on  the  basis  of  one  pack  master,  one 
cargador,  one  blacksmith,  one  cook,  and  one  packer  to  every  five 

«Care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  animals  come  quietly  to  the  rigging;  they  should 
never  be  hurried  unless  the  occasion  is  urgent. 


154  MANUAL,   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

pack  mules  in  the  train,  it  sometimes  becomes  necessary  to  divide  the 
train  into  "sections"  when  traveling  with  a  command  of  cavalry. 

For  this  purpose  ten  pack  mules  are  usually  assigned  to  a  " troop" 
with  their  proper  complement  of  equipment.  The  pack  master  will 
see  to  it  that  the  necessary  cargador  tools,  mule  shoes,  nails,  etc.,  are 
supplied,  and  packers  will  mess  with  the  troop  to  which  assigned. 

The  pack  master  should  therefore  school  the  packers  in  the  require- 
ments exacted  of  the  " skilled"  packer  (sec.  108). 

In  case  of  the  distribution  of  the  five  sections  of  the  train  the 
pack  master  will  retain  the  bell  horse,  blacksmith,  and  cook  with  the 
first  section,  and  will  be  considered  headquarters  of  the  pack  train. 
The  cargador  will  be  assigned  with  the  fifth  section,  or  the  one  far- 
thest away  from  the  first  or  headquarter  section  of  the  train.  It 
must  then  be  the  duty  of  the  pack  master  and  cargador  to  visit  the 
intermediate  sections,  at  stated  or  suitable  intervals,  to  overlook  the 
condition  of  the  animals  and  equipments  so  as  to  maintain  efficiency. 

It  should  be  remembered  by  commanding  officers  that  pack  mules 
(sections)  should  be  reassembled  as  early  as  possible  to  maintain 
organization. 

5.  THE  ESSENTIAL  CONDITIONS  IN  THE  SELECTION  OF  THE  PACKER. 

SEC.  107.  He  must  know  how  to  read  and  write;  be  sound  in  body, 
of  athletic  build,  and  not  addicted  to  the  excessive  use  of  intoxicants 
or  display  of  bad  or  ugly  temper,  and  thoroughly  imbued  with  an 
11  esprit  de  corps"  for  the  pack  service. 

Age,  from  21  to  35  years.  Height,  from  5  feet  7  inches  to  6  feet  2 
inches.  Weight,  from  165  to  210  pounds.  Honorably  discharged 
soldiers  will  be  given  the  preference. 

THE    SKILLED    PACKER. 

SEC.  108.  Ordinarily  one  versed  in  the  usages  and  customs  of  pack- 
train  service. 

As  instancing  the  requirements  necessary  for  the  proper  discharge 
of  his  duties,  the  following  may  be  enumerated : 

He  must  understand — 

(1)  The  principles  of  "  ribbing  up  "  the  aparejo,  to  keep  the  animal's 
back  sound. 

(2)  The  relative  toughness  in  different  classes  of  wood  suitable  for 
the  " ribbing"  of  aparejos. 

(3)  The  gradual  tapering  to  give  "  ribs  "  necessary  for  conformation 
to  the  body  of  the  mule. 

(4)  How  to  select  grasses  (hay)  suitable  for  filling  or  padding  for 
aparejos. 

(5)  Where  and  how  much  filling  is  necessary  in  the  aparejo  to  give 
perfect  conformation  to  the  body  of  the  animal,  ana  the  relative 
thickness  necessary  for  the  holding  up  of  different  weighty  loads 
bearing  on  the  proper  surface  on  either  side  of  the  backbone  and 
withers. 

(6)  The  cause  of  "  bunches,"  or  wounds,  on  any  part  of  the  animal's 
body  covered  by  the  aparejo  and  cincha,  and  the  proper  adjustment 
to  correct  the  same.     (See  Evolution  of  the  aparejo,  and  sec.  9.) 

(7)  The  cause  for  the  animal's  "dock"  becoming  sore,  and  the 
proper  remedy  to  correct  the  same.     (See  sec.  9.) 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  155 

(8)  How  to  lace,  fit,  and  cinch  the  aparejo  to  the  mule,  with  due 
regard  to  the  proper  size  of  aparejo  necessary. 

(9)  How  many  sections,  giving  the  proper  name,  in  the  make  of 
the  aparejo,  what  comprises  the  aparejo  proper  and  the  aparejo  com- 
plete, and  how  to  make  repairs  to  rigging  (aparejos)  and  sew  on 
canvas. 

(10)  The  conformation  of  the  hoofs  and  how  the  animal  should  be 
properly  shod  for  warm  and  cold  seasons. 

(11)  How  to  select  "pack"  and  riding  animals,  with  due  regard 
to  endurance,  strength,  and  docile  qualities. 

(12)  What  remedies  to  apply  in  case  of  cutting  of  blood  vessels. 

(13)  What  remedies  to  apply  in  case  of  snake  bite  and  how  to 
prepare  the  wound  for  same. 

(14)  How  to  prepare,   "form,"   and  cover  cargo,   and  tie  down 
properly. 

(15)  How  to  arrange  aparejos  in  an  orderly  manner,  cover  and  tie 
down  when  in  bivouac,  as  the  nature  of  the  ground  will  permit. 

(16)  All  hitches,  knots,  and  splices  customary  in  pack-train  service. 

(17)  How  to  construct  a  travois  to  carry  wounded,  and  how  to 
improvise  a  stretcher  for  similar  purpose. 

(18)  How  to  put  on  a  load  in  the  most  expeditious  and  satisfactory 
manner,  requiring  not  over  one  minute  for  ordinary  loading. 

(19)  How  to  catch  a  pack  mule  when  his  load  needs  attention. 

(20)  How  to  quickly  readjust  a  load  in  less  than  one  minute. 
(Experience  will  teach  by  sight  and  sense  of  touch  how  load  is  riding.) 

(21)  When  traveling  up  or  down  a  mountain  how  to  cut  or  take 
as  many  turns  as  necessary  to  conserve  the  strength  of  the  animals. 

(22)  How  to  guard  against  accidents  when  crossing  a  stream,  either 
fording  or  swimming. 

(23)  He  must  be  attentive  to  animals  and  loads,  that  none  of  the 
latter  may  fall  off,  impeding  the  progress  of  the  train. 

(24)  Be  quick  to  note  weakness  in  animals  during  travel  and  re- 
lieve the  same. 

(25)  Be  quick  to  note  conditions  of  country  that  may  endanger 
the  life  of  the  animal  and  guard  against  accidents. 

(26)  Be  watchful,  both  day  and  night,  during  travel  that  none  may 
go  astray. 

(27)  Be  kind  in  his  treatment  of  animals. 

(28)  Have  a  knowledge  of  the  component  parts  of  a  ration  and 
the  allowance  for  thirty  days;  also  the  allowance  of  grain,  hay,  and 
bedding  for  horse  and  mule. 

(29)  Have  a  fair  knowledge  of  cookery,  especially  the  art  of  mak- 
ing good  bread. 

(30)  Be  prompt  to  obey  all  proper  orders  emanating  from  the  pack 
master  or  other  proper  authority. 

(31)  Always  be  ready  for  duty  in  all  conditions  of  country  and 
climate. 

(32)  Be  honest  and  honorable  in  all  his  dealings  with  his  fellow- 
men. 

THE    NOVICE,  OR    UNSKILLED    PACKER. 

SEC.  109.  One  not  versed  in  the  usages  and  customs  of  the  pack- 
train  service,  but  otherwise  qualified  as  called  for  in  section  107. 


156  MANUAL    OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 

INSTRUCTIONS    TO    PACK    MASTERS. 

SEC.  110.  It  should  be  the  ambition  of  pack  masters  to  keep  the  ani- 
mals sound,  equipments  in  good  order,  and  maintain  efficiency  and 
discipline  in  the  train. 

Attend  personally  to  the  proper  watering  of  the  animals  when  in 
bivouac  and  during  travel  when  opportunity  offers. 

Obey  all  orders  promptly  coming  from  proper  authority.  In  like 
manner  exact  prompt  obedience  from  members  of  the  train  and  main- 
tain perfect  organization  by  schooling  of  men  and  animals  in  their 
duties. 

6.  DUTIES  OF  INDIVIDUALS. 

SEC.  111.   The  chief  packer.— He  will — 

(1)  At  post,  whereat  stationed,  report  every  morning  to  the  quar- 
termaster for  instructions,  unless  otherwise  instructed. 

(2)  On  expeditions,  report  every  evening  to  the  quartermaster  or 
commanding  officer  for  instructions,  unless  otherwise  instructed. 

(3)  When  practicable,  equip  all  pack  trains,  giving  receipt  therefor 
to  quartermaster,   and  in  like  manner  obtain  receipts  from  pack 
masters;  supervise  the  distribution  of  cargo  according  to  the  number 
of  pack  animals  in  each  train  and  the  strength  thereof. 

(4)  Keep  a  roster  of  names  of  packers  of  each  pack  train,  and  posi- 
tions occupied,  when  employed,  when  discharged,  with  cause  therefor; 
their  height,  age,  color  of  hair  and  eyes,  weight;  how  long  they  have 
served  and  in  what  capacity,  giving  names  of  pack  masters  they  have 
served  under,  and  how  long  and  in  what  States,  Territories,  or  foreign 
possessions. 

(5)  Keep  a  descriptive  list  of  public  animals  of  each  train,  giving 
age,  sex,  color,  height,  marks  and  blemishes,  and  weight,  as  near  as 
can  be  judged  when  scales  are  not  convenient. 

(6)  When  practicable  select  pack  masters  that  are  eligible,  having 
due  regard  to  length  of  service,  experience,  and  the  proper  requisites 
in  the  control  of  men;  and  cargadors  upon  the  recommendation  of 
pack  masters. 

(7)  In  the  employment  of  men   as  packers,   give  preference   to 
honorably  discharged  soldiers  filling  the  necessary  requisites.     (Sec. 
107.) 

(8)  When  directed  by  quartermaster,  receive  reports  from  pack 
masters  every  evening  or  morning,  as  the  exigencies  of  the    service 
may  require,  of  the  number  of  public  animals,  condition  of  train, 
amount  of  cargo  on  hand,  and  of  what  composed;  also  of  any  accidents 
happening  to  men  or  to  public  animals,  making  note  thereof  and 
report  same  to  quartermaster. 

(9)  On  expeditions  form  a  pioneer  corps,  instructing  pack  masters 
to  detail  as  many  packers  as  may  be  necessary,  who  will  provide 
themselves  with  ax,  spade,   or   pick,   as    directed,  looking    to   the 
clearance  of  all  obstacles  that  may  impede  travel  or  endanger  trains. 

(10)  When  practicable,  park  all  pack  trains  as  directed  by  the 
quartermaster. 

(11)  Detail,  as  directed  by  the  quartermaster,  as  many  pack  trains, 
or  parts  thereof,  to  commands,  as  the  exigencies  of  the  service  may 
require. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  157 

(12)  Have  all  trains  in  readiness  at  time  specified  by  quartermaster 
or  commanding  officer. 

(13)  Exact  from  pack  masters  a  constant  adherence  to  the  rules  of 
packing,  schooling  of  themselves  and  their  men,  and  teaching  of  ani- 
mals, looking  to  the  perfect  organization  of  the  trains. 

(14)  Exact  a  prompt  obedience  from  all  pack  masters  to  orders  con- 
cerning their  duties. 

(15)  Exert  a  watchful  care  over  trains,  that  efficient  and  effective 
service  may  be  rendered. 

(16)  Keep  a  memorandum  book,  giving  a  general  description  of 
country  and  climate,  how  country  is  watered  and  grassed,  and  inci- 
dents of  note  that  may  be  of  service. 

(17)  Hold  pack  masters  strictly  responsible  for  the  perfect  work- 
ing, management,  and  condition  of  trams  in  their  charge. 

(18)  Make  stated  inspections  of  pack  trains,  as  may  be  directed  by 
the  Quartermaster-General,  United  States  Army,  looking  to  the  main- 
tenance and  perfect  organization  of  pack  trains. 

(19)  Perform  all  other  duties  as  the  exigencies  of  the  service  may 
require  and  as  directed  by  the  Quartermaster-General,  United  States 
Army. 

SEC.  112.    Tlie  assistant  chief  packer. — He  will — 

(1)  Assist  the  chief  packer  in  the  performance  of  his  duties. 

(2)  On  detached  service,  in  the  absence  of  the  chief  packer,  or  when 
in  foreign  service,  he  will  assume  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  chief 
packer,  as  directed  by  the  chief  quartermaster. 

SEC.  113.    The  pack  master. — He  will — 

(1)  At  post  whereat  stationed,  in  the  absence  of  the  chief  packer  or 
assistant  chief  packer,  report  every  morning  to  the  quartermaster 
unless  otherwise  instructed. 

(2)  In  memorandum  book  provided  for  that  purpose,  keep  a  list  of 
property  and  descriptive  list  of  public  animals  in  his  charge,  number, 
age,  sex,  color,  height,  marks  and  blemishes,  and  weight  as  near  as  can 
be  judged  when  scales  are  not  convenient. 

(3)  Keep  a  roster  of  names  of  packers,  when  employed,  when  dis- 
charged, and  cause  therefor;  their  rank,  date  of  rank  in  pack  train, 
when  first  employed,  lenght  of  service  as  packmaster,  as  cargador,  as 
blacksmith,  as  cook,  as  packer,  as  instructor,  organization  assigned 
to,  place  of  birth,  age,  height,  weight,  color  of  eyes,  color  of  hair, 
complexion,  giving  names  of  pack  masters  they  have  served  under, 
and  how  long,  and  in  what  States,  Territories,  or  foreign  possessions, 
efficiency  and  conduct. 

(4)  Keep  a  memorandum  of  number  of  days'  rations  drawn,  how 
many  men  drawn  for,  the  amount  and  description  of  cargo,  how  dis- 
posed of,  and  when  and  to  whom  issued. 

(5)  Report  any  accident,  sickness,  or  death  happening  to  men  or 
public  animals,  to  chief  packer  or  his  assistant,  and  in  their  absence,  to 
quartermaster. 

(6)  Station  men  at  bad  or  dangerous  places,  for  the  safety  of  the 
animals;  likewise  before  crossing  streams  find  out  bad  or  dangerous 
points. 

(7)  In  mountainous  country  he  must  know  how  to  cut  or  make  as 
many  turns  as  the  strength  of  the  animals  may  indicate,  giving  oppor- 
tunity when  space  will  permit  to  rest  animals  and  secure  loading. 


158  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

(8)  Be  ever  watchful  and  quick  to  detect  weakness  in  any  animal 
approaching  bad  or  dangerous  places,  lightening  or  relieving  its  load 
accordingly. 

(9)  Be  just  and  fair  with  the  men  and  exact  prompt  obedience  to 
all  orders. 

(10)  When  opportunity  offers,  school  the  men  in  the  system  of 
packing,  exacting  a  strict  compliance  therewith. 

(11)  Assist  the  cargador  in  "setting  up"  rigging  and  attend  to  the 
animals'  bodies,  keeping  them  sound. 

(12)  Keep  equipment  in  proper  order  and  repair. 

(13)  Keep  a  diary  of  the  distance  traveled,  condition  of  country, 
how  wooded  and  watered  and  grassed,  and  other  incidents  of  note 
that  may  be  of  service. 

(14)  Compute  the  carrying  capacity  of  train  at  250  pounds  to  the 
pack  animal;  aparejo  and  accessories  not  included. 

SEC.  114.  The  cargador  or  assistant  pack  master. — He  will — 

(1)  With  the  assistance  of  the  pack  master,  set  up  the  rigging. 

(2)  Fix  aparejo  for  all  bunches  or  wounds,  as  their  position  in- 
dicates, being  careful  not  to  overlook  any,  no  matter  how  small,  re- 
membering that  a  small  one  is  more  easily  fixed  than  a  large  one. 

(3)  Attend  to  all  needed  repairs  to  aparejos  and  equipments,  sup- 
plying himself  with  cargador's  kit  for  that  purpose. 

(4)  Make  up  all  cargoes,  mating  packages  according  to  kind,  and 
equalizing  all  packs  to  the  best  advantage,  loading  animals  according 
to  their  strength  and  condition. 

(5)  Keep  a  watch  on  animals  and  packs  while  traveling,  and  on 
packers,  that  they  attend  to  their  duties,  reporting  any  inattention 
or  disobedience  to  orders  promptly  to  pack  master,  as  they  are  neces- 
sarily under  his  immediate  charge. 

(6)  Place  cargo,  rigging,  and  picket  line    as   indicated  by  pack 
master. 

(7)  Assume  charge  of  the  pack  train  in  the  temporary  absence  of 
the  pack  master. 

(8)  Keep  a  memorandum  of  all  cargo  received,  and  to  whom  is- 
sued, with  date,  marking  or  tagging  when  necessary,  and  attend  to 
the  cleanliness  of  the  coronas  and  cruppers. 

(9)  Keep  two  or  three  table  knives  for  the  purpose  of  cleaning 
coronas;  for  convenience,  select  certain  aparejos  on  which  to  secure 
them.     (Sec.  76.) 

(10)  See  that  rigging  and  cargo  are  covered  and  securely  tied 
down;  all  halter  stems  gathered  and  placed  half  and  half  on  head 
and  end  rigging,  all  blinds  likewise  placed  between  the  two  last  rig- 
ging. 

(11)  See  that  all  saddles,  bridles,  and  blankets  are  placed  on  cargo 
before  covering  up;  pack  master's  and  cargador's  at  each  end. 

(12)  Have  all  canvas  and  blankets  spread  out  to  dry,  if  found  wet, 
and  all  canvas  gathered  up  and  placed  in  front  of  rigging. 

(13)  Count  all  rigging  when  taken  off,  halter  stems  and  blinds,  to 
see  that  none  are  missing. 

(14)  Name  all  animals  according  to  sex,  that  they  may  be  known 
and  remembered,  marking  each  aparejo  fitted  to  the  animal  with  the 
name  and  number  of  corona  of  that  animal. 

(15)  Never  abuse  or  maltreat  the  animals  or  permit  others  to  do 
so,  impairing  their  gentleness  and  usefulness;  it  tends  toward  dis- 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  159 

organization.  With  sound  and  gentle  animals  it  is  possible  to  go 
anywhere  they  can  find  footing. 

(16)  Keep  all  animals'  manes  properly  Broached,"  i.  e.,  trimmed 
up. 

SEC.  115.  The  blacksmith. — He  will— 

(1)  Provide  himself  with  blacksmith's  field  kit  and  shoe  boxes, 
the  necessary  number  of  shoes,  of  the  size  numbers  wanted;  amount 
of  nails  and  size  numbers  wanted;  fit  them  up,  shoe  and  keep  the 
train  properly  shod.     Remember  that  sound  feet  are  as  necessary  as 
sound  backs  to  the  efficiency  of  the  train. 

(2)  In  addition,  obtain  and  fit  up  200  shoes,  with  sufficient  nails, 
ready  for  field  service. 

(3)  While  train  is  being  loaded  keep  the  animals  close  to  "bell," 
keeping  correct  count  as  turned  loose,  reporting  any  accident  to 
pack:  master  or  cargador  promptly. 

(4)  On  leaving  bivouac,  with  assistance  of  cargador,  take  count 
of  animals,  see  that  none  are  missing,  taking  station  on  each  side  of 
train  when  possible,  and  see  that  tally  is  correct,  reporting  any  that 
may  be  missing  to  pack  master. 

(5)  Take  station  at  rear  of  train  while  traveling,  keeping  a  watch 
on  the  animal's  feet,  so  that  he  may  know  how  many  shoes  have 
slipped  during  the  travel,  and  call  attention  of  packers  to  any  loads 
that  may  need  readjusting. 

(6)  At  any  and  all  halts,  opportunity  offering,  come  quickly  to  the 
head  of  train  and  keep  animals  rounded  up,  so  that  animals  may  not 
stray  off,  and  in  order  that  packers  can  give  attention  quickly  to 
packs. 

(7)  On  arrival  at  camp,  when  opportunity  offers,  call  on  pack 
master  for  all  animals  that  need  shoeing  and  necessary  assistance. 
If  animal  is  unruly  tie  up  his  foot.     Do  not  abuse  him;  remember 
the  animal  is  dumfj  and  you  are  intelligent  and  human. 

(8)  Assist  in  putting  on  rigging  and  loading  when  necessary,  and 
perform  all  other  duties  required  as  the  exigencies  of  the  pack  service 
demand. 

SEC.  116.   The  packer.— He  will— 

(1)  Properly  fit  himself  for  his  duties,  study  and  perfect  himself 
in  the  system  of  packing.     For  this  purpose  the  pack  master  will 
obtain  from  the  quartermaster  the  necessary  number  of  books  on 
Pack  Transportation. 

(2)  Obey  all  orders  emanating  from  the  pack  master,  and  in  his 
absence,  the  cargador. 

(3)  Be  gentle  in  his  treatment  of  animals;   never  throw  rocks, 
blinds,  or  in  any  way  abuse  them.     The  gentleness  of  animals,  espe- 
cially the  quiclmess  with  which  a  train  can  be  gotten  out  of  camp, 
indicates  the  understanding  of  packers  of  their  duties  and  is  the  test 
of  organization  and  discipline  of  a  train. 

(4)  Be  watchful  of  loads  when  traveling,  that  none  may  fall  off. 

(5)  Do  not  wait  for  others  to  do  what  he  himself  sees  should  be 
done. 

(6)  Work  for  the  interest  and  good  name  of  the  train  and  be  jealous 
of  its  reputation. 

SEC.  117.   TJie  cook.— He  will— 

(1)  As  a  necessary  requisite,  be  a  good  bread  baker,  careful  and 
saving  with  rations. 


160  MANUAL    OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 

(2)  Distribute  short  rations   (one  or  two  days'  supply)  in  mess 
boxes,  evenly,  so  as  not  to  make  one  end  of  box  heavier  than  the  other 
or  top  heavy. 

(3)  When  called,  be  quick  to  get  up,  and  fold  blankets  and  canvas 
and  place  in  front  of  head  rigging. 

(4)  Be  quick  in  serving  breakfast  and  dinner,  especially  during 
field  service. 

(5)  Give  variety  of  food  as  often  as  rations  and  extras  will  permit. 

(6)  Be  clean,  and  keep  utensils  and  surroundings  clean. 

(7)  On  arrival  at  camp,  dinner  being  over,  prepare  for  breakfast 
and  dinner  next  day,  and  keep  ready  bread  sufficient  for  two  meals. 

(8)  As  beans  are  a  main  staple  in  packers'  fare  and  easily  gotten 
ready,  cook  them  before  retiring  for  tne  breakfast  and  dinner  meals. 

(9)  Always  carry  a  little  wood  and  kindling,  so  that  a  fire  may  be 
started  quickly  on  arrival  at  camp. 

(10)  Get  as  near  ready  as  possible  everything  designed  for  break- 
fast and  dinner  after  supper  and  before  retiring. 

(11)  Pack  boxes,  or  as  much  as  can  conveniently  be  done,  and 
secure  them,  and  secure  all  packs  opened  before  retiring. 

(12)  Keep  kitchen  ropes  in  a  dry  place. 

(13)  Have  sufficient  water  for  coomng,  and  wood  and  kindling  to 
start  fire  quickly  in  the  morning. 

(14)  Be  called  one-half  hour  before  the  trainmen,  and  call  packers 
to  breakfast  promptly  when  ready. 

(15)  Secure  riding  animal  and  have  him  tied  conveniently  near. 

(16)  Time  permitting,  saddle  up  before  breakfast;  if  not,  while 
packers  are  eating;  the  kitchen  animals  will  be  tied  conveniently  close 
to  kitchen. 

(17)  With  the  assistance  of  a  packer,  have  the  kitchen  loads  ready 
and  loaded  on  the  kitchen  animals,  so  as  not  to  cause  unnecessary 
delay  when  the  train  has  been  loaded. 

(18)  Assist  in  keeping  the  animals  rounded  up,  and  at  the  call 
"Bell."  be  quick  to  untie  the  "bell"  animal  and  lead  out  in  the  direc- 
tion indicated,  gaiting  the  animal  as  directed  by  pack  master. 

(19)  Look  back  occasionally,  should  the  pack  master  not  be  in  the 
lead,  and  notice  how  the  animals  are  coming,  and  whether  the  gait 
is  too  fast  or  too  slow;  if  any  accident  happens,  halt  and  wait  for 
orders. 

(20)  Watch  for  and  obey  the  signals  of  pack  master. 

(21)  Look  to  pack  master  for  all  orders  pertaining  to  kitchen. 

(22)  Look  to  pack  master  or  cargador  for  orders  on  trail  while 
traveling. 

NOTE. — There  is  nothing  that  will  add  more  to  the  comfort  and 
good  will  among  a  crew  of  packers  than  a  good,  clean,  and  fast  cook. 

WHAT  PACKERS  ARE  NOT  PERMITTED  TO  DO. 

SEC.  118.  Packers  must  not — 

(1)  Throw  rocks,  blinds,  or  in  any  manner  abuse  the  animals  of 
the  train. 

(2;  Tie  riding  or  pack  mules  in  front  of  saloons. 

(3)  Indulge  in  the  use  of  intoxicants  to  the  prejudice  of   good 
order  and  discipline  in  the  pack  train. 

(4)  Be  absent  from  the  train  without  permission  from  the  pack 
master,  and  in  his  absence  the  cargador. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  161 

Be  insubordinate  to  the  proper  orders  of  the  pack  master,  and 
in  his  absence  the  cargador. 

(6)  Read  papers,  books,  etc.,  while  on  herd  duty,  or  neglect  to 
keep  proper  supervision  over  the  animals  that  none  may  stray  off  or 
be  stolen. 

(7)  Neglect  to  keep  watch  on  pack  mules  on  the  march,  night  as 
well  as  day,  that  none  may  stray  oif  during  travel. 

(8)  Be  inattentive  to  pack  animals  when  their  load  needs  balan- 
cing. 

(9)  Use  coronas  for  bedding. 

(10)  Use  the  aparejo  as  a  seat  when  in  bivouac  or  permit  others  to 
do  so. 

FEEDING. 

SEC.  119.  In  case  grain  is  to  be  fed  to  pack  animals,  let  it  be  given 
to  them  after  the  day's  work  is  done — not  before.  In  the  latter  case 
the  grain  is  liable  to  sour  on  the  mule's  stomach ;  thirst,  and  possibly 
colic,  results. 

When  grain  is  available  it  is  fed  at  the  picket  line  or  on  the  herd 
ground.  In  the  latter  case,  put  it  in  separate  piles,  one  for  each  mule, 
about  20  feet  apart,  the  various  piles  being  placed  on  the  circumfer- 
ence of  a  circle. 

When  the  mules  are  on  herd  do  not  picket  the  "bell"  horse  unless 
the  urgency  of  the  occasion  requires  it;  " hobble"  it  instead.  More 
freedom  is  thus  given  him  in  the  selection  of  grasses. 

If  the  "bell"  horse  is  picketed  during  night  herding,  one  of  the 
herders  should  remain  in  its  immediate  vicinity  in  order  to  be  prompt 
to  render  aid  in  case  of  accident. 

If  grain  is  not  available  for  the  train,  but  enough  may  be  obtained 
for  the  "bell"  horse,  feed  it  separately,  since  it  has  not  the  same 
opportunities  for  grazing  as  the  other  animals. 

If  animals  are  fed  at  the  picket  line,  the  grain  is  placed  on  feed 
covers  (sec.  80).  These  covers  should  be  promptly  removed  after 
feeding.  Two  or  more  packers  are  detailed  to  be  present  to  prevent 
animals  from  kicking  one  another  and  wasting  the  grain. 

WATERING. 

SEC.  120.  It  is  very  essential  that  animals  should  be  watered  at 
least  once  a  day.  Deprive  them  of  water  and  they  immediately  grow 
thin. 

Pack  masters  should  personally  supervise  the  watering  of  animals 
on  arrival  at  bivouac. 

Some  animals  are  fastidious  as  to  the  quality  of  water  they  drink. 
Do  not  overlook  them;  see  that  they  are  properly  watered. 

Before  fording  streams,  when  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  animals 
are  thirsty,  always  give  them  an  opportunity  to  drink.  Accident 
and  delay  may  thus  be  avoided;  especially  in  case  the  ford  is  boggy 
and  dangerous. 

GROOMING. 

SEC.  121.  Pack  animals  should  be  groomed  daily.  It  is  done  while 
they  are  at  the  rigging. 

In  grooming,  stroke  with  the  hair,  not  against  it;  under  the  belly, 
stroke  to  the  rear. 
24758—10 11 


162  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

In  a  country  where  grass  burs  occur,  see  that  none  are  on  the 
animal's  back  or  belly  before  putting  on  the  aparejo. 

TRAVELING. 

SEC.  122.  In  warm  climates,  avoid  traveling  during  the  heat  of  the 
day.  On  the  other  hand,  avoid  making  two  marches  in  one  day.  It 
is  better  to  do  the  day's  work,  if  possible,  and  then  go  into  camp. 

In  ordinary  flat  or  undulating  country,  hourly  halts  are  not  neces- 
sary for  pack  trains.  It  is  better  to  complete  the  day's  march  quickly, 
and  get  the  loads  and  aparejos  off  the  animals. 

In  mountainous  country,  however,  halts  should  be  made  as  oppor- 
tunity offers,  to  rest  the  animals  and  secure  the  loads. 

If  the  animals  show  the  inclination,  allow  them  to  drink  when 
opportunity  occurs.  They  travel  better  in  consequence. 

On  dark  nights,  when  following  a  command,  trust  to  the  sense 
of  smell  of  the  riding  animals.  They  will  rarely  leave  the  trail, 
the  sense  of  smell  guiding  them  more  truly  than  sight.  The  animals, 
too,  are  more  solicitous  of  keeping  the  trail  at  night  than  in  the 
day. 

Never  adjust  an  animal's  load  while  his  head  is  uphill;  always 
face  him  downhill. 

During  night  travel,  keep  the  animals  within  hearing  distance  of 
the  bell. 

Desiring  to  surprise  an  enemy,  muffle  the  bell  with  a  handkerchief, 
allowing  a  faint  sound,  if  necessary. 

In  fording  streams,  do  not  permit  the  animals  either  to  bunch  up 
or  to  straggle  out.  After  the  bell  horse  has  crossed  the  ford,  rattle 
the  bell,  to  encourage  timid  animals. 

If  in  fording  a  stream  a  laden  mule  falls,  cut  the  " standing  rope" 
of  the  lashing,  so  as  to  free  the  load  in  case  this  becomes  necessary  in 
order  to  save  the  life  of  the  animal. 

A  similar  course  may  be  pursued  when  an  animal  loses  his  foot- 
ing on  a  mountain  side. 

Pack  masters  should  always  be  provided  with  a  heavy  hunting 
knife  for  the  purpose. 

In  traveling  through  dry  and  desert  countries,  two  10-gallon  casks 
of  water  should  be  carried  in  a  pack  train.  It  will  be  found,  how- 
ever, that  if  available,  canned  tomatoes  are  a  good  substitute  and 
quench  the  thirst  better  than  a  small  allowance  of  water. 

When  expecting  a  dry  march,  do  not  eat  beans  or  salted  meats  for 
the  morning  meal. 

The  "bell"  horse  should  not  be  ridden. 

CAMPING. 

SEC.  123.  In  camping  avoid  low  and  swampy  ground. 

Always  camp  on  the  farther  side  of  a  stream  in  the  direction  of 
travel. 

Do  not  camp  in  a  "box"  canyon,  i.  e.,  one  which  has  but  one  prac- 
tical outlet. 

On  getting  into  camp  it  is  not  necessary,  as  sometimes  held,  to 
loosen  the  aparejos  and  allow  them  to  remain  for  half  an  hour  or  so 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  163 

on  the  animals.0     It  will  do  them  more  good  to  be  relieved  of  the  apa- 
rejos  and  allowed  to  roll. 

USE    OF    BLINDS. 

SEC.  124.  A  pack  mule  is  always  blinded  when  putting  on  the  apa- 
rejo  and  the  load;  also,  when  the  load  needs  tightening  on  the  road. 
He  is  not  blinded  when  taking  off  the  load  and  the  aparejo. 

Blinds  should  always  be  carried  on  the  left  arm  when  traveling. 

When  putting  on  the  aparejos  the  packer  whose  blind  is  not  being 
used  lays  it  on  the  ground  in  front  of  the  mule.  After  an  aparejo  is 
on,  the  near  packer  removes  the  blind,  places  it  on  the  collar  of  the 
aparejo  and  proceeds  to  tie  up  the  halter  shank.  (Sec.  57,  figs.  40-41.) 

The  off  packer,  after  securing  latigo,  takes  this  blind  off  the  apa- 
rejo and  hastens  to  get  another  mule.  The  packer  tying  up  the  halter 
shank  picks  up  the  blind  on  the  ground. 

Mules  should  be  taught  not  to  move  when  the  blind  is  on.  Conse- 
quently, if  necessary  to  change  the  position  of  a  mule  always  lift  the 
blind  before  causing  him  to  stir. 

KINDNESS    TO    ANIMALS. 

SEC.  125.  A  mule  remembers  kindness  and  will  recognize  by  sight 
and  sense  of  smell  the  individual  who  has  shown  it  to  him.  Be  brutal 
in  treatment  of  him  and  he  will  shy  from  you  and  avoid  you. 

Kindness  will  conciliate  the  most  vicious  animal  and  cause  him  to 
become  docile. 

If  vicious,  provide  means  to  prevent  his  injuring  any  person. 

In  doing  so  do  not  maltreat  the  animal.  Treat  him  Kindly,  but 
firmly,  and  he  will  soon  learn  to  recognize  you  as  his  master,  and  obey. 

Maltreat  him  and  he  will  never  forget  you. 

PRECAUTIONS. 

SEC.  126.  In  malarial  districts  or  hot  climates  wear  a  woolen  band- 
age 12  inches  wide  wrapped  from  two  to  three  times  around  the 
stomach. 

Avoid  fruit  and  nuts;  lemons,  however,  in  form  of  lemonade,  may 
be  taken,  but  not  to  excess. 

Avoid  spirituous  liquors  of  all  descriptions. 

While  traveling,  sleep  under  canvas  of  some  description  to  avoid 
the  dew. 

Procure  twigs  or  brush,  never  green  grasses,  on  which  to  spread 
blankets. 

If  possible,  procure  a  hammock  and  always  use  it,  especially  during 
the  rainy  season.  Above  all  things,  do  not  sleep  on  the  bare  ground. 

Boiled  fresh  milk  is  good  for  a  weak  stomach;  condensed  milk  is  a 
good  substitute. 

Keep  a  supply  of  quinine,  but  use  it  sparingly  and  only  when  neces- 
sity requires. 

Keep  the  head  cool,  the  feet  warm,  and  the  bowels  in  order,  and 
fear  no  danger  from  sickness  in  any  climate. 

a  Twenty-five  or  thirty  years  ago  it  was  the  custom  to  loosen  the  aparejos  and  allow 
them  to  remain  on  the  animals  for  half  an  hour  with  the  belief  that  if  any  bunches 
occur  during  travel  this  method  would  reduce  them.  This,  however,  is  an  error  and 
affords  no  relief. 


164  MANUAL  OF  PACK   TKANSPOKTATION. 

Keep  on  hand  a  small  supply  of  needles,  silk  thread,  and  bandages 
in  case  of  wounds. 

Keep  a  small  supply  of  ammonia  for  animals,  in  case  of  snake  bite. 
Puncture  the  flesh  freely  around  the  bitten  part  and  rub  ammonia 
well  in  with  fingers.  Be  careful,  however,  tnat  the  fingers  have  no 
abrasion. 

For  screw  worms,  keep  a  supply  of  chloroform,  or  crysilic  ointment. 

GLOSSARY. 
SEC.  127.— 

Aparejo  (pronounced  "ap-pa-ray-ho"):  A  pack  saddle. 

Bag,  war:  A  clothes  sack.     (Sec.  93.) 

Bell:  Ordinarily  a  sheep  bell,  attached  by  a  strap  to  the  neck  of  the  horse. 

Bell  horse:  A  horse  with  a  bell  strapped  about  its  neck  and  used  to  lead  a  pack  train 
of  mules;  sometimes  alluded  to  as  the  "bell "  in  such  expressions  as  "get  the  bell,  " 
"lead  the  bell,  "  "stop  the  bell,  "  "call  the  bell.  " 

Bell  sharp:  Applied  to  mules  that  become  especially  attached  to  the  "bell"  horse. 

Blind:  A  hood  of  leather,  made  to  cover  the  eyes  of  a  pack  mule  when  loading  the 
animal  or  tightening  the  load.  (Figs.  40-41.) 

Boot:  Term  applied  to  the  end  pieces  of  aparejo. 

Boot  bar:  A  section  of  wood  representing  the  finished  product,  when  the  boot  of  the 
aparejo  is  properly  filled  with  hay  by  the  skilled  packer,  and  provided  with 
slots  to  receive  ribs  of  wood.  (In  connection  with  the  saddle  bar,  the  boot  bar 
holds  the  ribs  in  place,  thus  stiffening  the  aparejo.) 

Brake:  To  brake  a  pack;  to  brake  a  load — signifying  the  act  of  working  the  packs  close 
together  and  into  their  proper  relative  positions  after  they  have  been  tied  together 
by  a  sling  rope.  (Sec.  28.) 

Bunch:  A  puffing  up  of  the  skin. 

Cargo:  The  loads  carried  by  a  pack  train,  when  spoken  of  collectively.  To  "form 
cargo,"  i.  e.,  to  arrange  in  an  orderly  and  convenient  manner  an  aggregation  of 
loads.  (Sec.  53.) 

Cargador:  An  individual  who,  in  the  organization  of  a  pack  train,  is  next  in  importance 
after  the  pack  master.  He  has  to  do  with  making  up  and  forming  the  cargo,  equal- 
izing the  packs,  caring  for  mules,  repairing  aparejos,  etc.  (Sec.  114.) 

Carrier  piece:  A  fold  of  leather  sewed  in  between  the  back  and  belly  pieces  of  aparejo 
at  rear,  to  which,  by  means  of  lacing,  the  crupper  is  attached,  and  which  thus 
serves  to  support  the  crupper  and  prevent  it  from  hanging  too  low  on  the  mule's 
buttocks,  (g,  fig.  1.) 

Center  stitch  line:  The  stitch  line  which  divides  the  aparejo  into  two  equal  parts. 

(j,  %.  1.) 
Cinch  (cincha):  A  broad  canvas  band,  by  means  of  which  the  aparejo  is  secured  on  the 

mule's  back.     (Ill,  fig.  1.) 
Collar:  That  portion  of  the  aparejo  which  lies  over  the  mule's  withers.     It  is  so  shaped 

as  to  relieve  the  mule  of  all  pressure  on  the  withers.     (1,  i,  fig.  1.) 
Corona:  A  saddle  pad,  which  is  placed  on  the  mule's  back  before  the  blanket  and 

aparejo  are  put  on.    A  numeral  is  placed  on  one  of  its  sides  to  distinguish  it. 

(V,  fig.  1.) 
Cover,  aparejo  (or  sobre-jalma):  A  canvas  covering  attached  to  the  aparejo  to  protect 

the  leather  from  wear  and  tear.     Called  by  packers  a  "sovereian  hammer,  soldier 

hammer."     (II,  fig.  1.) 
Cover,  pack:  A  section  of  heavy  canvas  employed  to  wrap  therein,  by  means  of  rope, 

certain  packages  that  may  deteriorate  by  exposure  to  rain  or  dampness. 
Cover,  rigging:  Covers  used  to  protect  the  aparejos  in  camp  or  bivouac.  (Sec.  78.) 
Cover,  cargo:  Canvas  used  to  protect  aggregation  of  loads,  termed  the  "cargo,"  in 

camp  or  bivouac.     (Sec.  79.) 
Cover,  feed:  Canvas  laid  on  the  ground  at  the  picket  line,  on  which  grain  is  placed 

for  feeding  the  animals.     (Sec.  80.) 
Crupper:  A  leather  band  attached  to  the  front  facing  and  carrier  pieces  of  the  aparejo, 

and  fitting  under  the  mule's  tail,  its  purpose  being  to  steady  the  aparejo,  and  to 

prevent  it  from  slipping  to  the  front.     (IV,  fig.  1.) 

Deadtnan:  A  holdfast,  sunk  in  the  ground,  to  which  the  picket  line  is  attached. 
Diamond  hitch:  Name  applied  to  the  lashing,  by  means  of  which  the  load  is  secured  to 

the  aparejo,  the  two  ropes  forming  a  diamond  or  lozenge  on  top  of  the  load. 
Dock  piece:  That  portion  of  the  crupper  that  fits  under  the  animal's  tail;  also  applied 

to  that  portion  of  the  animal's  tail  under  which  the  dock  of  the  crupper  rests. 


MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION.  165 

Drag  tails:  Term  applied  to  mules  that  are  farthest  away  from  the  "bell "  when  travel- 
ing; also  applied  to  a  lazy  packer. 

Facings:  Additional  pieces  or  strips  of  leather,  applied  to  certain  parts  of  the  aparejo 
to  strengthen  them,  (d,  e,f,  etc.,  fig.  1.) 

"Go: "  Term  used  by  the  "near"  to  the  "off"  packer,  when  hitch  is  formed  and  ready 
to  be  tightened. 

Hand-hole:  Hole  made  in  the  belly  piece  of  the  aparejo  in  the  center  of  each  side,  to 
enable  the  packer  to.  insert  the  hay  or  grass  that  forms  the  padding. 

"Hold: "  Signal  by  the  "near"  to  the  "off"  packer  to  hold  his  pack  in  position,  while 
the  "near"  packer  brakes  the  load. 

Lair:  Term  applied  to  the  rope  used  in  securing  pack  covers  around  pack.  Hence, 
to  "lair;"  "to  lair  up;"  meaning  to  secure  the  pack  cover  to  the  pack  by  means 
of  the  lair  rope.  (Sec.  15.) 

Line  up:  Meaning  to  cause  the  pack  mules  to  take  position  at  rear  of  the  rigging  on  the 
proper  flank  of  the  "  bell "  horse. 

Load:  A  pack  or  packs  forming  the  burden  for  one  pack  mule.  Hence,  "to  load  up, " 
meaning  to  place  the  loads,  as  formed  in  cargo,  on  the  pack  mules. 

Pack:  In  the  ordinary  case,  that  portion  of  the  load  carried  on  one  side  of  the  mule's 
back.  A  load,  however,  may  consist  of  a  single  pack  or  of  several  packs,  depending 
on  the  nature  of  the  articles  to  be  packed,  or  the  exigencies  of  the  service. 

Pack  up:  Meaning  to  load  up;  to  place  the  loads,  as  formed  in  cargo,  on  the  pack  mules. 

Packer,  first-class:  One  skilled  in  the  art  of  preparing  cargo ;  loading  a  pack  mule ;  adjust- 
ing a  load  so  that  it  will  balance  evenly  on  the  mule's  back,  etc.;  one  familiar 
with  the  "diamond"  and  other  hitches  used  in  securing  loads,  and  versed  in  the 
usages  and  customs  of  the  pack  service. 

Packer,  second-class:  A  novice  in  the  art  of  packing. 

Pack  master:  A  master  in  the  art  of  packing;  one  who  has  charge  of  a  pack  train. 

Ribbing  up:  Placing  in  an  aparejo  the  sticks,  or  whatever  may  be  used  to  give  stiffness 
to  the  sides  of  the  aparejo. 

Rigging:  Term  applied  to  the  aparejos  in  a  pack  train;  particularly  when  it  is  desired 
to  refer  to  them  in  a  collective  sense. 

Saddle  bar:  A  section  of  wood  representing  the  finished  product  when  the  saddle  of 
the  aparejo  is  properly  filled  with  hay  or  similar  material,  by  the  skilled  packer, 
and  provided  with  slots  to  receive  ribs  of  wood.  In  connection  with  the  boot  bar, 
the  saddle  bar  holds  the  ribs  in  place,  by  means  of  which  the  aparejo  is  stiffened. 

Set  up:  To  set  up  an  aparejo,  meaning  to  prepare  it  for  use  by  inserting  the  ribs,  and 
then  padding  it  with  hay,  so  as  to  adjust  it  properly  to  the  shape  of  the  mule's 
back.  (Sees.  6  and  7.) 

Settle:  To  adjust  packs  to  their  places  on  the  aparejo,  as  in  the  case  of  simple  box  loads. 
Here  it  is  not  necessary  to  brake  the  load,  i.  e.,  to  work  the  near  pack  up  and  down, 
until  it  is  in  place,  as  the  two  packs  may  readily  be  settled  on  the  aparejo  so  as  to 
ride  evenly. 

Shoe:  Term  applied  to  the  protecting  sticks  of  the  aparejo  cover.     (1.  II,  fig.  1.) 

Sling:  Term  applied  to  the  rope  used  in  tying  the  packs  together  on  the  mule's  back 
prior  to  being  lashed.  Hence,  "to  sling"  the  load;  "to  cross  sling;"  "to  double 
sling;"  and  "to  double  cross  sling."  (Sees.  27  to  31.) 

Snap  up:  To  tie  animals  together  by  their  halter  shanks,  while  standing  at  the  rig- 
ging. (Sec.  56.) 

Stem  or  snap:  Names  sometimes  applied  to  halter  shanks. 

Sticks,  protecting:  Used  on  the  aparejo  cover  to  stiffen  the  ends.  Sometimes  called 
shoes.  (1.  II,  fig.  1.) 

Sticks,  tamping:  Used  in  tamping  hay,  etc.,  in  the  corners  of  the  aparejo. 

Tie:  Signal  from  the  "off"  to  the  "near"  packer  that  all  slack  has  been  rendered  on 
the"  running  rope.  Also  signal  from  the  "near"  to  the  "off"  packer  for  the  latter 
to  secure  the  end  of  the  rope,  on  completion  of  the  hitch. 

"Tied:"  Signal  from  the  "near"  to  the  "off"  packer,  in  slinging  the  load,  that  the 
"square"  knot  has  been  tied. 

Trail:  A  path,  usually  narrow;  hence  incumbent  upon  animals  of  a  train  to  move  in 
single  file.  "To  trail "  means  to  follow  in  single  file  after  the  "bell "  horse. 

Train,  pack:  A  pack  train  is  an  organization  comprising  fifty  pack  animals,  a  proper 
complement  of  men,  and  a  complete  equipment.  (Sec.  87.) 

7.  SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  PACK  AND  RIDING  MULES. 

SEC.  128.  The  mule  must  be  sound  in  body  and  limbs,  of  blocky 
build,  of  kind  and  gentle  disposition,  with  free  and  springy  action 
at  the  walk  or  trot,  and  to  conform  to  the  following  description : 


166  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

The  pack  mule  must  be  in  fair  condition,  from  4  to  6  years  old; 
weight,  depending  upon  height,  to  be  as  follows: 

Pack  mules  should  weigh  from  950  to  1,025  pounds,  and  be  from 
14.1  hands  to  15  hands  high. 

Head  of  medium  size,  well  formed,  intelligent  looking,  broad  be- 
tween the  eyes;  eyes  clear,  large,  and  full;  ears  long  and  flexible;  teeth 
and  tongue  free  of  blemishes;  muzzle  well  rounded  and  firm. 

Neck,  stocky,  broad  and  full  at  crest,  and  inclined  to  arch. 

Withers,  low  and  broad,  indicating  strength  in  shoulders. 

Chest,  low  and  broad,  with  division  well  defined,  holding  the  fore 
legs  well  apart,  showing  good  lung  power. 

Knees,  wide  in  front  and  free  of  blemishes. 

Back,  short  and  straight,  indicating  strength  in  back  over  region  of 
the  kidneys. 

Barrel,  deep  and  large,  indicating  a  good  feeder — not  hard  to  please 
in  either  food  or  water — a  most  essential  requisite  in  the  selection  of 
pack  mules. 

Hips,  broad  and  well  rounded. 

Dock,  low  and  stiff,  offering  resistance,  showing  endurance. 

Hocks,  standing  well  apart  and  strongly  made,  showing  well  devel- 
oped buttocks. 

Pasterns,  muscled,  short,  and  strongly  shaped. 

Hoofs,  sound,  broad,  and  full,  with  frog  well  developed,  elastic, 
and  healthy. 

Riding  mules  will  conform  to  the  above  conditions,  with  the  excep- 
tion, they  may  be  deeper  from  point  of  withers  to  brisket. 

WHAT   TO    AVOID    IN    THE    SELECTION    OF    PACK    MULES. 

SEC.  129.  Head:  Avoid  a  long  and  large  head,  dish  face  and 
Roman  nose,  narrow  between  the  eyes,  eyes  small,  round,  and  sunk 
well  under  eyebrow,  the  eye  inclined  to  snap  and  show  the  white;  ears 
erect  and  stiff,  indicating  advanced  age;  teeth  long,  pointed  and  flat 
on  upper  surface,  with  bean  well  worn;  tongue  cut  or  other  blemish; 
mouth  cut  at  inner  corners,  and  under  lip  hanging  down. 

Neck,  long  and  thin,  inclined  to  be  ewe-necked. 

Withers,  high  and  narrow. 

Chest,  high  at  center  or  chicken-breasted,  lacking  vitality. 

Knees,  small  and  out  of  line. 

Back,  long  or  sway-backed,  indicating  weakness  over  kidneys. 

Barrel,  small  and  round,  drawn  in  the  flank. 

Hips,  prominent  and  angular. 

Dock,  nigh  and  weak. 

Hocks,  standing  close  together,  throwing  the  feet  well  out. 

Limbs,  knees,  and  hocks  showing  wind  galls. 

Pasterns,  with  scratches,  cuts,  or  bruises. 

Hoofs,  "pigeontoed,"  high  and  narrow,  and  drawn  at  the  frog, 
indicating  the  latter  has  lost  vitality. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

THE  DALY  APAREJO— SPECIFICATIONS  FOB  CONSTRUCTION. 

SEC.  130.  There  are  in  general  use  the  62,  60,  and  58  inch  aparejos, 
i.  e.,  measuring  from  end  to  end  62,  60,  and  58  inches,  respectively. 

THE    BODY    OF    THE    APAREJO. 

(1)  The  back  piece,  (2)  the  belly  or  body  piece,  (3)  the  boots,  (4) 
the  boot  facings,  (5)  the  front  facing,  (6)  the  center  facing,  (7)  the 
carrier  pieces,  (8)  the  welts. 

NOTE. — The  first  two  items  of  the  above  are  sometimes  referred  to 
as  the  "body  pieces." 

DETAILED    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Take  a  60-inch  aparejp  as  a  standard — 60  inches  long  and  24  inches 
wide  throughout  its  entire  length. 

THE    BODY. 

(1)  To  be  made  of  solid,  fair  leather,  tallow  finish;  sides  to  be  of 
good  spread,  weighing  from  12  to  14  pounds  to  the  side,  free  of  cuts 
and  blemishes. 

Cut  the  back  piece  43 £  inches  long  and  24  inches  wide.  Cut  the 
belly  or  body  piece  45 ^  inches  long  and  24  inches  wide. 

Cut  boots  24  inches  long  and  18  inches  wide.  Face  the  boots  at 
each  end  with  a  semicircular  facing,  facing  to  be  18  inches  long  and 
12  inches  wide,  diameter  of  semicircle  to  be  16  inches.  Facings  to 
meet  at  center  of  boot. 

The  facings  must  be  sewed  on  with  three  seams,  one-fourth  of  an 
inch  apart  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  their  semicircular  edges, 
and  one  seam  3  inches  from  the  outward  edge  all  around. 

The  back  piece  has  a  front  facing  from  end  to  end  of  6  J  inches  wide. 
This  facing  to  be  of  good  solid  leather,  as  it  is  to  receive  the  crupper 
lacings. 

Facing  to  be  sewed  down  with  two  seams  2J  inches  from  the  inner 
edge  for  the  first,  2  inches  from  the  outward  edge  for  the  second. 
This  facing  to  have  five  f-inch  holes  punched  1  inch  from  the  inner 
edge  and  spaced  equally  distant  between  the  boot  and  center  facing. 

Center  facing  to  be  24  inches  long  and  8  inches  wide;  to  be  placed 
at  center  of  back  piece  extending  from  front  to  rear,  sewed  down, 
with  two  seams  on  each  side  at  edge  one-half  of  an  inch  apart.  The 
front  facing  on  back  piece  forms  the  front  of  the  aparejo. 

The  boots  lap  on  to  body  pieces  1|  inches  on  outside;  to  be  sewed 
down  with  three  seams,  one-fourth  of  an  inch  apart  and  one-eighth 
of  an  inch  from  the  edges.  In  lapping  inside  to  back  pieces  the  fleshy 
side  of  the  belly  piece  must  face  outward. 

167 


168  MANUAL  OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

In  closing  up  the  body  care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  boots  or 
ends  doubled  exactly  alike,  so  that  the  top  of  the  boot  of  belly  piece 
will  just  meet  the  end  of  back  or  body  piece.  The  center  seam  to  be 
sewed  down  to  belly  and  back  pieces,  and  must  positively  be  in  the 
center  of  the  aparejo. 

The  belly  piece  will  have  a  " hand-hole"  5^  inches  long  and  5  inches 
wide,  cut  out  in  center  of  belly  piece  15  inches  from  center  seam  to 
center  of  hole. 

Back  piece  to  have  a  hand-hole  of  similar  dimensions  cut  in  center 
of  back  or  body  piece,  10  inches  from  center  seam  to  center  of  hole, 
this  hand-hole  to  be  cut  around  to  within  1  inch  from  either  side  of 
center  at  top.  This  forms  a  lid  and  is  provided  with  one  hole  at  center 
of  lower  end,  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  edge,  large  enough  to  receive 
thong  for  lacing.  A  similar  hole  is  provided  on  the  body  in  line  with 
this,  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  edge ;  both  holes  facing  up  and  down. 

On  back  or  body  piece  at  rear  a  slit  12  inches  long  is  provided;  to 
be  2  inches  from  the  outward  or  rear  edge ;  commencing  with  1  inch 
above  the  boot,  running  upward  toward  the  center  seam,  and  provided 
with  5  holes  on  either  side  of  slit,  spaced  equally  distant  to  receive 
lacings.  These  slits  are  for  the  purpose  of  introducing  the  inside 
frame  or  ribbing  for  aparejo. 

The  " hand-hole"  on  back  or  body  piece  is  provided  for  guiding  ribs 
to  position  in  boot  and  saddle  bars. 

In  front  there  must  be  a  welt  of  good,  solid  leather,  three-fourths 
of  an  inch  wide,  laid  in  between  the  belly  and  back  pieces,  extending 
from  end  to  end,  to  be  sewed  down  with  two  seams,  three-eighths  of 
an  inch  apart  and  one-fourth  inch  from  edge. 

In  sewing  along  edge  at  front,  a  space  of  three-fourths  of  an  inch 
must  be  omitted,  counting  3J  inches  from  center  seam  each  way. 
This  to  permit  "key  bar"  to  pass  through  in  locking  ribs  of  inside 
frame. 

Now  punch  two  holes,  three-fourths  of  an  inch  apart;  the  first  at 
center  or  space,  corresponding  to  hole  provided  in  brass  "key  bar,"  the 
second  on  the  lower  side,  and  provide  thong  10  inches  long  to  secure 
"key  bar"  to  aparejo,  both  holes  to  be  "up  and  down." 

The  rear  has  a  similar  welt  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide  and  14 
inches  long,  extending  7  inches  each  way  from  center  seam. 

Below  this  welt  the  "carrier"  pieces  are  placed  for  the  purpose  of 
carrying  the  crupper,  and  is  arranged  by  taking  a  piece  of  leather  4 
by  8  inches,  of  half  the  thickness  of  the  welt,  f oldea  the  narrow  way, 
slipped  in  exactly  three-fourths  of  an  inch,  leaving  the  folded  part  out. 

The  extending  part  of  the  "carrier"  pieces  will  have  three  sets  of 
holes  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  two  holes  at  the  upper  end 
and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  apart,  the  first  hole  to  be  1  inch  from 
end;  two  holes  will  be  provided  in  similar  manner  at  opposite  end, 
and  two  holes  at  center  in  similar  manner ;  the  holes  to  be  parallel  with 
the  length  of  "carrier"  pieces. 

Thongs  for  each  "carrier"  piece  will  be  provided;  and  to  be  of 
latigo  leather,  12  inches  long  and  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  wide. 

From  the  "carriers"  to  the  end  of  the  aparejo  there  must  be  a  welt 
similar  to  that  described  for  the  front;  the  whole  to  be  sewed  down 
with  two  seams  in  similar  manner  as  described  for  the  front. 

The  collar  that  shapes  the  aparejo  for  the  withers  must  be  6  inches 
wide  and  6  inches  deep;  that  is  to  say,  6  inches  along  the  front  seam 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  169 

at  center  and  6  inches  back  toward  rear,  shaped  in  this  manner: 
Three  inches  on  each  side  of  center  stitch  line  of  the  aparejo,  run 
back  4  inches  parallel  with  center  stitch  line,  then  run  2  inches  toward 
center  stitch  line,  then  back  2  inches  parallel  with  center  stitch  line, 
then  up  to  center  stitch  line. 

The  center  seam,  like  center  of  collar,  must  positively  be  in  the 
center  of  the  aparejo  and  exactly  straight  across  the  body. 

It  is  understood  the  collar  is  placed  on  the  front  as  indicated  by 
the  front  facing  of  the  aparejo,  and,  like  center  seam,  is  sewed  to  back 
and  belly  pieces. 

Now  punch  two  holes,  one  on  each  side  of  the  center  stitch  line  and 
to  be  three-fourths  of  an  inch  apart  at  front  and  rear,  spaced  equally 
distant  from  center  stitch  line.  These  holes  to  be  provided  between 
the  two  outward  seams  with  thong  10  inches  long  for  lacing,  to  secure 
aparejo  cover  to  aparejo. 

If  using  willow  or  other  sticks  cut  two  slits  2  inches  long,  one  on  each 
side  of  center  stitch  line,  running  downward  from  center  stitch  line, 
slits  to  be  in  center  of  aparejo.  In  cutting  slits  be  careful  not  to 
cut  through  center  stitch  line. 

If  using  packing  device  cut. two  slits  1  inch  long  and  three-six- 
teenths inch  wide,  counting  4f  inches  from  center  seam  of  aparejo 
to  center  of  slit  and  1  inch  from  each  edge. 

These  are  for  the  purpose  to  receive  chock  plates  holding  staples 
that  receive  the  side  plates  of  packing  device,  etc. 

Chock  plates  to  be  If  inches  square  and  one-eighth  of  an  inch  thick; 
corners  to  be  rounded  off.  To  secure  chock  plates  to  aparejo  provide 
four  holes  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  one  at  each  corner 
spaced  equally  distant,  and  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  from  outer 
edges. 

These  to  receive  copper  rivets  that  secure  chock  plates  to  aparejo. 

Next  provide  two  holes  three-fourths  of  an  inch  apart,  counting 
from  center  of  hole  each  way;  these  to  be  placed  at  center  of  chock 
plate  and  are  for  the  purposes  of  receiving  staples. 

Staples  to  be  made  of  ^-inch  best  steel  rod,  and  when  shaped  to 
have  a  depth  of  1  inch.  In  shaping  staples  they  must  have  uniform 
width  of  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  crown  to  base,  counting  from 
center  to  center  of  staple.  On  extremities  of  staples  provide  a  shoul- 
der of  sufficient  depth  to  receive  chock  plate  and  to  be  securely  riveted 
thereon. 

NOTE. — For  62-inch  aparejo  the  body  pieces  are  cut  2  inches  longer 
than  that  for  a  60-inch  aparejo. 

For  58-inch  aparejo  the  body  pieces  are  cut  the  same  length  as  that 
provided  for  the  60-inch,  the  boots  being  cut  24  inches  long  and  16 
inches  wide. 

Of  50  aparejos  make  twenty-five  60  inches  long  and  24  inches  wide, 
thirteen  62  inches  long  and  24  inches  wide,  and  twelve  58  inches  long 
and  24  inches  wide. 

NOTE. — In  ordering  50  aparejos  the  proportion  of  sizes  should  be 
as  noted  above. 

In  width  they  must  be  uniformly  24  inches  throughout  their  en- 
tire length;  and  collar  with  center  seam  must  positively  be  in  the 
center  of  the  aparejo.) 


170  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

THE    CRUPPER. 

(2)  To  be  of  good,  solid,  fair  leather,  tallow  finish,  sides  to  be  of 
good  spread,  weighing  from  12  to  14  pounds,  and  free  from  cuts 
and  blemishes. 

Standard  size  for  cruppers  to  be  78  inches  long  and  12  inches  wide. 

To  form  crupper  cut  two  sections  39  inches  long  and  12  inches 
wide. 

At  heaviest  end,  counting  3|  inches  from  one  corner,  cut  in  4  inches 
to  form  dock;  now  describe  a  cut  upward,  circling  to  within  24  inches 
of  opposite  end. 

Now  allow  a  space  of  2  inches  for  dock  and  cut  in  2  inches,  and  de- 
scribe a  cut  downward,  circling  to  within  24  inches  of  opposite  end. 

Half  the  crupper  is  thus  shaped.  Cut  a  corresponding  one  .and  lap 
both,  allowing  4  inches  for  upper  surface  of  dock,  lap  to  be  sewed 
down  in  center  with  two  seams  one-half  of  an  inch  apart;  length 
of  seams  4  inches;  before  lapping  ends  shave  down  the  under  surface 
at  ends. 

For  top  facing  provide  a  strip  of  good,  solid  leather  30  inches  long 
and  3  inches  wide,  shaped  to  extend  around  dock  to  within  24  inches 
of  each  end;  cut  2  more  strips  same  width  26  inches  long,  lap  2  inches 
and  sew  down  with  two  seams  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  each  edge. 

For  bottom  facing  provide  two  strips  of  good,  solid  leather  37 
inches  long,  conforming  to  the  shape  of  lower  edge  of  crupper;  com- 
mencing at  one  end  there  must  be  a  uniform  width  of  3  inches,  ex- 
tending 15  inches  toward  opposite  end,  then  describe  a  cut,  circling 
toward  center  of  dock,  greatest  width  to  be  6  inches;  to  be  sewed 
down  three  seams,  outer  seams  to  be  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  outer 
edges,  the  third,  or  center  seam,  to  extend  from  dock  to  within  24 
inches  of  opposite  end. 

To  form  cover  for  dock,  take  a  piece  of  good,  solid  leather  10  inches 
long  and  7  inches  wide  doubled  in  center  the  long  way  and  at  center 
of  ends  cut  in  3  inches,  at  end  of  cut  and  in  center,  use  a  f -inch  hand 
punch  so  that  it  will  fit  down  into  the  dock,  soak  well,  draw  snug 
and  sew  down;  shave  off  the  under  edges  so  as  to  leave  it  smooth  on 
the  animal's  hips. 

Leave  If  inches  for  dock  and  leave  one  or  both  ends  open  to 
introduce  the  stuffing.  Deer  or  antelope  hair  is  best  for  the  purpose. 

Stuff  and  form  the  dock  while  the  leather  is  soft. 

In  shaping  the  dock  rub  it  on  top  as  the  stuffing  is  introduced,  at 
the  same  time  bringing  the  ends  of  the  crupper  together  and  bending 
the  ends  of  the  dock  upward  so  as  to  shape  the  dock  to  the  animal's 
tail,  and  the  butt  of  the  crupper  to  the  animal's  hips. 

Lining  for  crupper  to  be  of  28-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck,  extend- 
ing from  dock  to  within  24  inches  of  end  each  way;  in  cutting  allow 
for  lap  of  1  inch  all  around;  to  be  sewed  down  with  slanting  stitch 
spaced  one-half  inch  on  upper  and  under  sides.  When  lining  is  in 
position  the  upper  edge  of  the  crupper  on  either  side  of  dock,  extend- 
ing 10  inches  each  way,  to  be  bound  down  with  sheepskin. 

In  sewing  the  upper  edge  of  top  facing  a  space  of  10  niches  should 
be  omitted  to  receive  this  binding,  binding  to  be  then  sewed  down 
in  regular  manner. 

At  each  end  of  crupper  five  f-inch  holes  are  punched,  the  first  and 
fifth  to  be  in  center  of  top  and  bottom  facings,  the  rest  spaced  equally 


;    , 

MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  171 

distant  between  the  first  and  fifth  and  1  inch  from  ends.  On  top 
facing  and  in  center  four  f-inch  holes  are  punched,  measuring  for  the 
first  24  inches  from  center  of  dock,  and  spaced  equally  distant  to  last 
hole  on  end  of  top  facing. 

Lacing  for  crupper  to  be  of  best  latigo  leather  one-half  inch  wide 
and  7  feet  long. 

Lacings  to  have  a  slit  at  heavy  end  1J  inches  long  in  center  and 
three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  end.  These  to  be  fastened  at  hole 
provided  on  end  of  top  facing  of  crupper. 


THE    APAREJO    COVER    OR    SOBRE-JALMA. 


(3)  To  be  made  of  No.  4,  22-inch  cotton  duck.  The  canvas  is  cut 
4  inches  shorter  than  the  length  of  the  body  of  the  aparejo.  It  is 
faced  on  both  sides  with  leather  4  inches  wide  from  end  to  end  and  5 
inches  wide  across  ends.  These  facings  when  put  on  must  be  allowed 
to  extend  over  the  sides  and  ends  of  canvas  so  as  to  make  the  cover 
three-eighths  inch  wider  and  longer  than  the  aparejo ;  to  be  sewed  with 
seam  at  each  edge.  The  sewing  on  end  or  bottom  facings  must 
extend  to  ends  of  facing. 

The  protecting  sticks  or  shoes  to  be  21  inches  long,  2J  inches  wide, 
and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  thick,  taper  the  ends  on  one  side  to  half 
the  thickness  at  ends,  extending  5J  inches  toward  center  from  each 
end,  and  taper  on  edges  from  center  to  a  width  of  1  inch  at  ends;  to 
be  placed  in  center  of  facings  across  ends. 

In  tapering  sticks  do  not  allow  a  ridge  in  center.  The  protecting 
sticks  or  shoes  to  be  faced  at  each  end,  facing  to  be  placed  so  as  to 
leave  an  exposed  surface  of  10  inches  wide  in  center;  to  be  sewed  down 
with  two  seams  one-half  inch  apart. 

Now  punch  two  holes  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  edge  of  center, 
in  front  and  rear,  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  apart.  This  to  secure 
aparejo  cover  to  aparejo. 

If  using  packing  device  provide  two  strips  of  leather  14  inches  long 
and  one-half  inch  wide;  these  to  be  placed  at  front  and  rear  and  in 
center  of  aparejo  cover,  counting  from  each  edge  1|  inches,  and  to 
be  sewed  down  with  two  seams  3  inches  long  and  secured  at  each  end 
of  sewing  by  copper  rivets.  Now  counting  5  inches  each  way  from 
center  of  sobre-jalma  at  front  and  rear  provide  a  slit  1  inch  long  and 
three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  wide,  slits  to  be  parallel  with  the  center 
of  width  of  sobre-jalma.  These  to  receive  staples  that  secure  the  side 
plates  of  packing  device. 


THE    APAREJO    CINCHA. 


(4)  To  be  made -of  No.  4,  22-inch  cotton  duck.  The  canvas  to  be  8 
inches  longer  than  the  aparejo  for  which  intended,  and  folded  so  as  to 
make  two  thicknesses  10  inches  wide;  the  lap  to  be  sewed  together 
with  two  seams  and  to  be  considered  the  surface  side.  For  mountain 
battery  service  the  canvas  will  be  cut  10  inches  longer  than  the 
aparejo  for  which  intended. 

One  end  of  the  cincha  to  be  supplied  with  a  section  of  f-inch  gas 
pipe,  flattened  at  ends  and  curved  so  as  to  take  the  place  of  a  ring,  to 
pass  the  latigo  or  tightening  strap  around;  when  shaped  must  be  1 
inch  less  than  the  width  of  the  cincha.  Flattened  ends  to  be  pro- 
vided with  holes  punched  1|  inches  from  ends,  to  receive  No.  8  copper 


172  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

rivets  to  hold  it  in  place.  This  iron  is  fastened  to  cincha  by  two 
pieces  of  good,  solid  leather,  11  inches  long  and  5J  inches  wide  and 
riveted  to  iron.  Place  one  end  of  canvas  between  the  folds  of  leather 
facing  and  sew  down  with  three  seams,  two  seams  one-half  inch  apart, 
on  outer  edge,  and  one  seam  around  edge  of  hole.  This  hole  to  be  3 
inches  wide  and  3J  inches  long,  shaped  half  oval.  The  shape  half 
oval  to  be  up  and  down. 

This  for  the  latigo  or  tightening  strap  to  pass  through.  The  reverse 
end  of  cincha  is  faced  with  leather  8J  inches  on  outside  and  !£ 
inches  on  inside,  10  inches  wide  and  10  inches  long,  cut  conical  shape 
on  outside.  Fold  1J  inches  from  square  end  and  lay  into  this  fold  a 
T56-inch  iron  rod  9  inches  long;  lay  it  over  end  of  cincha  and  sew  down 
with  one  seam  across  the  end,  so  as  to  catch  the  short  or  under  side 
of  facing,  and  two  seams  one-half  inch  apart  along  the  edge  of  conical 
facing.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the  sewing  extends  to  ends,  so  that 
the  jVinch  iron  rod  will  not  escape. 

Fifteen  inches  from  strap  or  rod  end  of  cincha  sew  on  a  round  piece 
of  leather  3  inches  in  diameter  on  outside  of  cincha;  punch  two 
f-inch  holes,  one  inch  apart  in  center.  This  to  hold  fastening,  or 
finger  loop,  as  it  is  termed,  and  should  be  of  good,  solid  leather. 
Thong  for  fastening  loop  to  be  12  inches  long  and  one-half  of  an  inch 
wide,  of  best  latigo  leather,  secured  underneath,  allowing  as  much  loop 
to  extend  on  outside  as  possible.  Its  use  is  to  hold  end  of  latigo  or 
tightening  strap  when  the  aparejo  is  cinched  on  the  animal. 

The  latigo  or  tightening  strap  to  be  from  7  to  8  feet  long;  width, 
If  inches  at  heavy  end  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  at  light  end. 

The  rendering  ring  in  heavy  end  of  tightening  or  cincha  strap  to 
be  of  3-inch  breeching  ring,  dropped  into  a  bight,  lapped  2^  inches 
inward;  drop  into  lap  the  3-inch  ring,  double  over  so  as  to  leave  a 
space  of  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  end  of  strap  to  the  inside  of 
lap.  This  loop  is  for  the  lace  string  to  pass  through. 

Rivet  in  center  of  folds  and  sew  down  two  seams. 

The  lacing  for  fastening  straps  to  cincha  to  be  one-half  inch  wide 
and  6  feet  long;  to  be  of  best  latigo  leather. 

The  conical  facing  to  be  provided  with  three  f-inch  holes,  two  6 
inches  apart  and  one-half  inch  from  rod,  the  third  in  center  and  1 
inch  from  top. 

To  fasten  cincha  and  latigo  strap  with  lacing,  bring  the  ends 
together  and  pass  through  hole  at  center  from  underneath,  allowing 
a  loop  of  one-half  inch  to  remain  underneath,  separate  ends,  and  pass 
down  through  holes  at  end. 

Take  the  folds  of  latigo,  ring  up,  and  pass  the  right  end  of  lacing 
through  loop  from  right  to  left  and  into  left-hand  hole  in  cincha 
from  above,  pulling  sufficient  through  to  pass  into  the  loop  in  center 
underneath,  about  6  inches. 

Take  the  left-hand  lacing  and  pass  through  loop  from  left  to  right; 
continue  and  finish  as  before. 


THE    CORONA. 


(5)  To  be  three  thicknesses  of  blanket;  the  first  or  top  blanket  to 
be  of  first-class  kersey  material,  free  from  shoddy  or  any  impure 
material;  to  be  of  uniform  color,  gray  preferred,  and  two  thicknesses 
of  fair  quality,  together  equaling  the  strength  of  the  first  or  top 
blanket. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TKANSPOKTATION.  173 

To  be  2  inches  wider  and  10  inches  shorter  than  the  aparejo  for 
which  intended;  to  be  faced  through  center  from  front  to  rear  with 
kersey  material  contrasting  in  color  with  body  14  inches  wide;  to  be 
sewed  down  with  one  seam  on  edges  and  one  seam  through  center  to 
first  thickness  or  top  blanket. 

For  border  provide  light  canvas  webbing  of  brown  khaki  color  3 
inches  wide,  lapped-under,  underpinning  all  around,  so  as  to  leave  a 
surface  of  2  inches  on  top  or  outer  surface  of  corona;  to  be  sewed 
down  with  2  seams,  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  the  inner  edge  for 
the  first  and  1£  inches  for  the  second. 

Center  of  one  side  of  top  blanket  is  provided  with  a  numeral,  8 
inches  high,  numbers  running  from  1  to  50,  sewed  down  to  first  thick- 
ness or  top  blanket.     Good  tanned  sheepskin  is  required  for  the  pur- 
Eose.     The  two  thicknesses  of  underpinning  to  be  basted  down  to 
rst  thickness  or  top  blanket. 

Sweat  cloth  to  be  of  No.  10  28-inch  cotton  duck,  one  inch  wider  on 
sides  and  ends,  lapped  under  to  come  flush  with  edge  of  corona  all 
around;  to  be  sewed  with  " T-stitch, "  the  same  under  as  well  as  over, 
three-fourths  of  an  inch  apart  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from 
edges.  The  stitch  must  lap  on  edge  over  all. 


THE    PACK    BLANKET. 


(6)  Size. — To  be  not  less  than  7  feet  nor  more  than  7  feet  3  inches 
long.  To  be  not  less  than  5  feet  6  inches  nor  more  than  5  feet  9 
inches  wide  finished. 

Weight. — To  weigh  not  less  than  5  pounds. 

Wool. — To  be  of  pure  long,  staple  wool,  free  from  shoddy,  re- 
worked wool,  cotton,  or  any  impure  material. 

Strength. — To  be  capable  of  sustaining  a  tensile  strength  without 
breaking  of  35  pounds  to  the  inch  warp  ways  and  40  pounds  without 
breaking  to  the  inch  filling  ways.  To  insure  an  even  strain  on 
threads  care  must  be  taken  that  the  material  is  placed  in  the  jaws  of 
the  dynamometer  at  exactly  right  angles  to  the  opposite  system  of 
threads. 

Color. — To  be  a  mixture  of  an  olive  drab  shade  as  required  by 
standard  issue  blanket,  or  may  be  gray  in  color. 

Border. — An  olive  brown  border  about  3  inches  wide  to  extend 
across  the  blanket  about  8  inches  from  each  end;  the  woolen  border 
to  be  of  the  same  grade  as  the  body  of  the  blanket;  to  conform  in 
shape  to  the  border  of  standard  issue  blanket  and  to  withstand  the 
official  tests  for  permanency  of  color. 

Brand.— Each  blanket  to  have  the  letters  "U.  S.  Q.  M.  D.,  P.  T." 
not  less  than  4f  inches  high;  the  lettering  to  be  worked  through  the 
blanket  either  by  hand  or  machine,  using  a  yarn  composed  of  the 
same  material,  shade,  and  permanency  of  dye  as  that  of  the  border,  or 
the  letters  may  be  dyed  with  the  best  cochineals.  Place  lengthwise  in 
center  of  blanket. 

Each  blanket  to  be  manufactured  in  a  thorough  and  workmanlike 
manner,  the  ends  to  be  secured  from  raveling  by  gimp  and  elastic 
overlook  stitch,  as  provided  for  standard  issue  blanket. 


174  MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

HALTERS. 

(7)  To  be  made  of  fair  leather,  regulation  size,  six-ring  halters, 
and  provided  with  brow  band  and  halter  shank  with  trigger  snap, 
size  1J  inches;  snap  to  be  on  heaviest  end  of  shank;  length  of  shank, 
6i  feet. 

One  head  halter  with  shank  and  snap  will  be  provided  for  each 
aparejo. 

One  head  halter  with  shank  and  snap  will  be  provided  for  each 
riding  mule. 

One  head  halter  with  shank  and  snap  will  be  provided  for  each  bell 
horse. 

PACKERS'  BLINDS. 

(8)  To  make  a  cup  blind  take  a  piece  of  good,  solid  leather,  26 
inches  long  and  6J  inches  wide;  cut  and  shape  to  leave  it  3  inches  wide 
at  ends  and  center  and  6J  inches  midway  between  ends  and  center. 
Now  leave  a  space  of  five-eighths  of  an  inch  at  center  of  cup  and  cut 
out  a  piece  on  each  side,  V  shape,  1 J  inches  at  edges;  on  the  under  side 
channel  cut  and  sew  together  to  form  cup. 

Face  edges  with  strap  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide  and  long 
enough  to  come  within  2  inches  of  ends;  shave  ends  to  slope  and  sew 
down  with  two  seams. 

Punch  two  holes  three-fourths  of  an  inch  apart  and  three-fourths 
of  an  inch  from  ends;  cut  out  between  for  tail  thongs  to  pass  through. 
For  thongs  cut  a  strip  of  best  latigo  leather  five-eighths  of  an  inch 
wide  and  5  feet  long;  shave  ends  to  slope  and  pass  through  slit  at  ends. 

For  end  facings  take  a  piece  of  leather  6^  inches  square,  double  and 
shape  to  end ;  punch  two  holes  in  center  of  double  three-fourths  of  an 
inch  apart  and  cut  out  between;  soak  well  and  slip  thongs  through 
slit;  draw  up  snug  and  sew  down  with  one  seam  on  edges.  Thongs 
to  be  sewed  down  through  center  9  inches  from  each  end  of  blind, 
thongs  to  be  lapped  and  riveted  at  end  of  sewing. 

For  thumb  piece  take  a  piece  of  leather  12  inches  long  and  3J  inches 
wide;  punch  and  slit  in  1  inch  from  edge  and  3  inches  from  ends  on 
each  side.  Lap  the  sides  inward,  so  as  to  catch  edges,  and  sew  down 
with  one  seam.  Draw  it  well  together  and  cut  ends,  so  as  to  shape  in 
between  straps;  place  in  center  of  crown  and  sew  down  with  one  seam 
on  edge,  and  rivet  on  each  side  of  crown. 

For  every  five  aparejos  one  packer's  blind  will  be  provided. 

For  each  organized  pack  train  of  50  pack  mules,  14  packer's  blinds 
will  be  provided. 

RIDING    SADDLES    (PACKERS'),    QUARTERMASTER'S    DEPARTMENT. 

Specifications  for  full-rigged  riding  saddle. 

(Figs.  Ill,  112,  113.) 

(9)  This  saddle  is  furnished  only  for  use  of  the  personnel  of  pack 
trains  and  pack  train  sections,  wagon  masters,  and  assistant  wagon 
masters.     (Design  modified  by  H.  W.  Daly.) 

1.  Tree.— To  be  No.  1013,  modified  "  Wild  West"  tree,  from  15  to 
16  inch  seat,  5-inch  fork,  2J-inch  oval  head,  steel  fork,  grooved  bars, 
beef-hide  cover. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION.  175 

2.  Rigging. — Saddle  to  be  full  rigged,  with  two  girths  (cotton  pre- 
ferred) of  18  strands  for  the  front  and  24  strands  for  the  rear  girth, 
and  to  be  of  two  bar  girths,  with  connecting  straps  and  buckle. 

3.  Stirrups. — Stirrup  to  be  2-inch  wooden  stirrup,  5-inch  tread, 
3-inch  neck,  1-bolt  stirrup,  reenforced  with  galvanized  iron  or  brass 
binding. 

4.  Leather. — To  be  hemlock  or  best  oak   tan  leather,  firm   and 
solid  in  texture,  and  capable  of  withstanding  a  strain  of  100  pounds 
when  a  section  6  inches  long  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch  wide  is  cut  into 
on  the  side,  and  not  tear  apart  under  strain  of  100  pounds  pressure. 

5.  Tan. — To  be  russet  or  fair  in  color  and  fast  in  grain. 

6.  Skirting. — To  be  full  size  and  sheepskin  wool  lined,  and  to  be 
not  less  than  30  inches  long,  15^  inches  wide  at  rear,  and  14  inches 
wide  at  front  end. 

7.  Quarter  straps. — To  extend  around  cantle  and  pommel,  3  inches 
wide  for  the  pommel  and  2  inches  wide  for  the  cantle,  with  connecting 
strap  1 J  inches  wide,  and  long  enough  so  that  when  doubled  the  dis- 
tance from  end  to  end  will  be  not  less  than  9  inches  long,  the  double 
of  strap  to  meet  at  center  of  its  length  and  to  be  secured  with  lacing, 
holes  of  suitable  size,  two  at  each  end  of  strap,  and  securely  tied. 

8.  Stirrup  leather. — To  be  of  good  solid  leather  3  inches  wide  and 
long  enough  to  permit  of  adjustment  for  34-inch  leg,  as  in  customary 
manner. 

9.  Stirrup  fender. — To  be  18 J  inches  long  and  10f  inches  wide. 
Fender  stays  19  inches  long  and  3  inches  wide. 

10.  Girth  straps. — To  be  19  inches  long  and  If  inches  wide. 

11.  Tie  straps. — To  be  5  feet  7  inches  long  and  If  inches  wide. 

12.  Seat. — The  reenforcings  in  forming  the  seat  of  the  saddle  when 
finished  to  be  well  rounded  and  bound  on  the  front  edge,  and  well 
glued  down  to  seat  with  best  "Days"  dry  paste;  the  seat  and  jockeys 
to  be  of  one  piece. 

13.  Cantle. — The  cantle  of  saddle  on  rounded  edge  to  be  bound  all 
around  with  similar  leather  in  a  neat  and  accurate  manner,  and  pro- 
vided with  small  leather  pocket  in  rear  of  cantle,  and  provided  with 
bellows  one  inch  wide;  the  upper  strings   over  cantle   must   pass 
through  the  center  of  quarter  strap ;  care  must  be  taken  in  passing 
string  through  sheepskin  wool  lining  that  the  string  is  properly  bedded 
in  the  wool,  the  space  between  holes  to  be  not  less  than  three-fourths 
of  an  inch. 

14.  Housings. — To  be  of  full  size  at  front  and  rear,  and  to  receive 
the  strings  of  saddle  as  in  customary  manner,  all  exposed  leather  to 
be  creased  with  two-bar  crease  on  edges,  and  light,  but  not  elaborate, 
stamping  on  exposed  leather  is  permitted. 

15.  Nails,  tacks,  and  rivets  are  not  permitted  in  rigging  the  saddle, 
except  in  the  " gullet"  where  small  round-head  brass  nails  may  be 
employed  in  the  customary  manner. 

16.  Saddle  tree. — To  be  as  modified,  on  the  under  surface  of  the 
bars,  as  shown  in  sample  saddle  now  at  the  general  depot  of  the  Quar- 
termaster's Department,  Jefferson ville,  Ind.,  made  January  23,  1909. 

17.  All  work  to  be  done  in  a  first-class  and  accurate  manner. 


176  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

Specifications  for  skeleton-rigged  riding  saddle. 

(Figs.  112,  113.) 

This  saddle  is  furnished  for  teamsters  and  mounted  messengers  and 
for  all  other  persons  in  the  military  service  requiring  riding  saddles 
which  under  the  existing  regulations  are  not  supplied  by  the  Ordnance 
Department,  nor  provided  with  the  full-rigged  riding  saddle. 

1.  Tree.— To  be  No.  1013,  modified  " Wild  West"  tree,  from  15  to 
16  inch  seat,  5-inch  fork,  2J-inch  oval  head,  steel  horn,  beef -hide 
cover.     Tree  to  be  covered  with  No.  1  "Fair"  collar  leather. 

2.  Rigging. — Saddle  to  be  " skeleton"  rigged  in  a  similar  manner  as 
provided  by  the  Ordnance  Department  in  rigging  the  cavalry  saddle, 
with  the  following  exceptions:  That  2  cinchas,  as  employed  in  the 
full-rigged  saddle,  will  be  supplied;  flat  staples  provided  with  holes 
on  each  end  to  receive  screws,  each  staple  to  be  provided  with  1-inch 
ring,  one  staple  to  be  provided  on  each  saddle  bar  in  rear  of  cantle, 
and  one  staple  on  each  saddle  bar  in  front  of  pommel,  and  to  be  placed 
over  center  of  quarter  straps  and  well  screwed  down  to  saddle  bars. 

3.  No  slots  on  pommel  and  cantle  will  be  provided,  as  in  the  cav- 
alry saddle. 

4.  In  sewing  the  cover  down  to  saddle  tree  sufficient  space  must 
be  omitted  at  top  and  bottom  of  grooves  that  receive  tne  stirrup 
leathers,  the  top  surface  of  saddle  bars  to  be  reenforced  on  each  side 
of  stirrup  leathers,  to  permit  of  rounding  up  the  seat;  at  beginning 
and  ending  of  all  stitching  three  full  back  stitches  to  be  made. 

5.  Stirrup  leathers. — To  be  provided  with  stirrup  fenders  as  in  full- 
rigged  saddle. 

6.  Stirrup. — To  be  of  similar  make  and  finish  as  provided  for  full- 
rigged  saddle. 

7.  Leather. — To  be  hemlock  or  oak,  tan  finish,  best  quality,  and 
subjected  to  similar  test  as  provided  for  in  the  full-rigged  saddle. 

8.  All  work  to  be  done  in  a  first-class  and  accurate  manner. 
(Approved  by  the  Quartermaster-General  of  the  Army,  November 

11,  1909.) 

BRIDLES. 

(10)  Bridles. — Regulation  size  and  make  and  provided  with  bits 
short  in  branch  and  of  strong  make. 


PACK    COVERS. 


(11)  Made  of  72-inch  No.  4  cotton  duck,  cut  6  feet  long;  allow  1 
inch  at  either  end  for  hemming,  to  be  sewed  down  with  No.  "0" 
canvas  twine,  four  stitches  to  the  inch. 


RIGGING   COVERS. 


(12)  Made  of  22-inch  No.  2  cotton  duck,  cut  two  lengths  24  feet 
long;  to  be  lapped  and  sewed  with  rolling  stitch,  with  No.  "0"  canvas 
twine,  four  stitches  to  the  inch. 

CARGO    COVERS. 

(13)  Made  of  28-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck,  cut  five  widths  12  feet 
long;  lapped  on  border  line  and  hemmed  at  ends;  to  be  sewed  down 
with  flat  seam,  with  No.  "0"  canvas  twine,  four  stitches  to  the  inch. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


177 


24758—10 12 


FIG.  ill. 


178 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION, 


FIG. 112. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


179 


FIG.  113. 


180  MANUAL  OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


FEED    COVERS. 


(14)  Made  of  44-inch  No.   10  cotton  duck;  to  be  24   feet  long, 
hemmed  at  ends,  to  be  sewed  down  with  No.  "0"  canvas  twine,  four 
stitches  to  the  inch. 

LASH   ROPE    WITH   CINCHA   AND   HOOK. 

(15)  Lash  rope,  standard  size  to  be  nine-sixteenths  or  one-half  inch 
best  hand-laid  manila,  50  feet  long,  provided  with  an  eye  at  one  end 
to  receive  lacing  of  cincha,  the  opposite  end  to  be  well  wrapped  or 
seized. 

For  cincha  provide  a  section  of  28-inch  No.  10  cotton  duck  18  inches 
wide ;  fold  so  as  to  have  a  width  of  6  inches  sewed  down  with  one  seam 
one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  each  edge. 

On  each  end  provide  a  semicircular  facing  of  leather,  the  same 
under  as  well  as  over,  length  of  facing  to  be  5  inches;  the  straight 
edge  of  facing  to  be  parallel  or  flush  with  end  of  cincha,  one  end  to 
be  provided  with  five  holes  three-eighths  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 
The  first  two  to  be  spaced  equally  distant  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from 
end  of  cincha  and  3^  inches  apart;  the  second  two  to  be  spaced  in 
similar  manner  2f  inches  from  end  of  cincha  and  4|  inches  apart; 
the  third  or  center  hole  to  be  placed  at  center  at  top  and  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  from  center  of  semicircle.  These  to  receive  lac- 
ings of  cincha;  facings  to  be  sewed  down  all  round  with  two  seams 
one-half  of  an  inch  apart  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  edge. 

Lacings  to  be  secured  to  eye  on  lash  rope  in  customary  manner. 

Facings  on  opposite  end  to  be  sewed  down  on  semicircle  with  two 
seams  one-half  or  an  inch  apart  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  edge ; 
on  open  end  provide  four  holes  to  correspond  with  holes  provided 
on  cincha  hook,  introduce  the  hook  between  the  folds  of  cincha,  place 
in  center,  and  rivet  down  with  No.  8  copper  rivets. 

Cincha  hook  to  be  as  per  sample  and  model  furnished  Quarter- 
master-General's Office,  and  to  be  16  parts  aluminum  and  1  part 
copper.  (Designed  by  H.  W.  Daly.  Adopted  December,  1909.) 


SLING    ROPES. 


(16)  To  be  made  of  f-inch  best  hand-laid  manila,  wrapped  or 
seized  at  each  end,  and  to  be  30  feet  long. 


LAIR    ROPES. 


(17)  To  be  made  of  f-inch  best  hand-laid  manila;  to  be  provided 
with  an  eye  at  one  end,  the  opposite  end  to  be  well  wrapped  or  seized, 
and  to  be  30  feet  long. 


STAMPING. 


(18)  The  body  of  the  aparejo  and  crupper  should  have  their  length 
and  maker's  name  stamped  on  them.  The  aparejo  cover,  cincha, 
and  corona  should  have  the  length  of  the  aparejo  stenciled  on  them, 
so  that  it  may  be  readily  known  what  parts  belong  together  without 
measuring.  Care  must  be  taken  to  stencil  corona  on  sweat  cloth. 


MANUAL   OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  181 


RIBBING   FOR   DALY   APAREJOS. 


(19)  SEC.  131.  The  ribbing  consists  of  the  following: 
Two  saddle  bars  (wood),  right  and  left. 

Two  boot  bars  (wood),  right  and  left. 

Eighteen  hickory  ribs,  consisting  of  two  half  sets  of  nine  each, 
equally  alike,  with  6  pounds  of  suitable  soft  hay  for  padding  or  filling 
for  each  aparejo. 

Two  locking  bars  for  saddle  bars  19f  inches  long,  If  inches  wide, 
gauge  16. 

Key  bars  for  locking  bars  to  be  23  inches  long,  five-eighths  of  an 
inch  wide,  and  three  thirty-seconds  of  an  inch  thick. 

Locking  bar  for  boot  bar  to  be  19|  inches  long  and  1  inch  wide, 
gauge  16. 

Sixty  flathead  brass  screws  three-fourths  of  an  inch,  No.  6. 

Saddle  bars. — Take  two  pieces  of  clear  basswood,  free  of  blemishes, 
21  inches  long,  7  inches  wide,  and  2  inches  thick. 

Saddle  bars,  right  and  left,  to  be  cut  in  at  one  end  with  two  offsets. 

First  offset  to  be  cut  at  right  angles,  3|  inches  at  one  end,  one  way, 
by  2f  inches  from  upper  edge. 

Second  offset  to  be  cut  at  right  angles  at  same  upper  and  front  end 
5|  inches,  one  way,  by  1  inch  from  upper  edge. , 

These  offsets  are  cut  and  shaped  to  fit  under  the  collar  of  the  apare- 
jos  and  are  considered  the  forward  or  front  end  of  saddle  bars. 

Now  space  off  " gains''  of  nine  equal  parts,  commencing  at  both 
ends  to  center  of  "gain,"  which  must  be  2fJ  inches;  width  of  gains 
to  be  1 J  inches;  length  of  gains,  3f  inches;  depth  of  gains  to  be  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch. 

Now  gain  for  brass  key  bar,  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide  and 
three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  deep.  Position  of  gain  for  key  bar  to  be 
3f  inches  from  upper  edge  to  center  of  gain,  extending  from  front  to 
rear. 

Next  gain  for  "locking  bar,"  If  inches  wide  and  one-sixteenth  of  an 
inch  deep,  19f  inches  long,  spaced  equally  distant  from  each  end,  cen- 
ter of  locking  bar  over  center  of  key  bar. 

Locking  bar  for  saddle  bar. — To  be  of  sheet  brass  19  inches  long, 
If  inches  wide,  and  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  thick  (gauge  16). 

Locking  bar  is  spaced  off  into  nine  equal  parts,  allowing  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  to  fit  into  gains.  This  portion  will  be  turned  at 
right  angles  so  as  to  fit  snugly  against  the  wall  of  gain,  and  provided 
with  twenty  holes  to  receive  flathead  brass  screws  three-fourths  of  an 
inch,  No.  6,  and  screwed  down  to  saddle  bar. 

Key  bar. — Key  bar  to  be  of  spring  brass  23  inches  long,  five-eighths 
of  an  inch  wide,  and  three  thirty-seconds  of  an  inch  thick,  rounded 
and  slightly  tapered  at  one  end;  the  reverse  or  opposite  end  to  be 
rounded  and  provided  with  a  hole  three-eighths  of  an  inch  from  end, 
this  to  receive  leather  thong ;  diameter  of  hole,  three-sixteenths  of  an 
inch. 

Saddle  bars,  right  and  left,  to  be  shaped  on  both  sides  as  per  sample 
furnished. 

(20)  Boot  bars. — Take  two  pieces  of  clear  basswood  free  of  blem- 
ishes 21  inches  long,  6  inches  wide,  and  3  inches  thick. 

Now  space  off  "gains"  of  nine  equal  parts  exactly  similar  to  those 
provided  in  saddle  bars.  Length  of  gains,  4f  inches. 


182  MANUAL  OF   PACK   TBANSPOKTATION. 

Now  gain  for  "locking"  bar,  1  inch  wide  and  one-sixteenth  of  an 
inch  deep,  19f  inches  long,  spaced  equally  distant  from  each  end, 
exactly  similar  as  that  provided  in  locking  bar  for  saddle  bar. 

Locking  bar  for  boot  bar. — To  be  of  sheet  brass  19  inches  long,  1J 
inches  wide,  and  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  thick  (gauge  16). 

Locking  bar  for  boot  is  spaced  off  in  similar  manner  as  that  pro- 
vided in  locking  bar  for  saddle  bar  and  turned  at  right  angles  so  as  to 
fit  snugly  against  the  wall  of  gain.  It  will  be  noted  that  while  the 
portion  fitting  into  gains  in  saddle  bar  faces  downward,  that  supplied 
in  boot  bar  faces  upward.  This  leaves  a  space  or  portion  of  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  extending  over  gains  the  length  of  locking  bar. 

Now  supply  one  hole  at  center  of  each  space  to  receive  flathead 
brass  screws  three-fourths  of  an  inch,  No.  6,  and  screw  down  to  boot 
bar. 

All  holes  on  brassing  must  be  countersunk  to  receive  screws. 

Boot  bars  to  be  shaped  on  both  sides,  right  and  left,  as  per  sample 
furnished.  Designed  by  H.  W.  Daly. 


HICKORY  RIBS. 


(21)  To  be  of  sound  second  growth  straight-grained  hickory,  free  of 
knots  or  other  blemishes;  23  inches  long,  1  inch  wide,  and  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  thick  for  60-inch  aparejos;  24  inches  long  for 
62-inch  aparejos,  and  22  inches  long  for  58-inch  aparejos. 

In  a  half  set  of  nine  ribs,  the  third  has  a  taper  of  8  inches  at  its 
upper  end,  thickness  at  end  to  be  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch;  for  the 
fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  seventh,  eighth,  and  ninth,  successively,  a  gain  of 
2  inches  in  the  taper  is  provided. 

On  one  side  at  bottom  and  2  inches  therefrom,  numerals  indicating 
the  size  of  the  aparejo,  with  number  of  rib,  will  be  stamped  thereon, 
a  hyphen  or  dash  to  be  used  in  separating  the  number  of  ribs  from  the 
number  of  aparejo. 

In  numbering  the  set  of  nine  ribs,  commence  with  the  two  that  are 
not  tapered;  these  to  be  numbered  1  and  2  each. 

Two  half  sets  of  nine  ribs  each  comprise  a  complete  set  for  one 
apareio. 

In  lots  of  50  sets,  25  to  be  23  inches  long;  13  to  be  24  inches  long, 
and  12  to  be  22  inches  long,  respectively. 

All  work  to  be  done  in  a  first-class  and  accurate  manner. 


HAY. 


(22)  Hay  to  be  free  of  joints,  or  what  is  known  as  "swamp"  hay; 
that  is,  fine,  soft,  elastic  hay,  and  for  each  aparejo  6  pounds  will  be 
considered  sufficient. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


183 


SEC.  132.— 


Table  showing  weights  of  pack  saddles  and  equipments. 

THE  .APAREJO  PROPER. 


Weight. 

Total. 

Old 
method. 

New 
method. 

Body  

Lbs.  oz. 
18    0 
7    0 
7    0 
5    0 
5    0 

Lbs.  oz. 
42    0 

29    8 
17    4 

Lbs.  oz. 
42    0 

29    8 
22    0 

Crupper 

Cover 

Cincha  

Corona  

Accessories: 
Lash  rope  with  cincha  and  hook  

6    0 
1    4 
2    4 
11    0 
5    0 
2    8 
1    8 

Sling  rope       .... 

Lair  ropes  (2) 

Pack  covers  (2)  

Pack  blanket  

Head  halter  .    . 

Blind 

Set-up: 
Boot  sticks  (2). 

2    0 
7    0 
8    4 

Sticks,  willow  (56) 

Hay  

Total,  old  method  

88  12 

Daly  aparejo  set-up: 
Saddle  bars  (2) 

6    0 
6    0 
4    0 
6    0 

Boot  bars  (2)  

Ribs,  hickory  (18)  

Hay                                                   .  . 

Total,  new  method     

93    8 

THE  CROSSTREE  OR  SAWBUCK. 


Saddle                             

Breeching 

9    0 

Breast  strap 

Corona  

5    0 

14    0 

Accessories,  same  as  aparejo 

29    8 

Total. 

43    8 

THE  MOORE  PACK  SADDLE. 


Saddle 

32    8 

Crupper                    

5    0 

Cincha 

5    8 

Corona 

5    0 

48    0 

Accessories,  same  as  aparejo  

29    8 

Total 

77    8 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

SPECIAL  DEVICES. 

PACKING    DEVICE     (QUARTERMASTER'S    DEPARTMENT). 

(Figs.  114,  115,  116,  117.) 

SEC.  133.  This  device  consists  of  three  parts — the  frame,  the  plat- 
forms (2),  the  lashing.  .(Figs.  114,  115,  116,  117). 

The  packing  device  was  designed  to  meet  the  requirements  of  men 
not  skilled  in  the  use  of  the  diamond  and  other  hitches  to  secure  a  load 
on  the  pack  mule. 

To  assemble  the  pack  device. — Place  the  frame  on  the  aparejo  so  that 
its  staple  holes  fit  over  the  staples  on  the  latter;  and  pass  the  straps  on 
the  sob re-j alma  through  the  staples;  pass  the  cincha  over  the  side 
bars,  finger  loop  up,  and  cincha  strap  to  the  left;  double  the  cincha 
over  the  frame,  strap  inside;  double  or  turn  the  crupper  forward  so 
that  the  dock  piece  rests  on  the  cincha. 

To  place  the  aparejo  on  the  mule,  see  Chapter  III,  sections  18  to  23, 
inclusive.  The  " frame"  of  the  packing  device  being  attached  to  the 
aparejo,  two  packers  should  assist  in  placing  the  aparejo  on  the  mule, 
from  rear  to  front,  in  proper  position,  and  cinching  in  customary  man- 
ner. The  platforms  are  now  placed  in  position,  one  on  each  side  of 
the  frame,  the  top  and  bottom  rods  resting  on  the  hook  plates  or  rests, 
spaced  apart  as  may  be  required  by  the  conditions  of  loading,  as  each 
platform  is  independent  or  the  other,  the  "near"  side  platform  may 
be  carried  higher  on  the  hook  plates,  as  the  greater  weight  of  the  near 
side  pack  may  require,  so  as  to  balance  the  load  evenly  on  the  pack 
mule;  the  locks  or  holdfasts  are  then  adjusted,  the  hooks  of  the  locks 
being  pressed  into  the  under  openings  or  the  hook  plates  or  rests,  thus 
holding  the  platforms  rigidly  in  position;  the  side  packs  or  top  load, 
as  conditions  may  be,  are  placed  on  the  platforms  and  the  load  se- 
cured by  its  lashing.  To  place  the  " lashing"  on  the  load,  each  packer 
will  hold  one-half  of  lashing,  embracing  three  latigos,  so  as  to  keep  the 
lash  rods  toward  the  body,  then  from  rear  to  front  elevate  or  swing  the 
lashing  so  as  to  rest  on  top  and  center  of  load;  the  center  latigo  on 
each  side  is  then  made  fast  to  the  drop  link  at  center  of  distance  rod, 
observing  the  square  of  lashing  is  kept  on  center  and  top  of  load ;  this 
leaves  a  latigo  fore  and  aft  on  each  side  of  the  load;  now  attach  the 
ropes  for  lashing,  one  on  each  side,  to  the  forward  latigo,  then  bring 
the  rope  section  under  the  boot  of  the  aparejo,  and  attach  the  latigo 
at  rear  to  the  ring  on  end  of  section  of  rope,  taking  slack  on  latigos 
fore  and  aft,  to  securely  tighten  the  load,  always  observing  the  section 
of  rope  is  kept  evenly  divided  fore  and  aft.  It  will  be  noticed  that  drop 
links  are  provided  on  the  platforms  fore  and  aft.  The  latigos  may 
pass  through  these  drop  links  before  attaching  to  the  rings  on  each  end 

1QA 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION, 


185 


186 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


c 
m 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


187 


188 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL    OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


189 


of  sections  of  rope,  as  may  be  required  by  the  size  of  loading,  usually 
to  packages  of  small  dimensions. 

It  is  also  important  that  the  latigos  engage  over  the  upper  corners 
of  each  side  pack  fore  and  aft,  as  is  customary  when  securing  the  load 
with  the  diamond  hitch  method. 

The  platforms  take  the  place  of  the  " sling  rope,"  the  lashing  takes 
the  place  of  the  diamond  hitch.  The  hook  plates  of  the  frame  are 
arranged  so  that  the  load  may  be  balanced  by  raising  or  lowering  the 
platforms  as  may  be  determined — as  near  an  application  of  the  dia- 
mond hitch  method,  the  oldest  and  best,  as  may  be  provided. 

THE    DALY    PACKING    DEVICE. 


SPECIFICATIONS. 


Standard  size  to  be  54f  inches  from  end  to  end  and  19  inches  wide 
throughout  its  entire  length. 


CONSTRUCTION. 


.     The  device  consists  of  three  parts — (1) 
forms,   (3)   the  lashing. 


the  frame,   (2)   the  plat- 


(1)   The  frame. 

Hinges 

Side  plates 

Hook  plates 

Distance  plates 

Distance  shoes  (wooden) 

Reenforcing  plates  for  shoes 

Bolts  for  hinges 4 

Rivets,  iron 16 

Rivets,  copper 6 

(2)   The  platforms. 

Distance  rods , 

Center  plates  for  distance  rods 

Supports 


Locks  or  holdfasts. 
Drop  links 


(2)   The  platforms — Continued. 

Staples  for  links 8 

Distance  boards  for  platforms 6 

Reenforcing  plates  for  boards 6 

Rivets,  iron 24 

Rivets,  copper 18 

(3)   The  lashing. 

Lash  rods 2 

D  rings 10 

Squares 2 

Rings 4 

Canvas 10  by  14 

Facings  for  lashing  (leather) 

Straps  for  lashing  (leather) 7 

Latigos  for  lashing  (leather) 6 

Ropes  for  lashing 2 


DETAILED    SPECIFICATIONS. 

(1)    The  frame. 

To  be  made  of  best  spring  steel  1  ^  inches  wide  and  one-eighth  of  an 
inch  thick. 

For  hinges  (2),  cut  a  section  13  inches  long  2\  inches  from  each  end, 
cut  out  a  slot  If  inches  long  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide;  this 
to  form  eye  for  bolts.  Circle  section  and  weld  both  ends;  then  com- 
press circle  to  a  radius  of  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  diameter,  leaving  a 
space  between  the  folds  of  hinge  one-fourth  of  an  inch  diameter.  A 
templet  is  good  for  the  purpose;  in  shaping  templet  round  each  end 
and  introduce  between  the  folds  of  hinge  when  cold. 

In  introducing  templets  care  must  be  taken  that  the  ends  of  tem- 
plet meet  the  center  of  slots,  forming  eye  to  receive  side  plates  for 
hinge. 

Side  plates  (4)- — For  side  plates  cut  a  section  32 1  inches  long. 
At  one  end  an  opening  is  formed  to  carry  the  distance  board  of  frame, 


190  MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 

opening  for  distance  board  to  be  2 J  inches  long  by  three-fourths  of  an 
inch  wide.  In  forming  opening  an  extension  is  allowed  on  this  end  to 
form  a  hook  on  the  outward  face  of  opening,  and  is  arranged  in  this 
manner: 

Commence  at  end  selected  and  measure  off  three-fourths  of  an  inch 
and  mark  with  punch  on  each  edge;  in  similar  manner  mark  off  one- 
half  of  an  inch,  then  2^  inches,  3^  inches,  and  three-fourths  of  an 
inch.  This  gives  8  inches  marked  off  on  end,  to  form  opening  and 
hook  on  end  of  side  plate,  and  will  be  considered  the  lower  end  of  side 
plate. 

In  forming  hook,  it  is  well  to  commence  at  end.  To  do  so,  com- 
mence at  the  second  line  of  markings  1J  inches  from  end;  turn  this 
portion  at  right  angles,  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  end  turn 
again  at  right  angles. 

Now,  on  the  space  marked  2J  inches  form  a  hook,  depth  of  hook  to 
be  1  inch;  mouth  of  hook  to  be  five-eighths  of  an  inch  wide.  Now 
bend  or  compress  sufficient  of  the  space  marked  3^  inches,  so  as  to  be 
flush  with  under  and  forward  surface  of  hook;  and  at  markings  turn 
at  right  angles,  and  at  last  markings  turn  again  at  right  angles.  This 
forms  the  opening  for  the  distance  board,  whose  inside  dimensions  will 
be  2 1  by  three-fourths  inches.  This  should  leave  the  extension  of 
side  plate  24  J  inches  long. 

It  will  be  noted,  in  the  formation  of  opening  for  distance  board, 
there  is  an  angular  opening  on  the  under  surface  in  the  formation  of 
the  hook;  the  base  of  this  opening  should  be  not  less  than  three-fourths 
of  an  inch. 

In  the  formation  of  hooks  on  the  hook  plates,  these  openings  are 
utilized  by  the  locks  or  holdfasts  provided  on  legs  of  platforms,  to 
hold  platforms  securely. 

Hook  plates  for  side  plates  (4) . — Hook  plates  to  be  44  inches  long  and 
in  their  formation  7  hooks  will  be  provided,  arranged  in  the  following 
manner : 

Commencing  at  one  end,  space  and  mark  off  with  punch  on  each 
edge,  the  following  distances: 

Three  inches  from  end  selected  mark  and  punch;  then  If  inches 
further  in  similar  manner;  then  1J  inches;  and  then  6  spaces  of  5| 
inches  each;  this  leaves  3|  inches  at  opposite  end  for  the  outward  por- 
tion of  last  hook  on  hook  plate. 

Now  commence  at  first,  or  top  end  of  hook  plate,  and  at  space 
whose  distance  is  If  inches,  cut  out  a  section  on  each  side  of  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  wide ;  this  leaves  three-fourths  of  an  inch  at  center. 
Now  lap  the  end  over  at  center  of  this  space  to  form  eye  for  bolt  of 
hinge,  diameter  of  eye  to  be  one-fourth  of  an  inch. 

The  3-inch  laps  will  be  considered  the  under  side  of  hook  plate,  and 
are  to  receive  the  distance  plates  of  frame. 

Now  on  the  space  of  1J  inches,  form  a  hook  whose  depth  will  be 
three-fourths  of  an  inch,  mouth  of  hook  to  be  five-eighths  of  an  inch 
wide. 

On  the  remaining  six  sections  marked  off,  form  hooks,  whose  depth 
will  be  1  inch;  mouth  of  hooks  to  be  five-eighths  of  an  inch  wide.  In 
the  accurate  formation  of  the  hooks  a  templet  is  good  for  the  purpose; 
hook  plates  to  be  as  per  sample  furnished. 

In  assembling  hook  plates  to  side  plates,  the  free  end  of  side  plates 
engages  into  the  fold  of  hook  plates,  and  to  meet  the  shoulders  of 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  191 

hinge;  the  opposite  encl  of  side  plates  engages  into  the  free  end  of 
hook  plates,  this  operation  gives  8  hooks  on  the  upper  or  face  side  of 
side  plates;  at  the  lower  end  of  engagement  one  hole  will  be  provided 
at  center  through  hook  plate  and  side  plate,  diameter  of  hole  three- 
sixteenths  of  an  inch,  and  riveted  down.  At  the  upper  end  between 
first  and  second  hooks,  two  holes  will  be  provided,  in  a  diagonal  line 
in  similar  manner;  these  holes  to  receive  side  plates  of  frame. 

Both  side  plates  and  hook  plates  assembled  must  positively  be  in 
straight  alignment,  one  with  the  other. 

Distance  plates. — To  be  23  inches  long,  3  inches  wide,  and  one-eighth 
of  an  inch  thick;  at  each  end  of  distance  plate  provide  a  slot  1|  inches 
long  and  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  wide.  Slot  to  be  in  center  of  dis- 
tance plate  and  one-half  of  an  inch  from  each  end  and  to  be  parallel 
with  length  of  distance  plate.  These  slots  or  openings  are  to  receive 
staples  of  chock  plates  that  hold  frame  to  aparejo. 

In  adjusting  distance  plates  to  side  plates,  measure  9J  inches  each 
way  from  center  of  distance  plate  for  side  plates,  from  out  to  out. 
This  leaves  2  inches  at  each  end  of  distance  plate,  extending  from  side 
plate.  The  lower  edge  of  distance  plates  to  be  flush  with  the  lower 
edge  of  the  3-inch  lap  as  provided  on  hook  plates.  Two  holes  will 
be  provided  at  front  and  rear  to  correspond  with  those  provided  on 
hook  and  side  plates,  distance  plates  to  be  placed  on  the  under  side  of 
3-inch  lap  and  riveted  down. 

Distance  boards  or  shoes,  wooden  (2} . — To  be  of  good,  sound  hickory, 
free  of  knots  and  blemishes,  and  to  be  19  inches  long,  2£  inches  wide, 
and  eleven-sixteenths  of  an  inch  thick. 

One  and  one-half  inches  from  each  end  saw  down  to  a  depth  of  five- 
sixteenths  of  an  inch  on  one  side,  portion  between  cuts  to  be  " gained" 
out  in  a  smooth  and  accurate  manner,  the  upper  and  lower  edges  of 
" gained"  surface  to  be  rounded  off. 

Reenforced  plates  for  shoes  (2}. — To  be  of  band  steel,  gauge  14,  and 
of  dimensions  similar  to  distance  shoes.  These  to  be  placed  on  the 
under  side  of  distance  shoes.  The  flat  surface  of  shoes  will  be  con- 
sidered the  under  side. 

Reenforce  plates  to  be  secured  to  distance  shoes  by  copper  rivets, 
holes  being  provided  on  gained  surface  of  distance  shoes  spaced 
equally  distant,  one  at  center  and  one  at  each  end  and  2  inches  there- 
from, holes  will  be  provided  on  reenforce  plates  to  correspond  with 
distance  shoe,  diameter  of  holes  to  be  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch. 

In  assembling  side  plates  and  distance  shoes  it  is  well  to  introduce 
distance  shoes  first,  care  being  taken  to  square  the  side  plates  when 
applying  distance  plates. 

Now  connect  side  plates  with  hinges,  using  1  J-inch  bolts,  oval  head, 
and  rivet  down  over  nut. 

At  ends  of  side  plates  provide  one  hole  at  center  three-fourths  of 
an  inch  from  end,  hole  to  pass  through  metal  and  wood,  secure  rivets 
and  rivet  down  on  the  under  side. 

(2)   The  platforms. 

Platforms  (2} . — To  be  made  of  best  Norway  iron. 
For  distance  rods  cut  three  sections  of  £-inch  round  iron. 
The  first  section  to  be  22 £  inches  long;  the  second  or  outward  section 
to  be  21^  inches  long;  the  third  section  to  be  20f  inches  long. 


192  MANUAL  OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

On  the  first  and  third  distance  rods  provide  an  offset  of  three-fourths 
of  an  inch  deep,  length  of  offset  to  be  10  inches. 

The  second  distance  rod  to  be  straight  along  its  length. 

Supports  (4). — Cut  a  section  of  Norway  flat  iron  13  f  inches  long, 
three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch  thick. 
Provide  an  eye  on  each  end  of  supports  large  enough  to  take  one-half 
inch  iron  rod. 

Legs  (4). — To  be  of  similar  material,  15J  inches  long,  provided  with 
eye  on  each  end  in  similar  manner. 

In  assembling  legs  to  second  distance  rod  leave  a  space  of  15f 
niches  from  outside  to  outside,  measuring  distance  from  center  of  rod 
each  way ;  now  provide  a  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  hole  through  legs 
and  rod,  and  rivet  down. 

In  assembling  supports  to  second  distance  rod,  engage  the  eyes  of 
supports  over  each  end  of  rod  and  leave  a  distance  of  19|  inches  from 
inside  to  inside  between  supports,  counting  from  center  of  rod  each 
way.  Now  form  a  head  on  each  end  of  rod  one-fourth  of  an  inch 
wide  outside  of  head  to  be  flush  with  eye  of  support. 

In  assembling  the  first  distance  rod  to  opposite  end  of  supports 
introduce  through  eyes  of  supports,  leaving  a  distance  of  19i  inches 
from  inside  to  inside  between  supports,  counting  from  center  of  rod 
both  ways,  and  weld  the  eye  of  supports  to  distance  rods.  Now  cut 
off  whatever  portion  may  remain  on  the  outside  and  smooth  down. 

In  assembling  the  third  distance  rod  to  the  eye  on  opposite  end  of 
legs  introduce  rod  through  eye  on  legs  and  leave  a  distance  of  19i  inches 
from  inside  to  inside  between  legs,  counting  from  center  of  rod  both 
ways>  and  rivet  down  in  similar  manner  as  at  opposite  end  of  legs. 
Now  form  a  head  on  each  end  of  rod  one-fourth  or  an  inch  wido,  out- 
side of  head  to  be  flush  with  eye  of  support. 

Center  plates  for  distance  rods  (2). — To  be  of  similar  material  as 
provided  for  side  plates  and  to  be  11  inches  long.  Form  an  eye  on 
each  end  of  plate,  diameter  of  eye  to  be  one-half  of  an  inch;  center 
plate  to  be  engaged  on  first  and  second  distance  rods  and  center 
thereof. 

Locks  or  holdfasts  (4). — To  be  made  of  similar  material  as  that 
provided  for  supports  and  legs,  to  be  cut  1 1  inches  long. 

At  one  end  and  one-half  of  an  inch  therefrom  provide  a  slot  or 
opening  whose  length  will  be  1 J  inches  long  and  five-sixteenths  of  an 
inch  wide;  this  to  receive  bolt  for  securing  lock  to  legs  of  platform. 

Now  measure  6  inches  from  this  end,  turning  section  to  an  angle  of 
45°.  Three  inches  from  base  of  angle  turn  the  remaining  portion 
at  right  angles ;  diameter  or  distance  from  the  under  side  of  the  right 
angled  portion  to  base  line  of  lock  held  horizontally  to  be  2  J-  inches. 
The  portion  turned  at  right  angles  or  end  of  lock  to  be  rounded ; 
length  to  be  not  more  than  !£  inches. 

For  each  lock  a  1-inch  bolt,  holding  a  wing  nut,  will  be  provided. 

On  each  leg,  counting  2^  inches  from  eye  of  leg  on  second  distance 
rod  a  J-inch  hole  will  be  provided  at  center  of  leg ;  punch  this  hole 
square  by  metal  punch. 

Introduce  a  1-inch  bolt  from  outside  of  leg,  and  lay  on  to  bolt  the 
lock  or  holdfast  as  provided  by  slot  or  opening,  and  screw  down  with 
wing  nut. 

Locks  to  be  right  and  left. 

These  locks  or  holdfasts  engage  into  opening  as  provided  on  hook 
plates,  as  formed  by  the  lapping  of  hook  plates  on  side  plates. 


MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION.  193 

Drop  links  (6). — To  be  of  J-inch  round  iron,  cut  10  inches  long;  on 
each  end  of  one  section  form  an  eye  who§e  diameter  will  be  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch.  Now,  1  inch  from  center  of  section  both  ways 
turn  at  right  angles  to  form  drop  links. 

Staples  for  links  (8)  .—Cut  a  section  of  similar  material  3  inches 
long;  at  center  of  section  form  semicircle  over  templet,  templet  to  be 
of  ^-inch  round  iron;  diameter  at  base  of  semicircle  to  be  1  inch.  One- 
half  of  an  inch  of  each  end  to  be  flattened  to  a  thickness  of  one-eighth 
of  an  inch ;  length  of  flattened  surface  to  be  not  more  than  five-eighths 
of  an  inch  and  punch  one  hole  at  center  of  each  end;  diameter  of  hole 
to  be  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch. 

Now  introduce  a  staple  into  each  eye  of  drop  link  and  place  on  the 
under  surface  of  supports  in  such  manner  so  that  one  rivet  will  engage 
the  second  and  third  distance  boards  and  supports;  the  opposite  end 
of  staple  will  be  riveted  down  to  supports. 

Distance  boards  for  platforms  (6). — To  be  of  good,  sound  hickory, 
free  of  knots  and  blemishes.  To  be  20|  inches  long,  1  £  inches  wide, 
and  one-half  of  an  inch  thick. 

Reenforcing  plates  for  distance  boards  (6). — To  be  of  band  steel,  1£ 
inches  wide,  gauge  18,  length  corresponding  with  length  of  distance 
boards. 

In  applying  distance  boards  to  supports  space  equally  distant  in 
such  manner  as  to  carry  one  rivet  on  the  second  and  third  distance 
boards  at  each  end  and  center,  this  for  the  purpose  of  receiving  one 
eye  of  staple  holding  drop  link,  the  eye  at  opposite  end  of  staple  will 
be  riveted  down  to  support;  at  center  of  distance  boards  rivet  down 
to  center  plates;  in  similar  manner  in  center  of  space  between  ends 
and  center  plates,  rivet  reenforcing  plates  to  distance  boards. 

The  reenforcing  plates  will  be  considered  the  under  side  when  apply- 
ing distance  boards  to  supports.  All  rivets  between  supports  to  be 
copper  rivets;  all  rivets  on  supports  to  be  iron  rivets. 

The  remaining  two  drop  links  to  be  applied  at  center  of  second  dis- 
tance rod,  engaging  center  plates  between  the  eyes  of  drop  links.  All 
work  to  be  done  in  a  first-class  and  accurate  manner. 

(3)    The  lashing. 

Rods  for  lashing  (2). — To  be  of  round  iron  -f$  of  an  inch  diameter, 
to  be  cut  18  inches  long;  form  eye  on  each  end  of  rod,  diameter  of  eye 
to  be  one-half  of  an  inch. 

Each  eye  of  lash  rods  to  carry  a  "D"  ring.  "D"  rings  to  be  of  No. 
326  X.  C.  D's. 

For  each  lash  rod  a  metal  square  will  be  provided,  No.  1 155  japanned 
square.  These  to  be  carried  on  fold  of  center  strap  of  lashing. 

Canvas  for  lashing. — To  be  of  brown  or  khaki  color,  No.  4  cotton 
duck;  to  be  cut  14  inches  long  and  10  inches  wide. 

On  each  end  of  canvas,  the  short  way,  lay  a  lash  rod  and  fold  over 
so  as  to  leave  a  distance  of  10  inches,  and  sew  down  with  basting 
stitch. 

Facings  for  lashing  (2). — To  be  of  good,  solid,  fair  leather.  Cut  two 
sections  1 0  inches  long  and  7  inches  wide ;  semicircle  each  section  the 
long  way,  lay  each  section  over  distance  rods  in  similar  manner  as 

24758—10 13 


194 


MANUAL  OF  PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


described  for  canvas  section,  facings  to  meet  in  center  of  canvas ;  the 
semicircular  portion  to  be  considered  the  upper  or  outer  side  of  lash- 
ing. Sew  down  semicircles  with  one  seam  one-fourth  of  an  inch 
from  edge. 

Straps  for  lashing  (7). — Cut  one  section  15  inches  long  and  2  inches 
wide;  this  strap  to  be  applied  over  semicircular  facings  at  center, 
carrying  at  each  end  a  metal  square  as  provided;  the  fold  of  leather 
holding  metal  square  to  be  lapped  under  and  the  whole  sewed  down 
with  one  seam  one-fourth  of  an  inch  from  each  edge. 

Now  cut  six  straps  22  inches  long  and  2  inches  wide,  double  so  as 
to  have  a  length  of  10  inches;  on  one  end  of  each  strap  drop  a  2-inch 
"D"  ring;  on  opposite  end  lap  strap  over  "D"  portion  of  ring  as  pro- 
vided on  lash  rods  and  sew  down  with  one  seam  on  each  edge  and 
one-fourth  of  an  inch  therefrom. 

The  remaining  two  straps  will  be  lapped  over  square,  held  by  cen- 
ter strap  of  lashing,  the  opposite  end  of  strap  holding  "D"  ring  in 
similar  manner,  and  sew  down  as  before. 

Latigos  for  lashing  (6). — For  each  "D"  ring  on  end  of  straps  cut  a 
strap  of  latigo  leather  6  feet  long  and  1 J  inches  wide ;  taper  the  lightest 
end  of  latigos. 

Lap  the  heaviest  end  of  latigos  over  "D"  rings  3  inches  and  pro- 
vide 3  holes  for  lacing,  No.  8  punch.  Two  holes  to  be  spaced  equally 
distant  apart  in  a  horizontal  line,  the  third  to  be  at  center  of  latigo 
and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  therefrom. 

Provide  a  lace  string  for  each  latigo  wide  enough  to  pass  through 
holes  provided  thereon ;  finish  lacing  on  hole  at  center. 

Ropes  for  lashing  (2}. — Cut  two  sections  of  rope,  best  hand-laid 
manila,  one-half  inch  diameter  and  4  feet  long;  form  an  eye  on  each 
end  of  rope,  each  eye  of  rope  to  carry  a  2-inch  ring. 

In  assembling  ring  on  each  end  of  ropes  connect  the  front  and  rear 
of  first  and  third  latigos  with  rings  on  ropes  in  such  manner  as  in  cinch- 
ing a  saddle. 

In  the  application  of  the  lashing,  the  lash  rods  or  "form"  of  lashing 
rest  on  top  and  center  of  load,  the  latigos  running  downward  over  cor- 
ners of  side  packs,  and  the  rope  sections  under  the  boots  of  the  aparejo 
at  front  and  rear;  the  center  latigo  is  secured  to  metal  square  at  cen- 
ter of  platforms,  and  the  whole  tied  down  as  in  cinching  a  saddle  in 
customary  manner.  (Designed  by  H.  W.  Daly.) 

Table  showing  weights  of  packing  device. 


Total. 

Pounds. 

Ounces. 

Pounds. 

Ounces. 

Pounds. 

Ounces. 

Packing  device  for  aparejo: 
"Framp 

24 
22 
9 

Platforms 

Lashing 

Total  

55 

MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION.  195 

TOOL   POUCHES    (ENGINEER   CORPS). 

(Figs.  118,  119.) 

SEC.  134.  The  necessity  for  tool' pouches  has  been  the  cause  of  the 
various  troubles  which  the  packer  has  had,  from  time  to  time,  to  pro- 
vide suitable  means  to  transport  with  safety  the  different  tools  em- 
aed  by  the  Engineer  Corps  and  afford  proper  protection  for  the 
y  of  the  animal. 

The  assembly  of  the  various  tools,  etc.,  so  as  to  give  ready  access 
when  needed,  without  the  necessity  of  taking  off  the  load,  has  been 
considered  of  vital  importance  to  the  rapid  movements  of  detach- 
ments of  the  Engineer  Corps  under  certain  conditions. 

To  meet  this  contingency  the  tool  pouches  were  designed. 

The  pouches  are  made  of  good,  solid  leather,  about  60  inches  long, 
55  inches  wide  at  ends,  and  24  inches  wide  at  center  or  middle,  and 
carry  two  pockets  on  either  side ;  the  larger,  at  bottom,  for  such  tools 
as  short-handled  shovels,  axes,  etc.;  the  smaller,  at  top  or  middle,  for 
picks,  augers,  nails,  sledge  hammers,  etc. 

These  pouches  are  secured  to  the  aparejo  by  straps  at  front  and 
rear,  at  the  top,  or  middle,  buckles  being  provided  on  the  aparejo 
for  this  purpose,  and  at  bottom  of  pouches  by  straps  passing  under 
the  boots  or  the  aparejo. 

The  pouches  are  further  provided  with  a  metallic  device  for  carry- 
ing such  tools  as  crowbars  or  implements  of  greater  length  than  the 
lower  pockets. 

The  device  is  attached  to  the  pouches  at  top  or  middle  by  means 
of  hinges  with  suitable  provisions  to  retain  crowbars  in  position. 

PACK    CHESTS    (ENGINEER    CORPS). 

(Fig.  120.) 

SEC.  135.  These  chests  or  boxes,  like  the  tool  pouches,  were  designed 
to  be  carried  on  the  aparejo  and  may  be  used  for  carrying  a  small 
supply  of  prepared  rations,  or  the  interior  of  chests  may  be  arranged 
for  safely  carrying  explosive  material  or  other  supplies. 

They  are  supplied  on  their  exterior  with  metallic  fasteners  for  se- 
curing chests  on  the  aparejo  so  that  the  contents  may  be  extracted 
without  taking  the  boxes  off  the  pack  mule. 

The  following  list  of  articles  of  engineer  equipment  and  methods 
of  packing  them  for  the  allowance  of  such  equipments  assigned  to 
each  squadron  of  cavalry  and  each  troop  of  cavalry  in  the  field  has 
been  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  War: 

Box  No.  1.  Outside  dimensions  2  feet  8  inches  by  12  by  12  inches, 
containing  1  box,  match;  100  caps,  detonating;  200  feet  Bickford 
fuse;  200  feet  instantaneous  fuse;  50  pounds  explosive.  Weight,  when 
packed,  85  pounds. 

Box  No.  2.  Outside  dimensions  4  feet  6  inches  by  8  by  6|  inches, 
containing  2  crowbars,  2  drills,  double  bitted;  2  hammers,  drilling;  1 
hammer,  engineer;  1  pliers,  1  chisel,  cold;  1  wrench,  monkey;  1  spoon, 
drilling;  1  shoe,  mule,  set.  Weight,  when  packed,  103  pounds. 

For  each  troop  outfit,  2  bundles,  5  shovels  each,  60  pounds ;  1  bun- 
dle, 5  shovels  and  1  crowbar,  42  pounds. 

Box  No.  1.  Outside  dimensions  3  feet  7  inches  by  11  by  8J  inches, 
containing  6  pliers,  wire  cutting;  5  pick  mattocks,  1  auger,  2  rules. 
Weight,  when  packed,  80  pounds. 


196 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


197 


198 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


Box  No.  2.  Outside  dimensions  3  feet  8  inches  by  11  by  7  inches, 
containing  4  hatchets,  4  axes,  1  saw,  5  pounds  nails.  Weight,  when 
packed,  78  pounds. 

Boxes  to  be  made  of  f-inch  dressed  pine  lumber,  with  lids  screwed 
down  when  shipped,  and  to  be  hinged  and  provided  with  hasps  and 
flat  padlocks;  cleats  and  partitions  to  be  so  placed  in  the  boxes  as  to 


FIG. 120. 


revent   contents   from   being   disarranged    and   injured   by   rough 


A  list  of  the  articles  packed  in  each  box  should  be  fastened  on  the 
inside  of  the  lid,  and  each  box  should  be  numbered  and  marked  to 
show  it  contains  engineer  equipment  for  a  troop  or  for  a  squadron. 
The  word  " explosive"  should  be  plainly  printed  on  all  faces  of 
Squadron  Box  No.  1. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

PACK  REEL  (SIGNAL  CORPS). 

(Figs.  121,  122.) 


199 


SEC.  136.  The  reel  consists  of  the  following:  The  platform,  the 
turntable,  the  caging,  and  the  saddle. 

The  platform  consists  of  two  side  rails,  two  end  rails  for  center 
boards  for  holding  the  gearing,  and  two  brace  rails  connecting  center 
boards  and  end  rails.  The  platform  rests  on  four  strap-iron  legs, 
braced  at  each  end. 

To  the  bottom  of  center  boards  is  attached  a  metal  plate,  holding  a 
vertical  shaft  and  a  provision  for  ball  bearings ;  a  horizontal  shaft  is 
supplied  at  the  center  of  one  side  rail,  holding  a  miter  wheel  at  inner 
end. 


FIG.  121. 


At  the  outer  end  of  shaft  a  crank  is  supplied,  by  means  of  which 
the  miter  wheel  may  be  turned. 

On  each  side  rail  at  ends  a  handle  is  supplied  for  lifting  the  pack 
reel  to  position  on  the  saddle,  as  provided  on  the  aparejo. 

The  turntable  is  composed  of  wooden  crosspieces,  holding  at  center 
and  on  under  side  a  horizontal  miter  wheel.  On  its  upper  side  a 
metallic  cap  is  supplied  with  a  hole  through  center  of  cap  and  cross- 
pieces  for  the  purpose  of  being  engaged  over  the  vertical  shaft,  as 
provided  on  platform.  By  this  arrangement  the  miter  wheel  on 
turntable  engages  over  its  mate  on  platform  and  is  rotated  by  means 
of  the  horizontal  shaft,  supplied  with  a  crank  or  by  engagement  of 
the  " pay-out"  end  of  the  coil  of  wire  around  a  holdfast,  the  travel 


200 


MANUAL   OF    PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


of  the  animal  causing  the  turntable  to  rotate.  On  outer  ends  of 
crosspieces  a  circular  metal  band  is  supplied  to  hold  the  crosspieces 
rigid.  On  these  crosspieces  holes  are  provided  to  receive  metal 
standards,  around  which  is  engaged  the  coil  of  wire. 

At  one  end  of  platform  a  brake  is  supplied,  carrying  a  section  of 
light  rope,  by  means  of  which  the  "unit"  may  apply  the  brake  on  the 
circular  band,  thus  regulating  the  "pay  out"  of  wire  as  may  be 
determined.  The  brake  as  supplied  on  end  rail  is  considered  the  front 
or  forward  end  of  pack  reel. 

For  the  purpose  of  holding  the  coil  of  wire  within  bounds  when 
engaged  around  the  standards  a  "caging"  is  supplied,  composed  of 
metallic  cross  arms  that  engage  into  slots  near  each  end  of  side  rails 


FIG.  122. 

of  platform.  At  the  center  of  the  cross  arms  a  metallic  cap  is  pro- 
vided at  intersection  of  cross  arms,  a  hole  being  provided  at  center  of 
cap,  which  engages  over  the  vertical  shaft,  holding  the  cross  arms 
to  place. 

Two  circular  bands  are  provided,  spaced  about  12  inches  apart 
by  means  of  distance  rods,  the  upper  band  being  riveted  to  the  hori- 
zontal portion  of  cross  arms ;  the  lower  band  is  connected  to  the  ver- 
tical portions  of  cross  arms  by  means  of  short-distance  plates.  These 
horizontal  distance  plates  connect  with  the  vertical  rods  near  point  of 
engagement  of  the  extremities  of  cross  arms  that  engage  on  slots,  as 
provided  on  platform,  metal  keys  being  supplied  to  hold  extremities 
of  cross  arms  rigidly  in  position  to  side  rails  of  platform. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION.  201 

A  third  circular  metal  band  of  diameter  equal  to  the  outer  holes, 
as  provided  on  crosspieces,  is  provided,  holes  being  spaced  equally 
distant  thereon,  as  provided  on  wooden  crosspieces  of  turntable. 
This  band  is  further  supported  at  its  extremity  by  sections  of  metal, 
shaped  like  the  letter  "L,"  attached  to  the  horizontal  portions. of 
cross  arms.  When  cage  is  in  position  the  upper  ends  of  standards  on 
turntable  engage  into  holes,  as  provided  in  metal  crosspieces  of  this 
smaller  circular  band. 

The  connection  of  this  smaller  circular  band,  fitting  over  standards, 
causes  them  to  be  held  rigidly  in  position,  the  turntable  thus  con- 
trolling rotation  of  this  band,  or,  as  may  be  said,  in  unison  with  it,  the 
caging  thus  keeping  the  wire  within  due  bounds  when '"  paying  out." 

For  "paying  out"  at  rear  two  semicircular  iron  rods,  holding  two 
vertical  rods,  which  travel  from  side  to  side,  are  supplied.  These  are 
attached  to  the  vertical  sections  of  cross  arms  at  rear.  Engaged  be- 
tween the  vertical  rods  is  supplied  a  device  which  travels  up  and 
down  these  vertical  rods,  a  hole  being  provided  at  center  of  device 
through  which  the  wire  passes  in  ''paying  out"  at  rear.  By  this 
action  the  wire  has  liberty  to  keep  in  alignment  in  the  "paying 
out/'  the  vertical  standards  moving  from  side  to  side,  and  the  device 
up  or  down,  as  may  be  controlled  by  the  action  of  the  wire,  to  relieve 
all  possibility  of  a  holdfast  in  the  "pay  out"  of  the  wire. 

For  the  purpose  of  carrying  the  pack  reel  a  saddle  is  provided,  fit- 
ting over  the  aparejo  to  which  it  is  attached,  at  front  and  rear,  and 
with  suitable  provisions  to  secure  the  legs  of  pack  reel,  and  hold  it 
securely  in  position.  (Designed  by  H.  W.  Daly.) 

PACK   CHESTS    (SIGNAL    CORPS). 

(Fig.  123.) 

SEC.  137.  These  chests  are  constructed  so  as  to  hold  the  necessary 
apparatus  for  telephonic  communication,  as  with  the  provisional  field 
artillery. 

The  exterior  of  chests  are  supplied  with  metallic  fasteners,  latigos, 
and  sections  of  rope,  for  securing  the  chests  on  the  aparejo,  in  similar 
manner  as  provided  for  engineer-corps  chests. 

LITTER    CARRIER    (HOSPITAL    CORPS). 

(Figs   1?4,125,126.) 

SEC.  138.  TJie  carrier. — It  consists  of  two  hinges,  four  side  plates — 
two  at  top  and  two  at  bottom  or  ends,  reenforced  by  wooden  shoes  to 
strengthen  same — four  staples,  two  attached  to  each  end,  each  staple 
carrying  two  tug  loops. 

Each  tug  loop  is  supplied  with  a  side  strap  and  quarter  strap.  The 
side  strap  holds  a  swivel  clamp  at  opposite  end  and  engages  over  the 
outer  rail  or  bar  of  litter ;  the  quarter  strap  is  supplied  with  a  distance 
strap  at  end,  holding  a  ring  on  each  end ;  these  rings  engage  over  the 
handles  of  litter  at  front  and  rear. 

On  each  end  of  side  plates  swivel  clamps  are  likewise  provided  that 
hold  the  inside  rail  or  bar  of  litter.  The  swivel  clamps  on  each  end 
of  side  plates  carry  a  strap,  by  means  of  which  the  litter,  before  using, 
is  strapped  to  carrier. 


202 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


203 


204 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


205 


The  side  straps  and  quarter  straps  are  adjustable,  so  that  the  litter 
may  be  carried  at  any  desired  incline  when  traveling  up  or  down  a 
mountain. 

The  swivel  clamps  carry  set  screws,  by  means  of  which  the  side  rails 
or  bars  of  litter  are  rigidly  engaged. 

Two  leather  bags  or  pockets  are  provided;  these  are  attached 
between  the  top  and  bottom  distance  plates  of  carrier,  and  are  used 


for  carrying  bands  to  secure  the  wounded,  when  necessary,  bandages, 
and  medical  supplies.  Additional  rings  are  supplied,  to  wThich  may 
be  attached  canteens  of  water,  etc. 

A  protection  from  sun  and  rain  may  be  provided  by  the  use  of  two 
shelter  halves,  always  available. 

Col.  John  Van  R.  Hoff,  Medical  Department  United  States  Army, 
indorses  the  above,  with  the  following  report  to  the  Surgeon-General, 
United  States  Army: 


206 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


[First  indorsement.] 

FORT  LEAVENWORTH,  KANS.,  March  15,  1905. 

Respectfully  forwarded  to  the  Surgeon-General,  United  States  Army,  Washington, 
D.  C.,  recommending  that  the  "Daly''  litter  frame  be  subjected  to  trial  with  view  to 
its  adoption  by  our  service. 

One  mule  with  this  appliance  and  3  men  could  each  day  easily  make  5  round  trips 
of  3  miles  each  from  battlefield  to  an  aid  station,  carrying  altogether  10  wounded. 
Assuming  that  3  men  alone  could  make  3  round  trips,  which  would  certainly  be  the 
limit,  they  would  remove  but  3  wounded;  in  other  words,  3  men  and  a  mule  would  do 
as  much  work,  and  do  it  better,  than  10  men  without  a  mule. 

I  have  used  the  litter  frame  somewhat  about  the  post  and  believe  it  to  be  a  practical 
and  valuable  military  appliance. 

If  it  is  desired  to  subject  it  to  a  trial  in  Washington,  I  have  no  doubt  Mr.  Daly,  who 
is  stationed  here,  would  be  glad  to  forward  it  or  take  the  litter  frame  to  Washington. 

JOHN  VAN  R.  HOFF, 
Colonel,  Assistant  Surgeon-General,  United  States  Army,  Surgeon. 

NOTE. — The  litter  .carrier  was  designed  to  meet  the  necessity  of 
the  quick  removal  of  the  wounded  from  near  the  firing  line  to  first-aid 
station  in  time  of  war.  For  this  purpose  gentle  and  easy-gaited  mules 
should  be  used  to  carry  the  wounded. 

While  pack  service  is  maintained  in  the  Army  there  will  always 
be  a  supply  of  suitable  pack  animals  to  draw  from  to  carry  the 
wounded,  and  much  safer  and  better  than  by  hand  or  ambulance;  the 
possibility  of  jar  as  transmitted  by  the  ambulance  over  ugly  condi- 
tions of  country  is  absolutely  eliminated  by  the  use  of  this  device. 

For  single  litter  construction,  see  figs.  127,  128,  129,  130,  131. 

SPECIFICATIONS    FOR    THE    DALY    LITTER    CARRIER. 

INDEX    TO    CONSTRUCTION. 


1.  Hinges 2 

2.  Staples  for  hinges 4 

3.  Tug  loops  (triangular  cockeyes) .  8 

4.  Coupling  plates 4 

5.  Wooden   stiff eners   for   coupling 

plates 4 

6.  Side  plates.. 4 

7.  Staples  for  side  plates. 4 

8.  Swivel  clamps 8 

9.  Bolts  for  swivel  clamps 4 

10.  Links  or  loop:  for  swivel  clamps.  4 

11 .  Staples  for  swivel  clamps 4 

12.  Set  screws  for  swivel  clamps 8 

13.  Box  rod  nuts  for  set  screws 8 

14.  Wing  nuts  for  set  screws 8 

15.  Side  straps 4 


16.  Quarter  straps 4 

17.  Guy  straps  for  quarter  straps 4 

18.  Litter  straps  for  swivel  clamps  .  .  4 

19 .  Litter  straps  for  hinges 4 

20.  Buckles,  2-inch 4 

21.  Buckles,  1-inch 14 

22.  Buckles,  f-inch 12 

23.  Rings,  If-inch 8 

24.  Rings,  l|-inch 4 

25.  Rings,  l|-inch 8 

26.  Rings,  1-inch 8 

27.  Rings,  f-inch 8 

28.  Snaps,  double 4 

29.  Snaps,  single,  "Trigger" 4 

30.  Leather  pockets  or  pouches 2 


DETAILED    SPECIFICATION. 

"Daly"  litter  frame. 

1.  Hinges  for  frame  (2) . — To  be  made  of  soft  steel,  when  shaped  to 
be  6f  inches  long,  from  center  of  bolt  at  center  of  hinge  to  center  of 
bolt  at  ends,  each  way,  measuring  horizontally. 

Take  a  piece  of  soft  steel  16  inches  long,  2£  inches  wide,  and  one- 
eighth  of  an  inch  thick  (gauge  11),  bevel  each  end,  circle  piece  and 
weld. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


207 


208 


MANUAL,   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


209 


Now  provide  a  " templet"  7J  inches  long,  2^  inches  wide,  and  five- 
sixteenths  of  an  inch  thick,  rounded  at  each  end. 

Compress  circled  piece  sufficient  so  as  to  introduce  templet  between 
its  folds,  and  fit  snug ;  keeping  templet  between  folds,  shape  one-half 
of  section,  to  form  segment  or  portion  of  circle,  whose  diameter  will 
measure  If  inches  (applied  by  square);  remove  "templet"  and  one- 
half  of  hinge  is  thus  shaped,  and  provide  a  similar  section.  To  do 
so,  straighten  u templet"  and  continue  as  before. 


To  connect  sections,  commence  at  circled  ends  to  form  hinge,  for 
first  section  cut  or  saw  out  inward  five-eighths  of  an  inch  on  each 
edge  and  end  to  receive  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  bolt  or  rivet. 

For  second  section,  cut  or  saw  out  1 J  inches  at  center  of  end,  so  as 
to  receive  first  section  and  bolt  described  therefor.     In  cutting  allow 
for  filing  so  as  to  fit  snug,  bolt  to  be  riveted  on.    The  curved  portion 
will  be  considered  the  center  of  hinge. 
24758—10 14 


210 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


211 


212  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

At  each  end  of  hinge,  cut  or  saw  out  in  entirely  similar  manner  as 
that  described  for  second  section  of  hinge,  similar  bolts  will  be  pro- 
vided therefor.  The  ends  of  hinge  to  receive  "side"  plates  of  frame. 

In  cutting  out  for  bolt,  the  aid  of  templet  may  be  employed. 

2.  Staples  for  hinge  (2). — Take  a  section  of  soft  steel,  4  inches  long, 
one-half  of  an  inch  wide,  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch  thick ;  allow  a 
base  of  1  inch  at  each  end  to  rest  on  hinge,  and   form  semicircle, 
distance  between  bases  to  be  1  inch;  provide  a  ^--inch  hole  at  center 
of  each  base  to  receive  rivets.     The  circled  portion  of  staple  will  be 
rounded  on  under  surface.     These  to  receive  two  tug  loops. 

3 .  Tug  loops  (triangular  cockeyes)  for  hinge  (4) . — Take  a  section  of 
Norway  round  iron  7  inches  long  and  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  diam- 
eter, shaped  in  this  manner:  Two  and  one-half  inches  from  each  end 
turn  at  right  angles  so  as  to  leave  inside  of  base  2  inches  wide;  now 
If  inches  from  ends  turn  at  right  angles  parallel  with  bases,  this 
leaves  a  perpendicular  wall  of  three-fourths  of  an  inch;  now  1  inch 
from  each  end   turn   upward  and  form  circle,  and  weld.     Two  tug 
loops  will  be  provided  for  each  staple.     In  applying  staples  to  hinge, 
measure  2^  inches  from  end  of  hinge  to  center  of  staple,  the  base  of 
staple  conforming  to  shape  of  hinge,  placed  exactly  in  center  of  hinge, 
the  long  way  up  and  down.     Now  provide  holes  on  hinge  correspond- 
ing with  those  on  staple  and  countersunk  holes  on  under  side  of 
hinge. 

In  riveting  staples  to  hinge,  provide  one  nut  for  each  rivet,  thick- 
ness of  nut  to  be  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch,  diameter  of  hole  in  nut  to 
be  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch.  Place  nut  between  the  folds  or  plates 
of  hinge  so  as  to  carry  rivet ;  provide  two  tug  loops  for  each  staple, 
and  rivet  staples  securely  to  hinge;  rivet  will  be  flush  with  under 
surface  of  hinge  when  riveted. 

Staples  holding  tug  loops  on  hinge  will  be  considered  the  outward 
face  thereof. 

4.  Coupling  or  distance  plates  for  hinges  (2). — To  be  of  sheet  steel, 
22  inches  long,  3  inches  wide,  and  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  thick 
(gauge  16),  edges  to  be  smoothed  off.     Now  provide  four  holes  at 
each  end  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  diameter,  spaced  in  this  manner: 
At  each  end  and  one-half  of  an  inch  therefrom  and  one-half  of  an  inch 
from  the  upper  and  the  lower  edge  provide  one  hole;  now  2  inches 
from  ends  provide  two  similar  holes;  these  holes  to  be  countersunk 
on  one  side  of  coupling  plate. 

In  applying  coupling  plates  to  hinges,  place  plate  on  the  under  side 
of  hinge  and  one-half  of  an  inch  from  end,  end  of  coupling  plate  to  be 
flush  with  the  outward  edge  of  hinge,  holes  as  countersunk  on  coup- 
ling plate  will  be  considered  the  downward  side. 

Now  provide  corresponding  holes  on  the  lower  plate  only  of  hinge, 
and  rivet  down  securely. 

Now  provide  10  similar  holes  on  coupling  plate,  between  hinges,  5 
holes  on  the  upper  side  and  5  holes  on  the  lower  side  of  plate,  spaced 
in  this  manner:  Four  inches  from  each  end  of  coupling  plate,  and 
three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  the  upper  and  the  lower  edge  provide 
1  hole,  and  between  these,  on  the  upper  and  lower  side,  provide  3 
holes,  spaced  equally  distant,  these  holes  to  be  countersunk  on  the 
under  side,  in  similar  manner.  These  to  receive  rivets  and  screws  for 
wooden  stiffeners. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  213 

5.  Metal  squares  for  coupling  plates  of  hinges  (4). — For  squares  pro- 
vide four  f-inch  brown  japanned  buckles,  and  remove  the  tongues; 
now  supply  four  sections  of  sheet  steel  same  gauge  as  coupling  plate, 
2  inches  long  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide ;  fold  each  section  so 
that  ends  will  meet,  and  lay  into  fold  the  metal  square;  provide  one 
hole  in  the  center  of  each  section,  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from 
bar  of  square  held  in  fold  of  section,  diameter  of  hole,  three-sixteenths 
of  an  inch ;  now  introduce  the  folds  of  section  on  the  downward  edge 
of  coupling  plate,  flush  with  the  bar  of  square,  and  1  inch  from  the 
inward  edge  of  hinge  to  center  of  square,  provide  a  corresponding 
hole  on  coupling  plate  and  rivet  down  securely. 

These  to  receive  straps  of  leather  bags  of  frame. 

6.  Wooden  stiff eners  for  coupling  plates  of  hinges  (2). — To  be  of 
sound  hickory,  free  from  knots  or  other  blemishes,  17  inches  long,  3 
inches  wide,  and  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  thick,  shaped  in  this  man- 
ner: Three  and  three-eighths  inches  from  each  end  saw  down  on  one 
side  three-eighths  of  an  inch,  and  "gain"  out  this  portion,  between 
cuts.     This  leaves  one-half  of  an  inch  in  thickness  on  the  bottom 
side  of  stiffener,  the  gained  surface  to  be  smoothed  off,  and  the  upper 
and  the  lower  edges  to  be  well  rounded.     This  to  receive  cincha  of 
aparejo  (pack  saddle) . 

Now  place  stiffener  on  the  upper  side  of  coupling  plate,  between 
hinges,  keeping  their  edges  flush,  and  provide  two  holes,  through 
stiffener,  at  each  end,  corresponding  with  those  on  coupling  plate, 
and  secure  rivets  and  burrs  (malleable  iron).  Introduce  rivet  and 
burr  from  upper  side  of  stiffener  and  rivet  down  on  under  side  of 
coupling  plate. 

Now  provide  6  screws,  one-half  of  an  inch,  No.  6,  and  screw  down 
to  stiffener  as  provided. 

Stiffener  holding  plate  to  be  covered  with  fair  leather,  and  sewed 
down  with  one  seam,  6  stitches  to  the  inch,  seam  to  be  flush  with 
lower  edge  of  coupling  plate. 

7.  Side  plates  for  hinges  (4). — To  be  made  of  sheet  steel,  30  inches 
long,  2^  inches  wide,  and  three  thirty-seconds  of  an  inch  thick  (gauge 
14),  shaped  in  this  manner:  At  one  end,  and  1J  inches  therefrom, 
fold  this  portion  back,  so  as  to  take  a  ^g-inch  bolt,  and  secure  with 
two  rivets;  for  rivets  provide  two  holes  three-sixteenths  of -an  inch 
diameter,  one-half  of  an  inch  from  each  edge,  and  three-fourths  of  an 
inch  from  end  of  folded  portion,  countersink  holes  on  under  side  of 
plate,  and  rivet  down.     Now  cut  or  saw  out  in  entirely  similar  manner 
as  that  described  for  first  section  of  hinge,  provide  bolt,  and  rivet 
down  to  end  of  hinge.     Now  measure  20  inches  on  the  free  end  of 
side  plate,  counting  from  center  of  bolt  on  end  of  hinge,  and  turn  at 
right  angles.     Next  provide  a  " templet,"  shaped  in  this  manner: 
Take  a  section  of  flat  iron  3  inches  long,  2J  inches  wide,  and  1£  inches 
thick.     On  one  side  at  end  bevel  or  taper  to  a  thickness  of  five-eighths 
of  an  inch,  the  beveled  end  will  be  considered  the  bottom,  and  the 
tapered  side  the  outer  face  of  templet. 

Now  place  templet  on  the  angle  formed  on  the  free  end  of  side 
plate,  and  secure  templet  to  side  plate,  and  fold  the  free  end  around 
templet,  lapping  the  remaining  portion  upward  on  side  plate.  Next 
provide  two  holes,  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  diameter,  one-half  of 
an  inch  from  each  edge,  and  free  end  of  side  plate,  holes  to  be  counter- 


214  MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

sunk  on  under  side  of  side  plate.     These  holes  to  receive  staples  for 
side  plates. 

8.  Staples  for  side  plates  (4}- — To  be  made  of  Norway  flat  iron  6 
inches  long,  one-half  inch  wide,  and  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  thick, 
shaped  in  this  manner:  One  and  five-eighths  inches  from  each  end 
turn  at  right  angles;  this  will  leave  the  outward  or  front  side  of 
staple  2 J  inches  from  out  to  out.     Now  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from 
each  end  turn  inwardly  at  right  angles,  parallel  with  outward  or  front 
side  of  staple.     Now  provide  two  holes  on  basis  of,  staple  corre- 
sponding with  those  on  end  of  side  plate.     Two  1-inch  rings  will  be 
provided  for  each  staple  and  rivet  down  securely.     Its  use  is  to 
receive  litter  straps  attached  to  " swivel  clamp"  of  side  plate. 

9.  Coupling  plates  for  side  plates   (2}. — To  be  similar   as   those 
described   for  coupling   plates   for   hinges.     In   attaching   coupling 
plates  to  side  plates,  they  will  fit  flush  with  ends  and  outward  edge  of 
side  plates ;  corresponding  holes  will  be  provided  on  the  bottom  por- 
tion of  side  plate  and  countersunk  on  its  upper  side.     When  riveted 
down,  rivets  wih1  be  flush  with  upper  and  under  surface  of  plates. 
The  loop  so  formed  on  end  of  side  plate  by  " templet"  is  to  receive 
wooden  stiffener. 

10.  Wooden  stiff eners  for  coupling  plates  of  side  plates  (#). — To  be  of 
sound  hickory,  free  from  knots  or  other  blemishes,  22  inches  long, 
3  inches  wide,  and  11  inches  thick,  shaped  in  this  manner:  Five  and 
seven-eighths  inches  from  each  end  saw  down  on  one  side  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  deep,  and  "gain"  out  portion  between  cuts.     This 
leaves  one-half  of  an  inch  thickness  on  bottom  or  under  side  of 
stiffener;  now  2^  inches  from  each  end  on  same  side  saw  down  one- 
half  of  an  inch  and  "gain"  out  between  cuts.     This  leaves  an  offset 
3  f  inches  long  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  thick.     Next  each  out- 
ward portion  of  2^  inches  will  be  beveled  or  tapered  on  same  side  to  a 
thickness  of  five-eighths  of  an  inch  on  one  end,  and  will  be  considered 
the  downward  side  of  stiffener.     This  portion  will  fit  exactly  in  form 
shaped  by  "templet"  on  the  end  of  side  plates  and  stiffener  will  ride 
flush  with  the  upper  and  lower  edges  of  coupling  plate.     Stiffener 
wih1  be  provided  with  bolts  and  screws  in  similar  manner  as  that 
described  for  stiffener  on  coupling  plate  of  hinges. 

11.  Swivel  clamps  for  side  plates  C4). — To  be  made  of  soft  steel,  7 
inches  long,  2^  inches  wide,  and  one-eighth  of  an  inch  thick  (gauge 
11),  shaped  in  this  manner:  Bevel  one  end  and  form  circle  or  turn 
as  close  as  can  be  had,  so  as  to  form  a  rounded  surface  on  end.     Now 
measure  1J  inches  from  this  end  and  turn  at  right  angles,  the  end  of 
circle  outward;  now  1£  inches  from  inside  of  angle,  turn  again  at 
right  angles  paraUel  with  first  portion,  the  base  formed  between 
parallel  sides  to  be  level  and  fully  1|  inches  in  the  clear,  the  angles 
or  corners  of  free  end  to  be  rounded.     In  shaping  base  the  angles  or 
corners  should  be  slightly  rounded ;  the  aid  of  a  templet  should  be  em- 
ployed for  this  purpose.     This  to  receive  the  pole  or  side  bar  of 

Litter."  Now  provide  two  holes  whose  diameter  shall  be  one-half 
of  an  inch;  the  first  on  free  end  of  clamp,  whose  center  shall  be  equally 
distant  from  each  edge  and  1  inch  from  free  end  of  clamp;  the 
second  on  outward  side  or  portion  first  formed,  likewise  equally  dis- 
tant from  each  edge  and  1  inch  from  rounded  end. 

The  first  hole  on  free  end  to  receive  swivel  bolt  for  clamp,  the 
second  hole  on  outward  side  of  first  portion  to  receive  box -rod  nut 
with  set  screw  and  to  be  considered  the  front  of  swivel  clamp. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  215 

12.  Swivel  "bolts  for  clamps  (4). — To  be  of  malleable  iron,  length  2 
inches,  diameter  one-half  of  an  inch,  head  of  bolt  or  rivet  to  be  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  diameter,  shaped  in  this  manner :  One  and  thirteen- 
sixteenths  inches  from  end  of  bolt  turn  down  to  three-eighths  of  an 
inch  diameter,  head  of  bolt  to  be  reduced  in  thickness  to  three- 
sixteenths  of  an  inch  diameter,  rim  of  head  to  be  beveled  on  its  upper 
or  outer  surface.     Head  of  bolt  to  be  inclined  at  such  slope  so  as  to 
fit  flat  against  the  face  of  clamp  when  clamp  is  applied  to  end  of  side 
plate  on  form  as  made  by  "templet."     In  applying  clamps  on  end  of 
side  plate  the  free  end  of  clamp  will  ride  flush  with  upper  end  of  form, 
the  edges  of  clamp  flush  with  the  edges  of  side  plate. 

Now  provide  three-eighths  of  an  inch  hole  horizontally  through 
form  and  stiffener,  whose  center  is  indicated  by  center  of  half-inch 
hole  on  clamp.  This  to  secure  clamp  to  side  plate  by  means  of  bolt 
as  provided. 

13.  Box-rod  nuts  for  swivel  clamps   (4). — To  be  2^  inches  long, 
diameter  of  hole  three-eighths  of  an  inch,  and  provided  with  thread 
for  set  screw;  now  provide  one  hole  at  each  end  of  box-rod  nut, 
diameter  of  hole  to  oe  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch,  hole  to  be  one- 
half  of  an  inch  from  each  end  and  in  center.     These  to  secure  box- 
rod  nut  to  the  outward  face  of  clamp. 

14.  Set  screws  for  swivel  clamps  (4). — To  be  1  inch  long  and  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  diameter,  thread  on  screw  to  correspond  with  that 
on  box-rod  nut,  and  provided  with  wing  nut  on  one  end;  this  end  will 
be  squared  to  receive  wing  nut  hole  in  center  of  wing  nut,  to  corre- 
spond with  the  squared  end  of  set  screw,  so  as  to  fit  snug,  and  to  be 
countersunk  on  the  outward  side  and  rivet  down  securely.     Now  in- 
troduce set  screw  through  box-rod  nut  from  the  front  side,  and  bevel 
end  of  set  screw  oval  shape,  giving  sufficient  head  on  end  of  set  screw 
to  prevent  extraction. 

Now  place  box-rod  nut  on  the  outward  face  of  clamp,  set  screw  in 
center  of  half-inch  hole,  ends  of  box-rod  nut  to  be  equally  distant  from 
the  upper  end  of  clamp,  provide  corresponding  holes  in  clamp,  holes 
in  clamp  to  be  countersunk  on  the  inner  side,  and  rivet  down  se- 
curely; rivets  on  the  inner  side  of  clamp  will  be  smoothed  off  flush 
with  the  inner  side. 

15.  Staples  for  swivel  clamps  (4). — To  be  made  of  "  Norway"  flat 
iron  3^  inches  long,  one-half  of  an  inch  wide,  and  three-sixteenths  of 
an  inch  thick,  shaped  in  this  manner:  One  and  one-fourth  inches 
from  each  end  turn  at  right  angles  so  as  to  leave  the  portion  between 
sides  1  inch  in  the  clear.     Now  five-eighths  of  an  inch  from  each  end 
turn  outwardly  at  right  angles,  parallel  with  first  portion;  this  for 
base  of  staple.     In  center  of  each  base  each  way  provide  a  TVinch 
hole  for  rivets.     Now  place  staple  on  the  under  side  of  swivel  clamp 
at  base,  the  long  way,  with  the  width  of  clamp,  the  ends  equally  dis- 
tant on  base;  provide  corresponding  holes  on  clamp;  holes  to  be 
countersunk  on  the  inner  side  on  base  of  clamp,  and  rivet  down  se- 
curely; rivets  will  be  smoothed  off  on  the  inner  side  of  swivel  clamp, 
so  as  to  be  flush  with  base. 

Staple  on  swivel  clamp  to  receive  litter  strap,  these  to  attach  closed 
litter  to  " frame"  by  means  of  staple  on  side  plate  as  provided.  In 
securing  swivel  clamp  to  end  of  side  plate,  on  form  as  provided,  the 
shorter  side  of  clamp  will  be  outward,  and  provide  washer  for  swivel 
bolt,  diameter  of  hole  to  be  one-half  of  an  inch;  introduce  bolt  through 


216  MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 

half-inch  hole  on  free  end  of  clamp  and  apply  washer  over  bolt ;  thick- 
ness of  washer  must  not  exceed  what  is  not  covered  for  swivel  portion, 
so  as  to  permit  clamp  to  swing  freely  when  riveted  on  the  clamp 
swivels  on  the  shoulder  formed  on  bolt,  the  washer  acting  as  an  aid 
to  clamp  to  swing  or  swivel  freely.  Now  introduce  bolt  through  hole 
on  form  on  end  of  side  plate,  and  rivet  down  securely  on  under  side 
of  side  plate. 

16.  Swivel  clamps  for  side  straps  (4). — To  be  made  in  similar  manner 
as  that  described  for  swivel  clamps  for  side  plates  of  frame,  with  the 
following  exception:  The  free  end  of  clamp  to  be  rolled  outwardly 
to  receive  link  or  loop,  whose  diameter  will  be  five-sixteenths  of  an 
inch. 

17.  Links  for  swivel  clamps  for  side  straps  (4). — To  be  of  "  Norway  " 
round  iron,  6J  inches  long  and  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  diameter, 
shaped  in  this  manner:  Two  inches  from  each  end  turn  at  right  angles; 
this  leaves  a  base  of  2J  inches  to  be  engaged  by  roll  on  free  end  of 
clamp.     Now  1  inch  from  each  end  turn  again  at  right  angles  and 
weld ;  this  leaves  a  base  of  2  inches  wide  to  receive  side  strap ;  diameter 
of  link  to  be  three-fourths  of  an  inch  between  bases.     In  engaging 
the  lower  base  in  roll  provided  on  clamp,  allow  sufficient  play  in  roll 
for  link  to  work  freely,  roll  on  free  end  of  clamp  to  be  turned  out- 
wardly and  link  engaged  securely;  the  upper  base  or  portion  of  link 
to  receive  side  strap  of  frame,  width  of  side  strap  to  be  2  inches. 

18.  Side  straps  for  litter  frame  (4). — To  be  made  of  good  solid 
harness  leather,  one-eighth  of  an  inch  thick.     Cut  two  straps  5  feet 
long  and  2  inches  wide,  shave  each  end  of  straps,  and  fold,  keeping 
the  " grained"  side  of   each  strap   outward;  this  gives  a  doubled 
thickness  for  side  strap.     In  folding  allow  an  extension  of  3  inches  on 
one  strap;  this  gives   a  similar  extension  at  opposite  end.     Now 
provide  two  sections,  each  6  inches  long  and  2  inches  wide,  and  shave 
ends.     Lay  the  first  section  on  one  end  between  the  folds  of  strap,  so 
as  to  extend  to  end.     Now  fold  over  extension  and  section,  so  as  to 
receive  the  ends  of  section  between  the  folds  of  strap,  and  lap  the  free 
end  of  .strap  on  outer  side  of  folds;  this  gives  a  doubled  thickness 
at  center  of  fold.     Next  punch  opening  at  center  of  end  to  receive  a 
2-inch   japanned   buckle.     Introduce   buckle  receiving  section  and 
extension  and  fold  back  ends  as  indicated.     Now  provide  keeper  for 
strap,  to  be  placed  on  the  upper  side  and  2  inches  from  buckle,  width 
of  section  for  keeper  to  be  2  inches.     Sew  down  both  sections  of  side 
strap  to  within  4  inches  of  opposite  end  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch 
from  edges.     Provide  six  holes,  spaced  2  inches  apart,  large  enough  to 
freely  admit  tongue  of  buckle,  nrst  hole  to  be  9  inches  from  buckle 
end  of  strap.     Now  provide  a  swivel  clamp  for  side  strap  and  intro- 
duce the  free  end  of  strap  through  the  link  of  clamp  and  through 
keeper  and  buckle ;  engage  buckle  on  free  end  of  strap  so  as  to  leave  a 
loop  of  about  9  inches  long.     The  back  of  clamp  will  correspond  with 
back  of  buckle. 

Now  place  the  " second"  section  on  the  free  end  of  side  strap  and 
pass  this  end  through  both  tug  loops  or  cockeyes,  on  one  side  of  hinge 
as  provided,  from  underneath,  and  engage  around  first  or  upper  tug 
loop  on  opposite  side  of  hinge;  the  section  and  extension  of  strap  on 
free  end  to  be  folded  in  similar  manner  as  described  for  opposite  end 
and  sewed  down. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  217 

In  applying  side  strap  with  swivel  clamp  for  opposite  side  of  hinge, 
pass  the  free  end  of  strap  through  the  lower  tug  loop  from  under- 
neath, and  engage  around  the  first  or  upper  tug  loop  on  opposite 
side  in  similar  manner  and  sew  down. 

It  will  be  noted  the  side  straps  overlap  or  cross  over  each  other, 
causing  tension  on  strap  to  come  from  opposite  side  of  hinge. 

Proceed  in  similar  manner  in  applying  side  straps  for  second  hinge. 

19.  Quarter  straps  for  litter  frame  (4). — To  be  made  of  good  solid 
harness  leather,  one-eighth  of  an  inch  thick.  The  first  two  to  be 
known  as  the  " front"  quarter  straps,  the  second  two  the  "rear" 
quarter  straps.  Each  quarter  strap  to  have  three  sections,  to  be 
designated  as  the  first  or  upper,  the  second  or  lower,  and  the  third  the 
guy  or  distance  strap. 

First  section. — For  the  front  quarter  straps  cut  two  sections  30 
inches  long  and  1  inch  wide,  shave  one  end  of  each  strap,  and  fold 
2£  inches  and  punch  for  buckle;  provide  a  1-inch  japanned  buckle 
and  engage  onto  strap.  Next  provide  two  keepers,  width  of  keeper 
to  be  1  inch,  the  first  or  upper  to  be  1  inch  from  buckle,  the  second 
or  lower  to  be  2  inches  therefrom  and  sewed  down  one-eighth  of  an 
inch  from  each  edge,  the  opposite  end  of  strap  to  be  rounded  or  ta- 
pered on  edges.  Now  provide  15  holes  punched  No.  8  punch,  counting 
3  inches  on  the  free  end  of  strap  for  the  first,  and  spaced  1  inch  apart. 
Now  provide  one  1^-inch  japanned  ring  and  one  double  snap; 
engage  ring  on  the  buckle  end  of  strap  and  the  double  snap  onto 
ring.  The  opposite  end  of  snap  will  be  engaged  onto  the  lower  tug 
loop  on  side  of  hinge,  and  to  be  known  as  the  front  hinge  or  front  of 
frame.  The  free  end  of  strap  will  be  provided  with  similar  ring  and 
engaged  thereon,  this  to  receive  second  section  of  quarter  strap. 

Second  section. — For  second  section  provide  two  similar  straps ;  on 
the  buckle  end  engage  a  1^-inch  japanned  ring;  on  the  free  or  opposite 
end  engage  a  single  snap  (trigger  snap  preferred). 

The  single  snap  on  second  section  will  be  engaged  onto  ring  on 
first  section.  The  ring  on  opposite  end  of  second  section  to  receive 
the  "guy"  or  distance  strap  (or  third  section). 

Third  section. — For  third  section  provide  two  straps,  cut  30  inches 
long  and  1  inch  wide;  shave  each  end  of  strap  and  fold  each  end  so 
as  to  leave  a  length  of  24  inches;  provide  two  If -inch  japanned 
rings;  drop  one  ring  into  the  fold  of  straps  at  one  end  and  sew  down. 
Now  pass  the  free  end  of  guy  strap  through  the  ring  on  second  sec- 
tion, and  drop  the  second  ring  into  fold  on  free  end  and  sew  down  in 
similar  manner  as  described  for  first  section. 

For  the  rear  quarter  straps,  first  section,  cut  two  straps  48  inches 
long  and  1  inch  wide,  and  provide  in  similar  manner  as  that  described 
for  first  section  of  "front"  quarter  straps,  each  strap  to  have  a  run- 
ning or  free  keeper  engaged  about  center  of  strap.  First  section 
will  be  engaged  onto  lower  tug  loop  on  hinge  at  rear,  as  described  for 
the  front. 

For  the  second  section  provide  two  similar  straps  as  that  de- 
scribed for  second  section  of  front  quarter  straps,  to  be  engaged  in 
similar  manner. 

For  third  section  provide  in  similar  manner  as  that  described  for 
the  front  quarter  straps.  It  will  be  noted  the  ring  on  end  of  second 
sections  at  front  and  rear  hooks  freely  on  the  "guy"  straps,  being 


218  MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 

engaged  on  strap  between  rings  at  each  end.     The  rings  at  each  end 
of  guy  strap  engage  over  handles  of  litter. 

20.  Litter  straps  for  sivivel  clamps  (4). — To  be  36  inches  long  and  1 
inch  wide,  provided  with  japanned  buckle  and  two  keepers.     Straps 
to  be  engaged  on  staples  on  the  bottom  or  under  side  of  swivel  clamps 
on  side  plates.     These  to  secure  closed  litter  when  traveling  to  the 
firing  line. 

21.  Litter  straps  for  hinges  (4). — To  be  made  in  two  sections,  and 
designated  as  the  buckle  piece  and  tongue  piece. 

First  section. — For  buckle  piece  cut  a  strap  of  leather  12  inches 
long  and  1  inch  wide,  shave  each  end,  and  supply  a  1-inch  japanned 
buckle  for  one  end,  lap  2J  inches,  drop  buckle  into  lap  in  the  usual 
manner,  provide  keeper  on  upper  side,  and  sew  down.  The  opposite 
end  to  be  engaged  on  lower  tug  loop  on  one  side  of  hinge,  lapped  2J 
inches  and  sewed  down. 

Second  section. — For  tongue  piece  cut  a  strap  18  inches  long  and  1 
inch  wide,  shave  one  end,  and  lap  2J  inches,  and  point  the  opposite 
end.  The  shaved  end  will  be  engaged  on  lower  tug  loop  on  opposite 
side  of  hinge,  lap  2J  inches,  and  sew  down.  Tongue  piece  to  be  pro- 
vided with  9  holes  punched  No.  8  punch,  spaced  1  inch  apart,  com- 
mencing for  the  first  3  inches  from  pointed  end. 

The  second  hinge  will  be  provided  in  similar  manner.  The  tongue 
piece  on  each  hinge  will  not  be  on  the  same  side. 

22.  Leather  bags  for  frame  (2). — To  be  made  of  good  solid  bag 
leather,  fair  preferred,  shaped  in  this  manner:  Cut  one  piece   15 
inches  long  and  15  inches  wide,  allow  9  inches  for  back,  and  6  inches 
turn  over  for  lid,  for  front  piece;  cut  a  section  15  inches  long  and  9 
inches  wide  or  deep.     For  bellows  cut  one  piece  33  inches  long  and 
4^  inches  wide,  round  the  four  corners  of  back  piece  and  two  corners 
of  front  piece  to  correspond  with  the  bottom  portion  of  back  piece, 
hemstitch  bellows  to  back  and    front    piece  and  provide  binding 
same  material  cut  1J  inches  wide,  two  pieces;  first  piece  to  be  long 
enough   to  extend   around   the   back  piece,  the  second  piece  long 
enough  to  extend  around  the  front  piece;  shave  binding  sufficient  to 
lap  over  edges  freely,  and  sew  down,  six  stitches  to  the  inch,  four 
cord,  Barbour's  No.   12  waxed  with  best  fair  wax.     Now  cut  two 
pieces  12  inches  long  and  three-fourths  of   an  inch  wide  for  back 
piece,  shave  ends  and  supply  four  f-inch  rings,  lap  1J  inches  at  each 
end,  drop  rings  into  lap,  and  sew  down. 

In  applying  ring  pieces  to  back  piece,  measure  2J  inches  from  each 
end  to  center  of  strap,  and  sew  down  to  back  piece,  the  long  way  of 
strap  to  be  up  and.  down. 

Buckle  piece  for  ring  pieces  of  back  piece  (4). — Cut  two  straps  for 
upper  rings,  10  inches  long  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide,  supply 
buckle  and  two  keepers  for  each  piece,  and  sew  down  in  usual  manner. 

These  to  be  engaged  onto  upper  rings  on  back  piece  and  strapped 
down  to  squares  as  supplied  on  the  lower  edge  of  coupling  plate. 

For  the  lower  rings  of  back  piece  cut  two  straps  20  inches  long  and 
three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide,  provide  in  similar  manner  as  that 
described  for  the  upper  straps,  and  engage  onto  lower  rings  on  back 
piece,  these  to  be  strapped  down  to  rings  as  provided  on  staple  of 
side  plates. 

For  lid  provide  two  tongue  pieces  cut  8  inches  long  and  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  wide  shave  one  end  of  each  strap  and  point 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION.  219 

opposite  end,  space  tongue  pieces  on  lid  as  provided  for  ring  pieces 
on  back  piece,  and  sew  down  1^  inches  from  end  of  lid.  Now  pro- 
vide two  buckle  pieces  for  tongue  pieces  on  face  of  front  pieces,  to 
be  spaced  in  similar  manner  as  provided  for  tongue  pieces.  Supply 
buckle  and  keeper  in  usual  manner  and  sew  down  on  face  piece, 
buckle  piece  when  finished  not  to  exceed  3  inches  long,  the  end  of 
buckle  piece  on  end  of  face  piece,  tongue  pieces  to  have  holes  spaced 
one-half  of  an  inch  apart  the  length  of  tongue  piece,  commencing  for 
the  first  1  inch  from  end  of  tongue  piece. 

These  to  receive  flexible  band  (webbing)  to  secure  wounded  to 
litter,  medicine  supplies,  etc.  [Designed  by  H.  W.  Daly.] 

AMMUNITION    BOXES ORDNANCE    DEPARTMENT. 

SEC.  139.  During  the  Spanish- American  war  (1898)  the  necessity 
for  a  rapid  ammunition  supply,  by  the  aid  of  suitable  ammunition 
boxes,  without  the  necessity  of  removing  the  boxes  from  the  pack 
animal,  forced  itself  upon  the  writer,  from  the  fact  that  many  ropes 
were  lost  or  left  at  point  of  delivery  when  exposed  in  the  zone  of  fire ; 
also  owing  to  the  fact  that  ammunition  deteriorated  by  exposure  to 
dampness,  a  hermetically-sealed  tin  case  was  provided,  inclosed  in  the 
wooden  box.  (Figs.  132,  133.) 

For  the  purpose  of  rapid  delivery,  two  wooden  boxes  of  equal  di- 
mensions were  provided,  the  inside  dimensions  having  a  greater  depth 
and  length  than  the  metallic  case.  A  lid  was  provided  on  one  side, 
acting  on  hinges;  a  band  of  iron  passed  along  the  front  of  the  lid 
lengthw^ise  and  running  upwardly  on  each  end  of  box  at  an  acute 
angle  with  the  lid  of  box,  the  ends  of  bands  being  secured  by  a  bolt 
passing  through  from  inside  of  box  and  secured  over  band  on  outside. 

This  arrangement  allowed  the  band  to  be  raised  over  top  of  box  and 
the  lid  to  open  out  and  down;  to  retain  the  band  when  in  position 
over  lid,  a  spring  was  supplied  at  center  that  engaged  the  band, 
holding  band  firmly  in  place. 

On  the  inside  of  box,  against  the  top  at  rear,  a  cleat  was  supplied, 
taking  up  the  extra  space  between  the  tin  case  and  top  of  box,  or 
nearly  so. 

On  the  front  side  and  bottom  of  box  an  iron  roller,  about  one- 
fourth  of  an  inch  in  diameter  was  attached,  and  in  front  of  roller  a 
wooden  cleat  was  supplied  as  a  guard  for  roller  in  introducing  the  tin 
case.  To  add  to  the  easy  introduction  of  the  tin  case,  strips  of  tin 
were  supplied,  adjusted  along  the  bottom  and  ends  of  box,  and  for 
the  easy  action  of  the  roller,  a  strip  was  supplied  under  roller  and 
properly  secured. 

This  arrangement  left  a  space  of  about  1£  inches  between  the  tin 
case  and  lid  of  box;  to  take  up  this  play  or  space  and  hold  the  tin 
case  in  position  behind  its  roller,  a  short  wooden  cleat  is  attached 
at  the  center  of  lid,  so  that  when  lid  was  closed  it  abutted  against  the 
side  of  tin  case,  holding  it  in  place. 

On  the  outside  of  box  metallic  fasteners,  fitting  over  the  corners 
at  rear  and  bottom  of  box,  were  supplied.  The  device  or  fastener 
on  right-hand  corner  of  each  box  held  a  hook,  working  on  a  hinge 
and  pivot;  the  left-hand  corner  of  each  box  being  provided  with  an 
angle  iron  holding  five  buttons,  over  which  the  hook  engaged  when 
the  boxes  were  in  position  on  the  aparejo,  the  number  of  buttons  per- 


220 


MANUAL,  OF   PACK   TKANSPOETATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


221 


222  MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

mitting  the  raising  or  lowering  of  either  box  to  equalize  the  load 
should  the  contents  of  one  box  be  lighter  than  its  mate. 

Each  box  by  this  arrangement  has  a  right-hand  hook  and  a  left- 
hand  angle  iron,  holding  buttons,  thus  making  boxes  interchangeable. 
Each  box  is  then  supplied  with  a  "D"  ring  on  each  end  of  box  to 
receive  the  "lashing." 

For  lashing  two  sections  of  rope  about  4  feet  long,  standard  size, 
holding  a  ring  on  each  end,  and  attached  to  each  ring  a  latigo  of 
suitable  length  is  attached;  the  rope  portion  is  held  under  the  boot 
of  the  aparejo  and  latinos  engage  on  to  "D"  rings  on  ends  of  box, 
and  secured  as  in  cinching' a  saddle. 

For  the  purpose  of  delivering  ammunition  at  or  near  the  firing 
line,  as  may  be  desired,  the  metal  band  on  front  of  each  box  is  re- 
leased and  passed  over  the  top  of  box.  Both  hands  then  grip  the 
wooden  box,  the  thumbs  raising  the  metallic  case  inside  of  box  so 
as  to  free  the  roller  at  bottom;  this  action  causes  the  tin  box  to  fall  on 
roller,  forcing  the  case  out  instantly,  the  angle  at  which  the  boxes  are 
held  on  the  pack  mule  giving  impetus  to  the  delivery  of  metallic 
cases  by  their  weight  wThen  raised  above  the  roller. 

The  lid  is  then  closed  and  the  band,  by  quick  action,  takes  position 
over  spring,  retaining  the  band  securely,  and  the  animal  is  ready  to 
return  to  the  supply  depot  for  another  load  of  ammunition  and  de- 
liver as  before. 

By  the  aid  of  these  wooden  boxes  and  metallic  cases,  a  rapid  and 
systematic  ammunition  supply  can  be  maintained  along  the  extent 
of  firing  line  by  pack  mules;  on  the  basis  of  1,000  rounds  to  the 
metallic  case,  100,000  rounds  of  ammunition  can  be  delivered  at  any 
point  on  the  firing  line  in  from  two  to  three  minutes,  with  proper 
assistance  on  reaching  the  firing  line,  with  a  train  of  50  pack  mules. 
(Designed  by  H.  W.  Daly.) 

PACK    OUTFIT,   AMERICAN    MODEL,   FOR    MAXIM    AUTOMATIC    MACHINE    GUN, 
CALIBER  30,  MODEL  OF   1904. 

(Figs.  134-135.) 

SEC.  140.  A  complete  outfit  for  one  gun  comprises  five  packs — one 
for  the  gun  and  tripod,  one  for  carrying  six  boxes  of  ammunition 
loading  machine,  and  box  of  tools  and  accessories,  and  three  each 
carrying  six  boxes  of  ammunition  and  two  water  boxes: 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  parts  common  to  all  the  packs:  (1) 
Halter  bridle,  (2)  blinders,  (3)  corona,  (4)  aparejo,  (5)  crupper,  (6) 
sobre-jalma,  (7)  pack  frame,  (8)  aparejo  cincha,  (9)  belly  cincha,  (10) 
load  cincha. 

To  complete  the  ammunition  and  belt-filling  machine  pack,  add  to 
the  above  ammunition  hangers  six  ammunition  boxes,  one  belt-filling 
machine  and  box,  and  one  box  of  tools  and  accessories.  To  complete 
the  ammunition  and  water  box  packs,  add  to  the  above:  The  ammuni- 
tion hangers,  six  boxes  of  ammunition,  and  two  water  boxes.  On' 
one  of  these  packs  is  carried  (1)  the  filling  cup  with  its  straps. 

To  complete  the  gun  pack,  add:  (1)  Gun  hanger  and  gun,  (2)  tripod 
hanger  and  tripod,  (3)  barrel  case  and  spare  barrel,  (4)  ammunition 
boxes. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


223 


The  packs  are  practically  identical  in  all  details,  except  the  design 
of  the  hangers,  these  being  especially  adapted  to  the  loads  they  are 
to  carry. 

APAREJO,  PROPER. 

The  aparejo, proper, includes  the  body,  crupper,  sobre-jalma,  cincha, 
and  corona. 


THE   PACK   FRAME. 


The  frame  is  identical  for  all  packs.  It  consists  of  two  bronze 
arches  connected  longitudinally  by  steel  angles.  To  the  projecting 
ends  of  the  arches  are  riveted  four  steel  hoops  or  ribs,  which  hang 
downward  and  partly  embrace  the  body  of  the  animal.  The  frame- 
work thus  formed  is  strengthened  by  four  steel  plates  riveted  fore  and 


224 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


aft,  two  to  the  under  side  of  the  ends  of  the  arches  and  two  to  the 
floating  ends  of  the  ribs.  Strips  of  wood  are  attached  to  these  steel 
plates,  which  serve  to  stiffen  them.  The  upper  strips  of  wood  are 
gained  to  form  a  seat  for  the  aparejo  cincha.  These,  and  also  the 
lower  strips,  serve  to  distribute  the  pressure  of  the  cincha  and  the 
load.  To  the  ends  of  the  bronze  arches  hooks  are  attached  for  hold- 
ing the  hangers. 


THE   HANGERS. 

There  are  three  different  designs,  viz,  the  gun  hanger,  the  tripod 
hanger,  and  the  ammunition  hanger. 

The  ammunition  hanger  consists  of  a  rear  frame  made  of  angle 
steel,  to  the  lower  side  of  which  is  riveted  the  bottom  frame,  made  also 
of  angle  steel,  but  with  the  webbing  cut  away  from  the  ends  of  the 
frame.  The  top  of  the  rear  frame  and  of  the  outer  corners  of.  the 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


225 


bottom  frame  are  connected  by  side  braces.  The  rear  frame  has  a 
rear  top  brace  riveted  to  its  upper  ends;  also  two  inclined  braces 
riveted  each  with  one  end  to  the  middle  of  the  lower  bar  of  the  frame, 
the  other  end  to  the  rear  top  brace  near  its  ends.  To  these  latter 
braces  are  riveted  the  hanger  eyes.  To  the  back  of  the  rear  frame 
and  about  3  inches  from  its  lower  edge  is  riveted  the  rear  bottom 


brace.     This  brace  rests  against  the  ribs  hanging  from  the  pack 
frame. 

The  hangers  for  gun  and  tripod  consist  of  two  hooks  bent  to  suit 
the  load,  and  are  made  of  steel.  They  are  provided  with  eyes  for 
attachment  to  the  hooks  on  the  arch  frame,  and  are  fitted  with  dis- 
tance pieces,  which  rest  on  the  ribs  hanging  from  the  pack  frame, 
thus  keeping  the  load  away  from  the  sides  of  the  animal. 


226  MANUAL,  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 

THE    GUN    COVER,    SPARE    BARREL,    AND    FILLING    CUP. 

The  gun  cover  is  made  of  heavy  olive-drab  duck  and  protects  the 
gun  from  dust  and  rain. 


The  spare  barrel  is  carried  in  a  russet-leather  case  strapped  to  the 
pack  frame  under  the  hanger  on  the  gun  side  of  the  pack. 

The  filling  cup  for  filling  water  jacket  is  carried  strapped  to  the 
pack  frame  of  one  of  the  ammunition  and  water  packs. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION.  227 

The  various  parts  of  the  pack  are  shown  separately  in  Figs.  134 
and  135. 

The  weights  of  the  loads  are  as  follows : 

Gun  and  tripod  pack. 

Pounds. 

Blinder 1 

Halter  bridle 5 

Aparejo  proper 53.  75 

Belly  cincha 2.  2 

Load  cincha 5 

Gun  with  water  jacket  filled 74.  5 

Pouch  for  rear  sight  carriage 18 

Tripod 77.5 

Hanger  of  gun,  with  cover 10 

Hanger  of  tripod 9 

Spare  barrel  and  case 7.  5 

Pack  frame 29 

Pack  cover,  78"  x  36".5 3.  25 


Total..... 278.  35 

Ammunition  and  belt  filling  machine  pack. 

Pounds. 

Blinder 1 

Halter  bridle 5 

Aparejo,  proper : 53.  75 

Belt-filling  machine  and  box 23.  38 

Ammunition  hangers  (2) 22 

Ammunition  boxes,  empty  (6) 30.  96 

Belly  cincha 2.  2 

Load  cincha 5 

1,500  rounds  of  ammunition 96 

Box  with  tools  and  accessories 20 

Pack  frame 29 

Pack  cover,  78"  x  36".5 3.25 


Total 291.  54 

Ammunition  and  water  box  pack. 

Blinder 1 

Halter  bridle 5 

Aparejo,  proper 53.  75 

Ammunition  hangers  (2) 22 

Ammunition  boxes,  empty  (6) 31 

Belly  cincha .' 2.2 

Load  cincha 5 

Water  boxes,  filled  (2)... 37.25 

1,500  rounds  of  ammunition 96 

Filling  cup  and  straps  « 1.  75 

Pack  frame 29 

Pack  cover,  78"  x  36".5 3.25 


Total 287.  20 

The  top  of  the  pack  frame  is  so  constructed  that  it  may  in  emer- 
gencies be  used  as  a  seat,  on  which  to  pack  from  one  to  three  standard- 
sized  boxes  of  ammunition  or  other  contents.  For  ordinary  service, 
however,  these  packs  are  sufficiently  heavy  without  such  a  top  load. 

a  On  one  pack  only. 


228  MANUAL  OF  PACK  TRANSPORTATION. 

TO  PREPARE  AND  LOAD  THE  PACKS. 

The  animal  being  bridled  and  blinded,  the  pack  is  placed  in  posi- 
tion as  follows : 

The  corona  is  first  put  on,  the  canvas  side  next  the  animal  and  the 
edge  with  circular  stitching  just  over  the  withers. 

The  crupper,  sobre-jalma,  and  pack  frame  are  all  bound  to  the 
aparejo  body.  The  crupper  is  first  attached  by  the  leather  thongs 
provided  for  the  purpose.  The  sobre-jalma  is  then  placed  in  position 
over  the  aparejo  body,  the  slits  near  its  center  being  passed  over  the 
staples  projecting  from  the  aparejo  body.  Next  comes  the  pack 
frame,  which  is  placed  over  all,  the  staples  mentioned  above  passing 
through  slots  in  the  projecting  ends  of  the  flat  steel  pieces  riveted  to 
the  bronze  arches.  The  whole  is  fastened  together  by  leather  billets 
sewed  to  the  sobre-jalma,  the  ends  of  which  pass  through  the  eyes  of 
the  staples. 

The  parts  thus  assembled  are  placed  on  the  animal  over  the  corona 
and  bound  in  place  by  the  aparejo  cincha.  The  cincha  is  placed  in 
position  by  passing  the  gas  pipe  end  (seam  side  up)  through  the 
pack  frame  from  the  near  side  and  bringing  it  up  under  the  animal's 
belly.  It  is  bound  by  simply  passing  the  cincha  strap  several  times 
through  its  seat  in  the  end  of  the  cincha  and  a  ring  fastened  to  the 
cincha  strap  near  its  fast  end. 

The  pressure  of  the  folds  one  upon  another  prevents  slipping  of 
the  cincha  strap.  The  loose  end  of  the  cincha  strap  is  passed  through 
a  loop  sewed  to  the  cincha. 

The  hangers,  gun,  and  tripod,  or  ammunition,  are  next  placed  in 
position  and  secured  to  the  belly  cinchas.  The  loads  are  then  placed 
in  position  and  fastened  by  straps  attached  to  the  various  hangers. 

The  load  cincha  is  now  put  on  and  lashed  in  place  by  the  straps  in 
the  ends  of  the  belly  cincha.  These  straps  also  pass  through  D  rings 
attached  to  the  hangers,  thus  binding  the  various  parts  of  the  load 
firmly  together. 

CARE  AND  PRESERVATION  OF  LEATHER  EQUIPMENTS. 

These  equipments  are  made  of  russet  leather  containing  enough 
oil  to  materially  improve  the  quality  and  increase  the  life  of  the 
leather,  but  not  enough  to  soil  the  clothing  if  the  equipment  is  prop- 
erly cared  for. 

The  leather  is  pure  oak  tanned,  of  No.  1  tannage  and  finish,  hand 
stuffed,  with  a  light  dubbing  made  of  pure  tallow  and  cod  liver  oil 
to  preserve  the  leather,  the  dubbing  being  so  sparingly  used  that  the 
oil  will  not  exude. 

The  following  directions  for  cleaning  and  preserving  the  leather 
equipment  should  be  carefully  followed: 

To  preserve  the  life  of  russet  leather  equipments  they  should  be 
cleaned  whenever  dirt,  grit,  or  dust  has  collected  on  them  or  when 
they  have  become  saturated  with  the  sweat  of  a  horse.  In  cleaning 
them  the  parts  should  first  be  separated  and  each  part  sponged,  using 
a  lather  of  castile  soap  and  warm  water.  When  nearly  dry  a  lather 
of  Crown  soap  and  warm  water  should  be  used.  If  the  equipment  is 
cared  for  frequently  this  method  is  sufficient;  but  if  the  leather  has 
become  hard  and  dry  a  little  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  applied  after 


MANUAL    OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


229 


washing  with  castile  soap.  When  the  oil  is  dry  the  equipments 
should  be  sponged  lightly  with  Crown  soap  and  water,  which  will 
remove  the  surplus  remaining  on  the  surface.  If  a  polish  is  desired 
a  thin  coat  of  russet-leather  polish  issued  by  the  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment should  be  applied  and  rubbed  briskly  with  a  dry  cloth. 

Particular  care  should  be  taken  not  to  use  too  much  Crown  soap  or 
water,  as  the  result  will  be  detrimental  to  the  life  of  the  leather.  In 
no  case  should  leather  be  dipped  in  water  or  ~be  placed  in  the  sun  to 
dry. 

Weights. 

Weight  of  gun,  water  jacket  empty pounds. .  61.  5 

Weight  of  gun,  water  jacket  filled do 74.  5 

Capacity  of  water  jacket pints . .  13 

Weight  of  tripod,  complete,  with  cleaning  rod pounds. .  78 

Weight  of  wheeled  mount,  without  equipment.... do 235 

Weight  of  one  ammunition  box,  with  belt  containing  250  cartridges do 21. 16 

Weight  of  tool  box,  filled do 20 

Weight  of  water  box do 18.  62 

Weight  of  belt-filling  machine  box,  filled do 21 

This  short  description  or  portion  is  taken  from  No.  1770,  Hand- 
book of  the  Maxim  automatic  machine  gun,  caliber  30.  Revised 
January  7,  1908. 

NOTE. — For  improved  method  of  carrying  the  Maxim  automatic 
machine  gun,  caliber  30,  see  figs.  138  to  142.  (Designed  by  H.  W. 
Daly.) 

PACK     OUTFIT,     AMERICAN     MODEL,     FOR     2.95-INCH     VICKERS-MAXIM 

MOUNTAIN   GUN. 

(Figs.  143  to  149). 

SEC.  141.  Experience  in  the  Philippines  demonstrated  that  the 
English  outfit  is  not  entirely  satisfactory,  and  a  new  pack,  based  on 
American  practice,  has  been  designed.  The  component  parts  per 
unit  (one  gun)  of  the  American  outfit  are  as  follows:  (See  footnote.) 


13  halter  bridles. 

13  aparejos — three  58-inch,  seven  60- 
inch,  and  three  62-inch. 

13  ^  coronas — three  48-inch,  seven  50- 
inch,  and  three  52-inch. 

13  sobre-jalmas — three  59-inch,  seven  61- 
inch,  and  three  63-inch. 

13  aparejo  cinchas. 

10  belly  cinchas. 

13  cruppers  12  by  8  by  78  inches. 

2  drag  ropes. 

2  wheel  hangers. 
1  pad  for  trail. 

1  tool  case,  with  inside  pockets. 
1  tool  case,  with  inside  straps. 
4  lifting  rods. 

3  load  cinchas. 

9  ammunition  cinchas. 
13  blinders. 


1  sponge  brush  and  sponge  rod. 

1  cleaning  brush. 

2  tubular  oil  cans. 

1  tubular  oil-can  carrier,  with  straps. 

2  piston-rod  protectors. 
1  cradle  cleaner. 

1  set  of  tompions  for  cradle. 

1  front-sight  cover. 

1  breech  cover. 

1  tangent-sight  cover. 

1  muzzle  cover. 

1  gunner's  pouch. 

6  lash  ropes. 

3  implement  straps. 
13  pack  frames. 

12  combined  packing  cases  and  ammu- 
nition hangers  (12J-pound  shell). 

6  combined  packing  cases  and  ammuni- 
tion hangers  (18-pound  shell). 


NOTES. — (1)  The  above  provides  necessary  equipment  for  one 
mule  for  gun,  one  mule  for  trail,  one  mule  for  cradle,  one  mule  for 
wheels  and  accessories,  and  nine  mules  for  ammunition.  (2)  A  com- 
plete outfit  for  a  four-gun  battery  would  be  obtained  by  multiplying 
the  number  of  each  of  the  articles  above  enumerated  by  four. 


230 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


231 


The  pack  frame  placed  on  the  aparejo  is  identical  for  all  packs, 
and  consists  of  two  cast-bronze  arches  connected  by  bronze  side  bars , 
the  frame  thus  formed  is  riveted  to  two  steel  hoops  or  ribs,  which 
are  connected  fore  and  aft  by  four  steel  plates  stiffened  by  flat  pieces 
of  wood,  the  lower  ones  supporting  and  distributing  the  effects  of 
side  loads  when  hangers  are  used. 


The  arrangement  of  the  packs  remains  the  same  as  in  the  English 
system,  and  while  the  weights  of  the  loads  with  packs  are  greater 
they  are  closer  to  the  mule's  back,  lessening  the  tendency  to  shift,  are 
more  securely  lashed,  and  the  weight  is  better  distributed  by  the 
greater  bearing  surface  of  the  aparejo.  The  method  of  lashing  is 
shown  in  figs.  143  to  149,  inclusive. 


232 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


233 


234 


MANUAL,  OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


235 


236 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


237 


238 


MANUAL   OF   PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


MANUAL   OF   PACK   TRANSPORTATION. 


239 


240 


MANUAL  OF   PACK   TBANSPOKTATION. 


rv 


MANUAL    OF    PACK    TRANSPORTATION, 


241 


24758—10 16 


242 


MANUAL    OF    PACK    TRANSPORTATION. 


No.  of 
mule. 


Description  of  load. 


Weight. 


Pounds. 

Gun,  complete,  with  mechanism r. 236 

Breech  and  muzzle  covers 2 

Load  cincha 4 

1  I  Lash  ropes 

1  Gunner's  pouch 1 1 

Pack,  complete— bridle,  aparejo,  crupper,  cinchas,  coronas,  sobre-jalma,  and  frame j  90 

Total : 1 !  335 

Cradle,  with  buffers  filled  with  oil I  194 

Load  cincha  and  lash  loops 6 

Cradle  cleaner  and  tompions 4 

2  Tool  boxes,  with  tools 12 

Pack,  complete 90 

Total , 306 

Trail  with  elevating  gear 238 

Trail  pad,  lash  loops,  and  load  cincha 

3  Pack,  complete 90 

Total 336 

Wheels  (2) **        131 

One  axle,  with  linchpin  and  washers 

Hangers 20 

Dragropes  (2),  brake  ropes  (2) 18 

4  Handspike,  lifting  bars,  sponge  brush  and  rod 25 

Implement  straps  and  belly  cincha , 

Pack,  complete ". 90 

Total 337 

Ammunition-box  hangers  (2) " 44 

Rounds,  complete  (12) 180 

Ammunition  and  belly  cinchas 7 

5  Tubular  oil  can  (filled) 12 

Pack,  complete 90 

Total 333 

f  Ammunition-box  hangers 42 

Rounds,  complete  (10,  double  common  shells) 205 

ilCinchas 7 

IPack,  complete 90 


Total... 


344 


o 


AH  15  1916 
SENT  ON  ILL 

MAY  1  3  1998 

U.  C.  BERKELEY 


.YC  63122 


